Star_doc_03cf944fc3 - Public Records Archive

Full Text

Contract Documents & Specifications CITY OF STAR, IDAHO EVENTS CENTER Volume 1 of 2 Technical Specifications SEPTEMBER 2025 Ryan V. Morgan, P.E. 10769 W State St Star, ID 83669 (208) 286-7247 ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 061200 - STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS SECTION 061300 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 SECTION 061715 - ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL WOOD SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072500 – WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS SECTION 074646 - FIBER-WOOD SIDING SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081316.13 - ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 088000 - GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING SECTION 095426 - SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING DIVISIONS 10 - 11 NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS DIVISIONS 13 - 20 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3 NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 211313 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 224700 - WATER COOLERS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SECTION 231123 - NATURAL-GAS PIPING SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233400 - HVAC FANS SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS SECTION 233713.23 - AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES SECTION 235533.16 - GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS SECTION 237213 - HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS SECTION 237313.13 - INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS SECTION 238216.14 - ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS SECTION 238239.16 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS DIVISIONS 24 - 25 NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 4 SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260573.13 - SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES SECTION 260573.19 - ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 283100 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS DIVISIONS 29 - 30 NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT APPLICABLE APPENDIX GEOTECHNICAL REPORT (dated 06/30/2025) STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS (dated 09/09/2025) COMcheck REPORT (dated 09/09/25) ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 5 VOLUME 2 DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY) END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUMMARY 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Contractor's use of site and premises. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and Drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for coordination of Owner-installed products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Work Package: A group of specifications, drawings, and schedules prepared by the design team to describe a portion of the Project Work for pricing, permitting, and construction. 1.4 PROJECT INFORMATION 1. Project Identification: Star Events Center Project Location: 400 N. Benjamin, Boise, Idaho 83704. B. Owner: City of Star 1. Owner's Representative: Ryan V. Morgan; City Engineer; City of Star; 10769 West State Street, Star, Idaho 83669 C. Architect: Cushing Terrell. 1. Architect's Representative: Angela M. Hansen, [PHONE REDACTED], [EMAIL REDACTED]. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUMMARY 011000 - 2 D. Web-Based Project Software: Project software will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using web-based Project software. 1.5 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and includes, but is not limited to, the following: The project encompasses a new two-story 12,955 square foot building to be located on LOT 27 DICKSONS SUB #1315-S #9203180 adjacent to the city’s Freedom Park. The building is designed and intended to be utilized as a community space primarily for city-sponsored events, meetings, and as a city-owned building that members of the community can rent for private events. The building also includes a small grounds-maintenance storage space to house city related equipment, and seasonal decorations that are displayed throughout the community during the holiday season. The building's many spaces include: • a large open event space with an elevated platform, a sound booth, • a warming kitchen, • Event center chair and table storge space, • Mechanical, electrical, and janitorial rooms, • Mens and women’s restrooms, and • a grounds maintenance shop area with mezzanine storage. • Exterior to the building is a 12’ wide covered walk that parallels the full length of the building leading the patron to a 1,080 sf outdoor covered patio. Exterior site improvements, including parking, were previously completed by the City of Star. No additional parking is being proposed as part of this project. Landscape improvements as a part of this project are being completed by the City of Star. A. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Restricted Use of Site: Each Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUMMARY 011000 - 3 1. Limits: Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy adjacent buildings and parking areas with in Freedom Park during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing roadway exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to between 7 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. Work hours may be modified to meet project requirements if approved by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging for temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than four days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, Dust, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, dust, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than four days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUMMARY 011000 - 4 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products, alcoholic beverages, and other controlled substances on Owner's property is not permitted. 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Text Color: Text used in the Specifications, including units of measure, manufacturer and product names, and other text may appear in multiple colors or underlined as part of a hyperlink; no emphasis is implied by text with these characteristics. 3. Hypertext: Text used in the Specifications may contain hyperlinks. Hyperlinks may allow for access to linked information that is not residing in the Specifications. Unless otherwise indicated, linked information is not part of the Contract Documents. 4. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 00 Contracting Requirements: General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to all Sections of the Specifications. C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. D. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Document 002600 "Procurement Substitution Procedures" for requirements for substitution requests prior to award of Contract. 2. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit documentation identifying product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided in Appendix of the project manual. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Owner's name. c. Owner's Project number. d. Name of Architect. e. Architect's Project number. f. Contractor's name and address. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 g. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five-percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 6. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 7. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each Purchase contract. Show line-item value of Purchase contract. Indicate Owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 8. Overhead Costs, Proportional Distribution: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item. 9. Overhead Costs, Separate Line Items: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items. 10. Temporary Facilities: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items. 11. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 12. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments, as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. 1. Other Application for Payment forms proposed by the Contractor may be acceptable to Architect and Owner. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Project Manager will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 7. Schedule of unit prices. 8. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 9. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 10. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 11. Copies of building permits. 12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 13. Initial progress report. 14. Report of preconstruction conference. 15. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 16. Performance and payment bonds. 17. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. Complete administrative actions, submittals, and Work preceding this application, as described in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Certification of completion of final punch list items. 3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. a. AIA Document G706. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 b. AIA Document G706A. d. AIA Document G707. 5. Evidence that claims have been settled. 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 7. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 8. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations are paid. 9. Waivers and releases. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. RFIs. 3. Digital project management procedures. 4. Web-based Project management software package. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results, where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Owner name. 3. Owner's Project number. 4. Name of Architect. 5. Architect's Project number. 6. Date. 7. Name of Contractor. 8. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 9. RFI subject. 10. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 11. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 12. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 13. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 14. Contractor's signature. 15. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716. D. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use software log that is part of web-based Project management software. 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number, including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's CAD drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction. 1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project Record Drawings. 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. a. Subcontractors and other parties granted access by Contractor to Architect's digital data files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. 4. The following digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline: a. Floor plans. b. Reflected ceiling plans. B. Web-Based Project Management Software Package: Provide, administer, and use web-based Project management software package for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 1. Web-based Project management software includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify, view, and print documents. c. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities. d. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g. Processing and tracking of payment applications. h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. k. Management of construction progress photographs. l. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets. 2. Provide up to seven Project management software user licenses for use of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for web-based Project software users. 3. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file, incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of seven days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Use of the premises and existing building. o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. u. Construction waste management and recycling. v. Parking availability. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 w. Office, work, and storage areas. x. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other Sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site use. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of Proposal Requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting, where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Material location reports. 4. Site condition reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine the critical path of Project and when activities can be performed. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 G. Resource Loading: The allocation of labor and equipment necessary for completing an activity as scheduled. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file. 2. PDF file. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities, and schedule them in proper sequence. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. B. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting, using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant to attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 C. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date to not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. D. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Temporary Facilities: Indicate start and completion dates for the following as applicable: a. Securing of approvals and permits required for performance of the Work. b. Temporary facilities. c. Construction of mock-ups, prototypes and samples. d. Owner interfaces and furnishing of items. e. Interfaces with Separate Contracts. f. Regulatory agency approvals. g. Punch list. 3. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead-time items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 4. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule. 5. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 6. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for commissioning. 7. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 8. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and Final Completion. E. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use-of-premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. n. Commissioning. 8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. F. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 G. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. H. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Final Completion percentage for each activity. 1.6 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt- chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. 1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 1.7 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Testing and inspection. 8. Accidents. 9. Meetings and significant decisions. 10. Unusual events. 11. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 12. Meter readings and similar recordings. 13. Emergency procedures. 14. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 15. Change Orders received and implemented. 16. Change Directives received and implemented. 17. Services connected and disconnected. 18. Equipment or system tests and startups. 19. Partial completions and occupancies. 20. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013200 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule as required to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal Category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for purchasing. h. Scheduled date of fabrication. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Construction Manager. 5. Name of Contractor. 6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 9. Category and type of submittal. 10. Submittal purpose and description. 11. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 12. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 13. Indication of full or partial submittal. 14. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 15. Other necessary identification. 16. Remarks. 17. Signature of transmitter. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. D. Submittals Utilizing Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files or other format indicated by Project management software. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package and transmit to Ada County Project Manager by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Ada County. 2. Web-Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project management software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections, so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Ada County Project Manager and to the County’s consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Ada County before being returned to Contractor. a. Submit one copy of submittal to Ada County’s consultants in addition to specified number of copies to Ada County’s Project Manager. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block, and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrently with Samples. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. a. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of type, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components, such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable specification section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. Web-Based Project Management Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved samples at project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units, showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of samples. Architect will retain one sample set; remainder will be marked up and returned. The retained sample set will act as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual specification sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead, certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of AWS B2.1/B2.1M on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for substrate preparation and primers required. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use. 1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to County’s Project Manager. B. Delegated Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. BIM Incorporation: Incorporate delegated design drawing and data files into BIM established for Project. 1. Prepare delegated design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Ada County’s project manager. B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions required, and return. 1. PDF Submittals: Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action 2. Paper Submittals: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action 3. Submittals by Web-Based Project Management Software: Architect will indicate, on Project management software website, the appropriate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Ada County’s Project Manager. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013300 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1 SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project. B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place. C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project. D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect. F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated. G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated. I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated. J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated. K. Retain: To keep an element or detail secure and intact. L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 2 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK A. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work at intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 2. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered or uncovered during the Work, regardless of whether they were previously documented, remain Owner's property. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Materials: 1. Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is indicated. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. B. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation: 1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated. C. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 3 D. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures. 1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the identifying marks. 2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft. 3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F or more above the dew point. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK A. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs and progress photos to document work progress and installation methods. Provide photos to Ada County Construction Project Manager on a weekly basis to demonstrate work progression. B. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from alterations. C. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion. 1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 013516 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced," unless otherwise further described, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a Work result does not require that certain construction activities specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. Unless otherwise indicated, copies of reports of tests or inspections performed for other than the Project do not meet this definition. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited in accordance with NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source plant, mill, factory, or shop). G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The term "testing laboratory" has the same meaning as the term "testing agency." H. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work, to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. I. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work, to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality- control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect or Owner. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements is specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, inform the Architect regarding the conflict and obtain clarification prior to proceeding with the Work. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for clarification before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified is the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Primary wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. F. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified. G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample-taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement of whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists will satisfy qualification requirements indicated and engage in the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction supersede requirements for specialists. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, coordinate with the owner on the testing requirements: 1. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Owner with copy to Architect and Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are the contractors’ responsibility. Coordinate timing of special inspections with the owner. Perform additional quality- control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Owner shall provide for retesting and reinspection for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Owner, and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in- situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Owner. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." E. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. As indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Owner and Architect, of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect and with copy to County’s construction project manager and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, and authorities' having jurisdiction reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample-taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 1 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms, including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted," have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms, including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified," have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 2 1. For standards referenced by applicable building codes, comply with dates of standards as listed in building codes. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations, List: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Abbreviations and acronyms not included in this list are to mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." The information in this list is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; (see FGIA). 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; www.concrete.org. 9. ACP - American Clean Power; (Formerly: American Wind Energy Association); www.cleanpower.org. 10. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concretepipe.org. 11. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 12. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 13. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 14. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 15. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 16. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 3 17. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 18. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 19. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 20. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; (see PLIB). 21. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 22. AMPP - Association for Materials Protection and Performance; www.ampp.org. 23. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 24. AOSA/SCST - Association of Official Seed (The)/Society of Commercial Seed Technologists (The); www.analyzeseeds.com. 25. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 26. APA - Architectural Precast Association; 27. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASA - Acoustical Society of America; www.acousticalsociety.org. 30. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 31. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (see ASCE). 32. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 33. ASME - ASME International; [American Society of Mechanical Engineers (The)]; www.asme.org. 34. ASSE - ASSE International; (American Society of Sanitary Engineering); www.asse-plumbing.org. 35. ASSP - American Society of Safety Professionals; www.assp.org. 36. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 37. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 38. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association; www.avixa.org. 39. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 40. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 41. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 42. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 43. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 44. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 45. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 46. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 47. BIFMA - Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association; www.bifma.org. 48. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 49. BWF - Badminton World Federation; www.bwfbadminton.com. 50. CARB - California Air Resources Board; www.arb.ca.gov. 51. CDA - Copper Development Association Inc.; www.copper.org. 52. CE - Conformite Europeenne (European Commission); www.ec.europa.eu/growth/single-market/ce-marking. 53. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 54. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 55. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 4 56. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 57. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 58. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 59. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 60. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 61. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.compositepanel.org. 62. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 63. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 64. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 65. CSA - CSA Group; www.csagroup.org. 66. CSI - Cast Stone Institute; www.caststone.org. 67. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csiresources.org. 68. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 69. CTA - Consumer Technology Association; www.cta.tech. 70. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; www.coolingtechnology.org. 71. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 72. DHA - Decorative Hardwoods Association; www.decorativehardwoods.org. 73. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 74. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.ecianow.org. 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 77. EOS/ESD - EOS/ESD Association, Inc.; Electrostatic Discharge Association; www.esda.org. 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; www.esta.org. 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 81. FGIA - Fenestration and Glazing Industry Alliance; 82. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 83. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 84. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmapprovals.com. 85. FM Global - FM Global; www.fmglobal.com. 86. FRSA - Florida Roofing and Sheet Metal Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 87. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 88. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 89. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 92. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (see NAAMM). 93. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 94. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 95. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 96. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 97. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Association (The); www.theicpa.com. 98. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 99. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 5 100. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 101. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; www.ies.org. 102. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 103. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; (see FGIA). 104. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.org. 105. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 106. Intertek - Intertek Group; www.intertek.com. 107. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); www.isa.org. 108. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; www.isfanow.org. 109. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 110. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int. 111. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 112. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 113. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 114. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 115. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 116. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 117. MHI - Material Handling Industry; www.mhi.org. 118. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 119. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 120. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 121. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 122. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); (see AMPP). 123. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 124. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.insulationinstitute.org. 125. NALP - National Association of Landscape Professionals; www.landscapeprofessionals.org. 126. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 127. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 128. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 129. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 130. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 131. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 132. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 133. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 134. NETA – Inter-National Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 135. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 136. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 137. NFPA - NFPA International; (see NFPA). 138. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 139. NGA - National Glass Association; www.glass.org. 140. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 141. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 142. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (see NWFA). ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 6 143. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 144. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 145. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 146. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 147. NSI - Natural Stone Institute; www.naturalstoneinstitute.org. 148. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 149. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 150. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 151. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 152. NWRA - National Waste & Recycling Association; www.wasterecycling.org. 153. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 154. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 155. PLASA - PLASA; www.plasa.org. 156. PLIB - Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.plib.org. 157. PVCPA - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; (see WWPA). 161. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (see ASCE). 167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.securityindustry.org. 168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 175. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; (see AMPP). 178. STI/SPFA - Steel Tank Institute/Steel Plate Fabricators Association; www.steeltank.com. 179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tcnatile.com. 183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); www.tiaonline.org. 185. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 186. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 7 187. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 188. TRI - Tile Roofing Industry Alliance; www.tileroofing.org. 189. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.org. 190. UL LLC - UL LLC; www.ul.com. 191. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 192. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 193. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 194. WA - Wallcoverings Association; www.wallcoverings.org. 195. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; (see PLIB). 196. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 197. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 198. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.woodworkinstitute.com. 199. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 200. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CPSC - U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 2. DOC - U.S. Department of Commerce; www.commerce.gov. 3. DOD - U.S. Department of Defense; www.defense.gov. 4. DOE - U.S. Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 5. DOJ - U.S. Department of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov 6. DOS - U.S. Department of State; www.state.gov. 7. EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 8. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 9. GPO - U.S. Government Publishing Office; www.gpo.gov. 10. GSA - U.S. General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 11. HUD - U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 12. LBNL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Energy Technologies Area; www.lbl.gov/. 13. NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 14. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 15. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org. 16. USACE - U.S. Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 17. USDA - U.S. Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 8 18. USDA - U.S. Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 19. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 20. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from U.S. Government Publishing Office; www.govinfo.gov. 2. DOD - U.S. Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.dsp.dla.mil/Specs-Standards/. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (see FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (see FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.dsp.dla.mil/Specs-Standards/. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from U.S. General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (see DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (see USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they are to mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. BEARHFTI; California Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; (see BHGS). 2. BHGS; State of California Bureau of Household Goods and Services; (Formerly: California Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation); www.bhgs.dca.ca.gov. 3. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.oal.ca.gov/publications/ccr/. 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; Page.aspx. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS REFERENCES 014200 - 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section Includes: General protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at a height 6 inches above the ground for trees up to and including 4-inch size at this height and as measured at a height of 12 inches above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size. B. Caliper (DBH): Diameter breast height; diameter of a trunk as measured by a diameter tape at a height 54 inches above the ground line for trees with caliper of 8 inches or greater as measured at a height of 12 inches above the ground. C. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings. D. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings. E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones. C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Take precautions to protect plants from airborne contaminants, such as paint or fireproofing overspray. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting[ one of] the following requirements: 1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum 2-inch opening, 0.148-inch- diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts[; with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails] with 0.177-inch- diameter top tension wire] and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. a. Height: 96 inches. B. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering and as follows: 1. Size and Text: As indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree and plant protection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground. B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated. Do not exceed indicated thickness of mulch. 1. Apply 4-inch uniform thickness of organic mulch unless otherwise indicated. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. 2. Install temporary root-protection matting over mulch to the extent indicated. 3.4 PROTECTION ZONES A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering protected areas except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation. 1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F567 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect. B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Architect. Install one sign spaced approximately every 50 ft. on protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction. C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash. D. Maintain hydration of plants to assure plant survival. E. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site. 1. Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone. 2. Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain root buffer so long as access is permitted. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.5 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones in accordance with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" unless otherwise indicated. B. Trenching within Protection Zones: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, excavate under or around tree roots by hand or with air spade, or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. 3.6 ROOT PRUNING A. Prune tree roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as indicated on Drawingsand as follows: 1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible in accordance with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune tree roots 6 inches inside of the protection zone by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation. C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand or with air spade to the depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to tree root systems. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil to expose roots. Cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 3.7 CROWN PRUNING A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches as directed by arborist. 1. Prune to remove only injured, broken, dying, or dead branches unless otherwise indicated. Do not prune for shape unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not remove or reduce living branches to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Unless otherwise directed by arborist and acceptable to Architect, do not cut tree leaders. C. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. D. Do not paint or apply sealants to wounds. E. Provide subsequent maintenance pruning during Contract period as recommended by arborist. F. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site. 3.8 REGRADING A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning. C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone. D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with backfill soil. Place backfill soil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports. 3.10 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 ft. beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand. END OF SECTION 015639 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of This Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Salvaged items or items reused from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products unless otherwise indicated. 3. Comparable Product: Product by named manufacturer that is demonstrated and approved through the comparable product submittal process described in "Comparable Products" Article, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. If a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications; submit a comparable product request or substitution request, if applicable. C. Substitution: Refer to Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for definition and limitations on substitutions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Resolution of Compatibility Disputes between Multiple Contractors: a. Contractors are responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. b. If a dispute arises between the multiple contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products will be used. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of approved comparable products and approved substitutions. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. 2. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 3. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections are to be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written standard warranty form furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and issued in the name of Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner and issued in the name of Owner or endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included in the Project Manual, prepare a written document, using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect through Construction Manager in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Unless otherwise indicated, evaluation of "or equal" product status is by Architect, whose determination is final. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following." 2. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following." 3. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed or an unnamed product that complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of an unnamed product is not considered a substitution if the product complies with requirements. 4. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following." 5. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or a product by an unnamed manufacturer that complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following." b. Provision of products of an unnamed manufacturer is not considered a substitution if the product complies with requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require the phrase "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with the following requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those of the named basis-of-design product. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. B. Architect's Action on Comparable Products Submittal: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for a comparable product. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 1. Architect's Approval of Submittal: Marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." 2. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. C. Submittal Requirements, Two-Step Process: Approval by Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 D. Submittal Requirements, Single-Step Process: When acceptable to Architect, incorporate specified submittal requirements of individual Specification Section in combined submittal for comparable products. Approval by Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product and of individual submittal requirements will also satisfy other submittal requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Installation. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for coordination of Owner-furnished products, Owner's separate contracts, and limits on use of Project site. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of subsequent work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of subsequent work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function is not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 2 b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. l. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work, including Specification Section number and paragraph, and Drawing sheet number and detail, where applicable. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 4 B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect in accordance with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, If discrepancies are discovered, notify Ada County’s Construction Manager and Architect 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected for Project. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on-site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 5 G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions with manufacturer. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect, as judged by Architect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 6 G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable, as judged by Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, corner to corner of wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 7 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, in accordance with regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces in accordance with written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EXECUTION 017300 - 8 H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated spoil areas on Owner’s property. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to requirements in this Section. Indicate quantities by weight or volume but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be recycled or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for recycling, and disposal. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch size. B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 4-inch size. 2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. C. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. D. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3 E. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. F. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. G. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members, including trim and other metals from acoustical panels and tile, and sort with other metals. H. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by carpet reclamation agency or carpet recycler. I. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive. 1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by carpet reclamation agency or carpet recycler. J. Piping: Reduce piping to straight and store by material and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by material and size. K. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight and store by material and size. L. Lamps: Separate lamps by type and store according to requirements in 40 CFR 273. 3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. D. Paint: Seal containers and store by type. END OF SECTION 017419 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final Completion procedures. 3. List of incomplete items. 4. Submittal of Project warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 1.2 0DEFINITIONS A. List of Incomplete Items: Contractor-prepared list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared for the Architect's use prior to Architect's inspection, to determine if the Work is substantially complete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items required by other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's "punch list"), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction, permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment in accordance with Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list will state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit Final Completion photographic documentation. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first, listed by room or space number. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceilings, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF Electronic File: Architect will return annotated file. c. Web-Based Project Software Upload: Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items (punch list). d. Three Paper Copies: Architect will return two copies. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. D. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. E. Warranties in Paper Form: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 d. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. f. Clean flooring, removing debris, dirt, and staining; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. g. Vacuum and mop concrete. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. o. Clean luminaires, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Clean strainers. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations required by "Correction of the Work" Article in Section 017300 "Execution" before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 017700 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 2. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 3. Product maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or united by regular interaction. B. A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Submit three paper copies. Architect will return two copies. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and identify color coding where required for identification. 1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals. 1.9 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017823 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one set(s) of file prints. 3) Submit Record Digital Data Files and one set(s) of plots. 4) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit three paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned Record Prints and three set(s) of file prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. c. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 2) Submit Record Digital Data Files and three set(s) of Record Digital Data File plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and Contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation, where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record prints with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as for the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG, Version, Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4 1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation, where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and Contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and revisions to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit Record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include Record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017839 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete standards. 2. Concrete materials. 3. Admixtures. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Curing materials. 7. Repair materials. 8. Concrete mixture class types. 9. Concrete mixing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033543 "Polished Concrete Finishing" for concrete floors scheduled to receive a polished concrete finish. 2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-ground. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement or blended hydraulic cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: 1. Fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Water/Cementitious Materials (w/cm) Ratio: The ratio by weight of mixing water to cementitious materials. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Concrete Subcontractor. c. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Review the following: a. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint-filler strips. b. Concrete finishes and finishing. c. Methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness. d. Floor and slab flatness and levelness measurements. e. Concrete repair procedures. f. Concrete protection. g. Concrete polishing and staining. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Blended hydraulic cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Aggregates. 4. Ground calcium carbonate and aggregate mineral fillers. 5. Admixtures: a. Include limitations of use. Admixtures that do not comply with reference ASTM International requirements must be submitted with test data for approval. 6. Color pigments. 7. Fiber reinforcement. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Floor and slab treatments. 10. Liquid floor treatments. 11. Curing materials. a. Include documentation from color pigment manufacturer, indicating that proposed methods of curing are recommended by color pigment manufacturer. 12. Joint fillers. 13. Repair materials. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: 1. Mixture identification. 2. Compressive strength at 28 days or other age as specified. 3. Compressive strength required at stages of construction. 4. Durability exposure classes for Exposure Categories F, S, W, and C. 5. Maximum w/cm ratio. 6. Calculated equilibrium and fresh density for lightweight concrete. 7. Slump or slump flow limit. 8. Air content. 9. Nominal maximum aggregate size. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 10. Steel-fiber reinforcement content. 11. microfiber content. 12. microfiber content. 13. Intended placement method. 14. Submit adjustments to design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant changes. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For the following: 1. Installer: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates. 2. Testing Agency: Include documentation indicating compliance with ASTM E329 or ASTM C1077 and copies of applicable ACI certificates for testing technicians or ACI Concrete Construction Special Inspector - MH, ASCC. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials. C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements report, indicating compliance with specified tolerances in accordance with ACI 117 and in compliance with ASTM E1155. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer's production facilities and delivery vehicles certified in accordance with NRMCA's certification requirements or equivalent approval by a State DOT. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 as follows: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below 40 deg F during the protection period, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than reinforcing steel. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F other permitted limit. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE STANDARDS A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for entire Project. 2. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, Type IL, portland-limestone cement. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S 2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 3. Recycled Aggregate: Provide documentation of characteristics of recycled aggregate and mechanical properties and durability of proposed concrete, which incorporates recycled aggregate to conform to appliable requirements for the class of concrete. 4. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following for each aggregate used: a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one year when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293. b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in Combination: Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C1567. Do not use this option with fly ash with an alkali content greater than 4.0 percent. Submit supporting data for each aggregate showing expansion in excess of 0.10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C1260. c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not to exceed 4 lb./cu. yd. for aggregate with expansion greater than or equal to 0.04 percent and less than 0.12 percent or 3 lb./cu. yd. for aggregate with expansion greater than or equal to 0.12 percent and less than 0.24 percent. Test aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1293. Calculate alkali content of concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Do not use this option with natural pozzolan or fly ash that has a calcium oxide content greater than 18 percent or an alkali content greater than 4.0 percent; or for an aggregate with expansion at one year greater than or equal to 0.24 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-reinforced concrete. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 3. Admixtures with special properties, with documentation of claimed performance enhancement, ASTM C494/C494M, Type S. B. Mixing Water for Concrete Mixtures and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C1602/C1602M. Include documentation of compliance with limits for alkalis, sulfates, chlorides, or solids content of mixing water from Table 2 in ASTM C1602/C1602M. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A, except with maximum water-vapor permeance of. Include manufacturer's recommended thickness and adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Barrier-Bac; Inteplast Group. b. Foxfire Enterprises, Inc. c. ISI Building Products. d. Poly-America, L.P. e. Reef Industries, Inc. f. Stego Industries, LLC. g. Tex-Trude. h. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable water that does not cause staining of the surface. B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Dayton Superior Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURE CLASS TYPES A. Class A: Normal-weight concrete used for footings, grade beams, and tie beams. 1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 Class F1. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi As indicated at 28 days. 3. Maximum w/cm Ratio: 0.45. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for concrete . 5. Air Content: a. Exposure Class F1: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete containing 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Class B: Normal-weight concrete used for foundation walls. 1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 Class F1 . 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days. 3. Maximum w/cm Ratio: 0.45. 4. Air Content: a. Exposure Class F1: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete containing 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Class C: Normal-weight concrete used for interior slabs-on-ground. 1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 Class F0. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 3. Maximum w/cm Ratio : 0.45. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for concrete . 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M and furnish delivery ticket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following: 1. Daily access to the Work. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test samples. 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour. 2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour. 3. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 4. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. 5. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete. a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping damages area by 6 inches on all sides and sealing to vapor retarder. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed. 1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient installation, and repair defective areas. 2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. C. Water addition in transit or at the Project site must be in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M and must not exceed the permitted amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 301. a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect. 2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: 1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. F. Dowel Plates: Install dowel plates at joints where indicated on Drawings. 3.8 APPLICATION OF FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Scratch Finish: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. 2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch in one direction. 3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings. B. Float Finish: 1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. 2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 tolerances for conventional concrete. 3. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. C. Trowel Finish: 1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. 2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 4. Do not add water to concrete surface. Use of an approved finishing aid is acceptable. 5. Do not apply troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater than 3 percent. 6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Slabs on Ground: 1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; and of levelness, FL 20; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 17; and of levelness, FL 15. 2) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 25; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 17. 3) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 45; and of levelness, FL 35; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 30; and of levelness, FL 24. 4) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 50; and of levelness, FL 35; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 40; and of levelness, FL 24. b. Suspended Slabs: 1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; and of levelness, FL 20; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 17; and of levelness, FL 15. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 20; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 15. 3) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 45; and of levelness, FL 35; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 30; and of levelness, FL 24. D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: First apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated on Drawings. While concrete is still plastic, scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, roughen trafficked surface by brooming with a fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps, as indicated on Drawings. 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: a. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip-resistive aluminum granules over surface in one or two applications. b. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. c. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. d. After curing, work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive aluminum granules. G. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. 3. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating. 4. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. 5. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing. 3.9 APPLICATION OF FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. As-Cast Surface Finishes: 1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch. c. Tie holes do not require patching. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117, Class D. e. Apply to concrete surfaces for metal lap pan deck formed surfaces and those surfaces that are buried or covered with subsequent installed surfaces. 2. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch. c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117, Class B. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 3. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-3.0: a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/8 inch. c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class A. e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to as-cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: a. Perform no later than one day after form removal. b. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. c. If sufficient cement paste cannot be drawn from the concrete by the rubbing process, use a grout made from the same cementitious materials used in the in-place concrete. d. Maintain required patterns or variances as shown on Drawings or to match. 2. Grout-Cleaned Rubbed Finish: a. Clean concrete surfaces after contiguous surfaces are completed and accessible. b. Do not clean concrete surfaces as Work progresses. c. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand, complying with ASTM C144 or ASTM C404, by volume, with sufficient water to produce a mixture with the consistency of thick paint. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS d. Wet concrete surfaces. e. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap, and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. f. Maintain required patterns or variances as shown on Drawings or to match. C. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Apply the following to as-cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings: 1. Perform abrasive blasting after compressive strength of concrete exceeds 2000 psi. 2. Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted are treated at the same age. 3. Surface Continuity: a. Perform abrasive-blast finishing as continuous operation, maintaining continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. b. Maintain required patterns or variances in depths of blast to match. 4. Abrasive Blasting: a. Abrasive-blast corners and edges of patterns carefully, using backup boards to maintain uniform corner and edge lines. b. Determine type of nozzle pressure and blasting techniques required to match field sample. c. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces to match field sample, as follows: 1) Brush Texture: Remove cement matrix to dull surface sheen and expose face of fine aggregate, with no significant reveal. 2) Light Texture: Expose fine aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform color, with maximum reveal of 1/16 inch. 3) Medium Texture: Generally, expose coarse aggregate with slight reveal and with a maximum reveal of 1/4 inch. 4) Heavy Texture: Expose and reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of one-third its diameter, with reveal range of 1/4 to 1/2 inch. d. Maintain required patterns or variances in reveal projection to match. D. High-Pressure Water-Jet Finish: Apply the following to as-cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings: 1. Perform high-pressure water jetting on concrete that has achieved a minimum compressive strength of 4500 psi. 2. Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be high-pressure water-jet finished are treated at same age for uniform results. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Surface Continuity: Perform high-pressure water-jet finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, maintaining continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. 4. Maintain required patterns or variances in reveal projection to match . E. Bushhammer Finish: Apply the following to as-cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings: 1. Perform bushhammer finish to concrete that has achieved a minimum compressive strength of 4500 psi. 2. Surface Continuity: a. Perform bushhammer finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, maintaining continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. 3. Surface Cut: a. Maintain required depth of cut and general aggregate exposure. b. Use power tool with hammer attachments for large, flat surfaces, and use hand hammers for small areas, at corners and edges, and for restricted locations where power tools cannot reach. 4. Remove impressions of formwork and form facings with exception of tie holes. 5. Maintain required patterns or variances of cut as shown on Drawings or to match. 6. Maintain control of concrete chips, dust, and debris in each Work area, limiting migration of airborne materials and dust by use of tarpaulins, windbreaks, or similar devices. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling in: 1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to match color and texture with in-place construction exposed to view. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Construct concrete bases high unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. a. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. b. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. c. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. 1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings. 2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.11 APPLICATION OF CONCRETE CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI 301 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing. 3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h, calculated in accordance with ACI 305R, before and during finishing operations. B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. 2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment manufacturer's instructions. 3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period as follows: a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete. b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS d. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Begin curing after finishing concrete. 2. Interior Concrete Floors: a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. 2) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following not in cold weather: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. b. Floors to Receive Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. b) Cure for not less than seven days. 2) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Floors to Receive Polished Finish: Contractor has option of the following: 1) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. d. Floors To Receive Chemical Stain: 1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install curing paper over entire area of floor. 2) Install curing paper square to building lines, without wrinkles, and in a single length without end joints. 3) Butt sides of curing paper tight; do not overlap sides of curing paper. 4) Leave curing paper in place for duration of curing period, but not less than 28 days. e. Floors To Receive Urethane Flooring: 1) As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire area of floor. 2) Rewet absorptive cover, and cover immediately with polyethylene moisture-retaining cover with edges lapped 6 inches and sealed in place. 3) Secure polyethylene moisture-retaining cover in place to prohibit air from circulating under polyethylene moisture-retaining cover. 4) Leave absorptive cover and polyethylene moisture-retaining cover in place for duration of curing period, but not less than 28 days. f. Floors To Receive Curing Compound: 1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. g. Floors To Receive Curing and Sealing Compound: 1) Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. 3) Repeat process 24 hours later, and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 APPLICATION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 INSTALLATION OF JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to meet specification requirements. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch spalls, air bubbles exceeding surface finish limits, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface exceeding surface finish limits, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. b. Compact mortar in place and match surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and structural performance, as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. a. Correct low and high areas. b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width. 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing operations by adding patching mortar. a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping. a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. 1. Testing agency to be responsible for providing curing facility for initial curing of strength test specimens on-site and verifying that test specimens are cured in accordance with standard curing requirements in ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Testing agency to immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency to report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests. a. Test reports to include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test and inspection: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1) Project name. 2) Name of testing agency. 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians performing inspections and testing. 4) Name of concrete manufacturer. 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing. 6) Date and time of concrete placement. 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples. 8) Date and time sample was obtained. 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers. 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days. 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials. 12) Field test results of fresh concrete, including slump or slump flow, air content, temperature and density. 13) Information on storage and curing of samples at the Project site, including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial curing period. 14) Type of fracture and compressive break at seven days and 28 days. 4. Provide a space and source of power or other resources for curing and access to test specimens by the testing agency. B. Delivery Tickets: comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Inspections: 1. Headed bolts and studs. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. 6. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M to be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 150 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing is to be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 22 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. One test at point of delivery for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. b. Perform additional tests as needed. 3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M: a. One test at point of delivery for each composite sample when strength test specimens are cast, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. b. Perform additional tests as needed. 4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; . a. One test for each composite sample when strength test specimens are cast, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M: a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample when strength test specimens are cast. 6. Concrete Density: ASTM C138/C138M: a. One test for each composite sample when strength test specimens are cast. 7. Unit Weight: ASTM C138/C138M density of fresh structural lightweight concrete. a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. The fresh density should be consistent with that associated with the equilibrium density within a tolerance of plus or minus 4 lb/ft.3. 8. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M: a. Cast and standard cure two sets of three 6 inches by 12-inches or 4-inch by 8-inch cylindrical specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast, and field cure two sets of [two] [three] [four] standard cylindrical specimens for each composite sample. 9. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. a. Test one set of three standard cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 [other age] days. b. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 23 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. A compressive-strength test to be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 10. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor to evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 11. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests of standard cured cylinders equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: a. Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength to be in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.7.6.3. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 within 48 hours of completion of floor finishing and report test results to Architect. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows: 1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs. 4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 24 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. 8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished concrete finish using floor slab protective covering. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 25 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stain materials. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Aggregate Exposure Class: Visual observation of polished floor aggregate surface exposure area after grinding and polishing operations. Aggregate exposure class ranges are A, B, and C. B. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete. C. Distinctness of Image (DOI): The distinctness (clarity) of images reflected by the glossy coating surface appearance of the polished concrete finish appearance levels. The transmission of this reflection is measured in accordance with ASTM D5767. D. Haze: The cloudiness or milky appearance of images from objects produced by reflection in a polished concrete surface. The measurement of this appearance is defined in accordance with ASTM D4039. The test method reading is put into a calculation resulting in a Haze Index value. E. Specular Gloss: A reflectance value determined by a single measurement of gloss from shining a known amount of light at a surface within a specific angle of illumination in accordance with ASTM D523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints. C. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed color. POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. An installer experienced in performing polished concrete finishing with a minimum of five previous projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 2. Trained and certified by manufacturer of polished concrete system materials. B. Polished Concrete Standards: Comply with ACI 310.1. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as needed for other construction activities. B. Ambient Conditions: Ensure installation location and Project ambient conditions comply with manufacturers written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STAIN MATERIALS A. Penetrating Stain: Coloring agents used to add consistent color to polished concrete surfaces without coloring the aggregates. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AmeriPolish. b. See Material List in the Construction Documents. c. Interior Designer approved equal. B. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, verify paints and coatings comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 2. Stains: 100 g/L. 2.2 POLISHED CONCRETE SURFACE FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Aggregate Exposure Class: Class B Fine Aggregate 85 to 95 percent fine aggregate; 5 to 15 percent blend of fines and coarse aggregate. POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Polish Concrete Appearance Levels: Level 3: Polished (Polished Gloss) up to 400- to 800-grit polish; DOI 40 to 69; Haze Reading less than 10; Reflective Sheen: Medium to high. C. Slip Resistance: Minimum Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) of 0.42. Provide required slip resistance based on final gloss level and determined by the Concrete Polishing Council. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Repair Materials: As recommended in writing by manufacturer to repair and fill cracks, and repair surfaces compatible with polishing materials. B. Water: Potable. C. Cleaning Agents: As recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.4 POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and Supplies: Provide equipment and supplies, not limited to, the concrete grinding and concrete polisher equipment, tooling and polishing diamonds for the polished concrete finishing Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete substrates are acceptable for grinding, polishing and product installation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Do not begin Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed and corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify that concrete substrate preparation is in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Clean surfaces free of dust, dirt and other contaminates incompatible with liquids applied products and polishing. C. Clean and seal cracks as recommended by manufacturer. D. Prepare, clean and fill joints with joint filler as recommended in writing by manufacturer. POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Clean surface completely of any dust with cleaning solution as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Machine grind floor surfaces progressively to receive aggregate and polish appearance levels indicated to match approved mockup. B. Scoring: Score decorative jointing in concrete surfaces 1/16 inch deep with diamond blades to match pattern indicated. Rinse until water is clear. Score as recommended by the stain manufacturer. 1. Joint Width: 3/8 inch. C. Apply penetrating stain densifier treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats. D. Apply reactive color stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Apply color dyes for polished concrete in polishing sequence and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Apply sealers to polished concrete in polishing sequence and in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions. G. Continue progressively polishing to aggregate and polish appearance levels to match approved mockup for final finish appearance. H. Visually inspect to remove defects and repolish areas that are defective. Repolish those areas that do not meet specified aggregate and polish levels per approved mockup. I. Complete edges of floor finish that adjoins surrounding floor areas in a sharp and clean manner. J. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. B. Protect installed polished concrete surfaces from damage during construction in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 033543 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303. B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A6/A6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches. D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "protected zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. E. Demand-Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the seismic-load-resisting system and which are indicated as "demand critical" or "seismic critical" on Drawings. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand-critical welds. 8. Identify members not to be shop primed. B. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand-critical welds. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds are to pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G are to be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. ANSI/AISC 303. 2. ANSI/AISC 341. 3. ANSI/AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." B. Connection Design Information: 1. Option 1: Connection designs have been completed and connections indicated on the Drawings. 2. Option 2: Fabricator's experienced steel detailer selects or completes connections in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303. a. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and ANSI/AISC 360. 2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS A. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural-steel framing has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. F. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth. H. Welded-Steel Door Frames: Build up welded-steel door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 2. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts." 3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M. 4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: a. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear stud connector. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Conduct tests in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear stud connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear stud connectors already tested. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structural-steel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303. D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes indicated on Drawings. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. 2. Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." B. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Shear wall panels. 5. Wood blocking and nailers. 6. Wood furring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061300 "Heavy Timber Construction." 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment. 3. Section 064013 "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for exterior wood stairs and railings. 4. Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior wood stairs and railings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. D. OSB: Oriented strand board. E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension. F. Lumber grading agencies, and abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: 1. For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Qualification Statements: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: Comply with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry wood products. 4. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 1. Boards: 19 percent. 2. Dimension Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 3. Timber. 19 percent. C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 3. After treatment, redry dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. . ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions by Grade: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade. 1. Application: All interior partitions. B. Load-Bearing Partitions by Grade: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Exterior walls interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing by Grade: No. 2grade. 1. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. D. Exposed Framing Indicated to Receive a Stained or Natural Finish: Hand-select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Species and Grade: a. Hem-fir (north); No. 1 grade; NLGA. 2.4 TIMBER FRAMING A. Comply with the following requirements, according to grading rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: a. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or Douglas fir-south; No. 1 grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: Insert number percent. 3. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers. 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Boise Cascade Company. b. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. c. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi. 4. Horizontal Shear: 285 psi. C. Moisture Protection: 1. For western species (Douglas fir/hemlock), factory end and edge seal laminated veneer lumber with opaque moisture barrier. 2. For southern and eastern species (southern yellow pine, yellow poplar), factory seal laminated veneer lumber on face, edge, and ends. D. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Comply with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D5055. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Web Material: Either OSB or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 3. Structural Properties: Depths and design values not less than those indicated. 4. Comply with APA PRI-400. Factory mark I-joists with APA-EWS trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA-EWS standard. E. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research or evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: All-veneer product. 3. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Comply with APA PRR-401, rim board grade. Factory mark rim boards with APA-EWS trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA-EWS standard. 2.6 SHEAR WALL PANELS A. Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing. B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 5. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 6. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 7. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 8. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless steel fasteners. 3. For redwood, use hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. E. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. F. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 1. Bolt Diameter: 5/8 inch. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. D. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Install sill sealer gasket/termite barrier in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. I. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. K. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. L. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide minimum of 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Provide diagonal bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner, at 45-degree angle, full-story height unless otherwise indicated. Use 1-by-4-inch nominal- size boards, let-in flush with faces of studs. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed more than 4 inches. C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than one-third depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to three joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches beyond bend. H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. J. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF TIMBER FRAMING A. Install timber beams with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch airspace at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 1 SECTION 061200 - STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Structural Insulated Panels (SIPs) and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry for requirements for miscellaneous framing, blocking, and nailers associated with installation of SIPs. 2. Division 07 water resistive barrier section for application on SIP walls. 3. Division 07 roofing section for underlayment application over SIP roofs. 4. Division 09 flooring section for separation layer application over SIP floors. 5. Division 23 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Insulated Panels (SIPs) consist of oriented strand board (OSB) laminated with a structural adhesive to an expanded (EPS) or graphite (GPS) insulation core. B. SIP manufacturer-supplied accessories. C. Treatment for SIP OSB consisting of integral Zinc Borate Treatment 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/APA PRS 610.1 - Standard for Performance Rated Structural Insulated Panels in Wall Applications. B. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Thermal Insulation. C. ASTM D7446 - Standard Specification for Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) Adhesives for Laminating Oriented Strand Board (OSB) to Rigid Cellular Thermal Insulation Core Materials. D. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. E. ICC-ES AC04 – Sandwich Panel Acceptance Criteria F. ICC-ES AC436- Establishing Seismic Equivalency to Code-prescribed Light-frame Shear Walls Sheathed with Wood Structural Panels Rated for Shear Resistance G. ICC-ES AC05 - Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 2 H. ICC-ES AC239 – Acceptance Criteria for Termite-Resistant Foam-Plastics I. California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom J. California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct meeting to verify Project requirements, foundation/structural system/substrate conditions, SIP manufacturer’s installation instructions, SIP manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Product Code Report: Provide copy of manufacturer’s ICC-ES Report 2. Quality Assurance Program: Provide evidence of manufacturer’s third-party quality assurance program. 3. Manufacturer’s instructions: Provide manufacturer’s Design Manual and Load Design Charts. 4. SIPA Membership: Provide certificate indicating SIPs manufacturer is a Structural Insulated Panel Association (SIPA) manufacturing member in good standing. 5. Experience: Provide evidence of manufacturer’s minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing SIPs for projects of similar scope and size. B. Installer: Installer shall have at least one of the following qualifications: 1. Field Supervisor having completed SIPA Registered Builder SIP Builder Training Program 2. Field Supervisor having completed Carpenters International Training Fund (CITF) Program on Structural Insulated Panels 01-19_Special_Catalog_OPT.pdf 3. Field Supervisor having completed training provided by the SIP manufacturer. 4. Field Supervisor shall have a minimum of three verifiable SIP installations in successful service. C. Professional Engineer: Experienced professional engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction. D. SIP Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Instructions shall be available onsite. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 3 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For SIPs and accessories. 1. ICC-ES Report. 2. Design Manual. 3. Load Design Charts. 4. R-values and U-values 5. SIP Sealant Product Data (reference: 1.3 H, 1.7 G, 1.8 C) 6. SIP Screw Product Data. 7. SIP Tape Product Data. 8. Treated OSB Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication layout, supports required by this Section, and installation details for SIPs. 1. Indicate locations of structural supports not specified in this Section. 2. Indicate location and type of field-installed lumber. 3. Indicate type, size, and spacing requirements for fasteners. 4. Design Loads: Indicate design loads corresponding to Project requirements. C. Delegated Design: For SIPs indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer, Installer, and Professional Engineer. B. Product Code Report: ICC-ES Report in conformance with AC04 and AC436. 1. Label each SIP with identification of third-party inspection agency and evaluation report number. C. Product Code Report: Evaluation Report in conformance AC239 for termite resistant expanded (EPS) or graphite (GPS) insulation core D. Shop drawings: Shop drawings for SIPs showing layout and elevations. E. Engineering: Provide structural calculations by a registered professional engineer to verify SIPs meet project requirements. F. Clean Air Certification information for a complete SIP component assembly and the requirements for complying to the CDPH Standard Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom. G. Clean Air Certification information for Sealants and the requirements for complying to CDPH Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 4 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer warranty meeting requirements of Warranty Article. B. Date valid Clean Air Certificate having the: SIP manufactures name, certificate number, manufacturing location, product description for the complete SIP component assembly, showing compliance to the CDPH Standard Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom. C. Date valid Clean Air Certificate having the: SIP Sealant suppliers name, certificate number, supplier’s location, product description for the SIP Sealant, showing compliance to the CDPH Standard Method v1.2: Private Office and School Classroom. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Handling: Unload and move SIPs using forklift or other means that fully support SIPs. Do not handle SIPs by top facing only. B. Support: SIPs and SIP Accessories to be stored a minimum of 3 inches above ground/surface. Support SIPs flat on minimum of 3 in. wide stickers with length equal to the width of the SIPs with stickers placed no further than four feet on center, or equivalent. C. Protection: Protect SIPs and SIP Accessories from exposure to the elements when stored onsite. Cover stored SIPs and SIP Accessories with secured protective covering. 1.10 WARRANTY A. SIP Manufacturer Warranty: Warranty against material failure of SIPs installed according to manufacturer's instructions by qualified installer under normal use. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted without fourteen (14) day prior approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design structural components. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 5 B. Structural Performance: SIPs shall withstand the effects of design loads shown on approved SIP Manufacturer’s shop drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Design Loads: a. Design Wind Speed: b. Live Loads (Roof): c. Live Loads (Floor): 3. Maximum Deflection under Design Loads: a. Roof SIPs: Vertical deflection of L/240 of span. C. Fire Resistant Assemblies: 1. 1-hour Fire Resistant Wall Assembly 2. 1-hour Fire Resistant Roof Assembly 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Provides SIPs products by: 1. Premier Building Systems, LLC 18504 Canyon Road East, Puyallup, WA 98375. www.premiersips.com [EMAIL REDACTED] (800) 275-7086 B. Manufacturers: Subject to requirements of the Contract Documents, provide SIPs by one of the following: Premier Building Systems, 15 Arden Drive, Belgrade, MT 59714 www.premiersips.com [EMAIL REDACTED] 1. Extreme Panel Technologies, Inc, 475 E 4th St., Cottonwood, MN 56229. www.extremepanel.com [EMAIL REDACTED] C. Limitations: Obtain SIPs from a single SIP manufacturer. Obtain SIP accessories from SIP manufacturer or as recommended by SIP manufacturer. 2.3 STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS (SIPs) A. SIPs shall consist of the following panel construction: 1. Termite Resistant Expanded insulation core complying with ASTM C578 Type I and ICC-ES AC239. 2. Oriented strand board (OSB) facing in conformance with DOC PS 2 and complying with ANSI/APA PRS 610.1 Table 2. 3. Adhesive complying with the requirements of ASTM D7446 or ICC-ES AC05. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 6 B. SIP Walls: 1. 4-1/2 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 15 and a U-value of 0.066 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 16 and a U-value of 0.061 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 18 and a U-value of 0.055 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 19 and a U-value of 0.052 at 40 deg. F. 2. 6-1/2 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 23 and a U-value of 0.044 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 25 and a U-value of 0.040 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 28 and a U-value of 0.036 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 29 and a U-value of 0.034 at 40 deg. F. 3. 8-1/4 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 30 and a U-value of 0.034 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 32 and a U-value of 0.031 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 36 and a U-value of 0.028 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 38 and a U-value of 0.026 at 40 deg. F. C. SIP Roof: 1. 4-1/2 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 15 and a U-value of 0.066 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 16 and a U-value of 0.061 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 18 and a U-value of 0.055 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 19 and a U-value of 0.052 at 40 deg. F. 2. 6-1/2 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 23 and a U-value of 0.044 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 25 and a U-value of 0.040 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 28 and a U-value of 0.036 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 29 and a U-value of 0.034 at 40 deg. F. 3. 8-1/4 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 30 and a U-value of 0.034 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 32 and a U-value of 0.031 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 36 and a U-value of 0.028 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 38 and a U-value of 0.026 at 40 deg. F. 4. 10-1/4 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 37 and a U-value of 0.027 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 40 and a U-value of 0.025 at 40 deg. F. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 7 c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 45 and a U-value of 0.022 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 48 and a U-value of 0.021 at 40 deg. F. 5. 12-1/4 in. thick SIP with: a. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 45 and a U-value of 0.022 at 75 deg. F. b. EPS Core SIP: R-value of 49 and a U-value of 0.021 at 40 deg. F. c. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 55 and a U-value of 0.018 at 75 deg. F. d. GPS Core SIP: R-value of 58 and a U-value of 0.017 at 40 deg. F. 2.4 SIP ACCESSORIES A. Splines: Block Splines and I-Beam Splines for joining SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings shall be supplied by SIP manufacturer. B. Sealant: Sealant for sealing SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions shall be supplied by SIP manufacturer. C. SIP Screws: SIP manufacturer-provided screws for attachment of SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions. D. Nails: Nails for attachment of SIP connections in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions shall be supplied by Installer. E. SIP Tape: Tape for sealing SIP joints in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions shall be supplied by SIPs manufacturer. F. Lumber: Lumber required for installation of SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions shall be supplied by SIP manufacturer. 1. Pressure-Treated Wood Sill Plate: Refer to Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Other Lumber: Refer to Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." G. Capillary Break Material: Material required for installation of SIPs in accordance with the SIP manufacturer’s written instructions. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Sizes: Fabricate SIPs in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification: Verify conditions of foundation/structural system/substrate and other conditions which affect installation of SIPs. Verify foundation is plumb and square. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 8 Verify bearing requirements and substrate tolerances meet SIP manufacturer's written requirements. B. Report non-complying conditions in writing to the SIP manufacturer and the design professional. Proceed with installation once non-complying conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SIPS, GENERAL A. Installation: Handle and install SIPs in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings. B. Splines: Install splines for joining SIPs in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings. C. Sealant: Apply joint sealant for sealing SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Nails: Install nails for attachment of SIP connections in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s written instructions. E. SIP Screws: Install SIP screws for attachment of SIPs in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s written instructions. F. SIP Tape: Apply Tape for sealing SIP joints in accordance with SIP manufacturer’s instructions. G. Lumber: Install accessory lumber in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SIPs IN WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Installation of SIP Walls on Concrete or Masonry Foundations: 1. Capillary Break: Install capillary break material on concrete slabs prior to erection of wall SIPs. 2. Treated Sill Plate: Install preservative-treated wood sill plate on concrete and masonry substrates equal in width to SIP thickness in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s instructions. B. Installation of SIP Walls on Wood Subfloors: 1. SIP Bottom Plate: Install lumber bottom plate on wood subfloors in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s instructions. C. SIP Installation: Refer to Section 3.2 for instructions. D. SIP Cap Plate: Install cap plate on top of wall SIPs in accordance with approved SIP manufacturer’s shop drawings and SIP manufacturer’s instructions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS 061200 – 9 E. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Apply a vapor permeable weather-resistant barrier immediately after SIPs installation is completed; refer to Division 07 weather-resistant barrier section. SIPs exposed to rain, frost or snow must be allowed to dry prior to application of weather-resistant barrier. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SIPs IN ROOF CONSTRUCTION A. Support: Confirm support structure provides adequate bearing for SIPs to meet SIP manufacturer’s requirements. B. SIP Installation: Refer to Section 3.2 for instructions. C. Sloped Roofing: Use only vapor permeable underlayments having a minimum perm rating of 14. Vapor non-permeable underlayments, i.e., peel and stick membranes, fully coated asphalt sheets, plastic recover boards or membranes are not compatible with SIP roof decks and should never be applied over SIPs. Warranty will be voided. Apply roof underlayment immediately (per APA TT-111B) after SIPs installation is completed; refer to Division 07 roof underlayment section. SIPs exposed to rain, frost or snow must be allowed to dry prior to application of roof underlayment. D. Low Slope Roofing: Vapor permeable underlayment sheets and/or roof recovery boards, i.e.: fire coated sheets, gypsum, cement, HD polyisocyanurate, must first be applied over the SIP roof deck, attached mechanically, or with water based or polyisocyanurate expanding foam adhesives. Mechanically attached and ventilated membranes are recommended for application over SIP roof decks. If adhesively adhered membranes are used, they must be applied over a vapor permeable roof recovery board using water based or polyisocyanurate foam adhesives. E. Special Note: Solvent based primers and/or adhesives should never be used within a roof cladding or roof membrane assembly, when applied over a SIP roof deck. Warranty will be voided. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR SIPs A. Support: Confirm support structure provides adequate bearing for SIPs to meet SIP manufacturer’s requirements. B. SIP Installation: Refer to Section 3.2 for instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Construction: Protect installed SIPs from damage during construction. B. Protect SIPs from weather with temporary protection when rain, frost or snow is present or imminent. SIPs exposed to rain, frost or snow must be allowed to dry prior to covering. END OF SECTION 061200 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 061300 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing using timbers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with heavy timber framing. 2. Section 061516 "Wood Roof Decking." 3. Section 061800 "Glued-Laminated Construction." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. B. Poles: Round wood members, called either "poles" or "posts" in the referenced standards. C. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The). 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: 1. For timbers specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of materials to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIMBER A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber-grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. 1. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces that are not exposed to view, or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. B. Timber Species and Grade: 1. Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-larch (North); No. 1 Dense, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); No. 1, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat materials with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. C. Use process that includes water-repellent treatment. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. E. After treatment, redry materials to 19 percent maximum moisture content. F. Mark treated materials with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on surface that is not exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. G. Application: Treat all heavy timber framing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Sills and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Timber framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 2.3 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 0.239-inch bearing plates, 3/4-inch- diameter-by-12-inch- long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch side plates. C. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch stirrups and 0.239-inch top plates. D. Fabricate strap ties from steel, 2-1/2 inches wide by 0.179 inch thick. E. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A668/A668M. F. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; provide nuts complying with ASTM A563; and, where indicated, provide flat washers. G. Provide stainless steel bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; provide nuts complying with ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2; and, where indicated, provide flat washers. H. Provide shear plates, 2-5/8 inches in diameter, complying with ASTM D5933. I. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A575, Grade M 1020. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. 4. Stainless steel plate, sheet, and strip complying with ASTM 240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316. 5. Stainless steel flat bars complying with ASTM A666, Type 316. 6. Stainless steel bars and shapes complying with ASTM A276, Type 316. J. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film thickness. K. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal members and inclined members with a slope of less than 1:1, with natural convex bow (crown) up, to provide camber. B. Shop fabricate members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. C. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. D. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for treated wood where the treatment included a water repellent. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect heavy timber framing true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Install horizontal and sloping members with crown edge up, and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports with metal strap ties if not continuous. 2. Handle and temporarily support heavy timber framing to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry, and bevel cut ends 3 inches; do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Fitting: Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 4. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber framing if repairs are not approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 061300 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 061300 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring and underlayment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring and underlayment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested in accordance with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. SHEATHING 061600 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. B. Air-Barrier and Water-Resistant Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Performance: Air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing assembly, and seals with adjacent construction, are to be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies are to be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Sheathing, Walls: , Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing, Walls: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. SHEATHING 061600 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. C. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1278/C1278M, gypsum sheathing. 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 2.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing, Roofs: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch . B. Oriented-Strand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. C. Plywood Subflooring: , Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. D. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners . 2. For roof wall sheathing, provide fasteners with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. SHEATHING 061600 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.10.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. SHEATHING 061600 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. SHEATHING 061600 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT A. Comply with CPA's recommendations and hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for preparing and applying hardboard underlayment. 1. Fastening Method: Nail underlayment to subflooring. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program. B. Testing and Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Inspections: Air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. SHEATHING 061600 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 3. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 4. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 5. Compatible materials have been used. 6. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 7. Connections between assemblies (sheathing and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 8. All penetrations have been sealed. D. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier sheathing assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage in accordance with ASTM E1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers. 2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air-leakage rate in accordance with ASTM E783. E. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 061600 SHEATHING 061600 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 061715 - ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL WOOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store, stack, and handle engineered wood products to comply with recommendations of APA EWS E705. 1. Store wrapped or banded together until ready for installation, on level well-drained area. Do not store in direct contact with the ground. Use stickers to separate bundles, spaced as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Store I-joists level with the webs vertically. B. Do not stack other material on top of structural composite lumber or I-joists. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, are to meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values are to be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that joist flange widths match hanger widths. ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL WOOD 061715 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Do not install in direct contact with concrete or masonry. B. Where wood-preservative-treated members are installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use treatment approved in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with SBX from weather. If, despite protection, SBX-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061715 ENGINEERED STRUCTURAL WOOD 061715 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural glued-laminated timber. 2. Timber connectors. 3. Factory finishing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 2. Section 061300 "Heavy Timber Construction" for framing using timbers . 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors. Include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination. 3. Include large-scale details of connections. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in ANSI A190.1. B. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC- or APA-EWS-licensed firm. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," to design structural glued-laminated timber and connectors. B. Structural Performance: Structural glued-laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of structural loads shown on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses listed in ANSI 117 or determined according to ASTM D3737 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Seismic Performance: Structural glued-laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2.2 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with ANSI A190.1 and ANSI 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in the completed Work. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 4. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with ANSI A190.1. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: 1. Douglas fir-larch in grades needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Douglas fir-larch that complies with structural properties indicated. C. Species and Grades for Beams: 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E. 2. Lay-up: Balanced. D. Species and Grades for Truss Members: 1. Species and Combination Symbol: Douglas fir-larch, 1. E. Appearance Grade: Architectural, complying with AITC 110. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: Where preservative-treated structural glued-laminated timber is indicated, comply with AWPA U1, Use . 1. Use preservative solution without substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. 2. Do not incise structural glued-laminated timber or wood used to produce structural glued-laminated timber. B. Preservative: One of the following: 1. Pentachlorophenol in light petroleum solvent. C. After dressing members, apply a copper naphthenate field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4 to surfaces cut to a depth of more than 1/16 inch. 2.4 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with bearing plates, 3/4-inch- diameter-by-12-inch- long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch side plates. C. Fabricate arch base shoes from steel with 1-inch baseplates and 3/8-inch side plates. D. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch stirrups and 0.239-inch top plates. E. Fabricate hinge connectors from steel with 0.179-inch side plates and top and bottom plates. F. Fabricate strap ties from steel, 3 inches wide by 0.239 inch thick. G. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A668/A668M. H. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. I. Provide shear plates, 2-5/8 inches in diameter, complying with ASTM D5933. J. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. K. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film thickness. L. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. C. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. D. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length and after preservative treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. E. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for preservative-treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. 2.7 FACTORY FINISHING A. Clear Finish: Manufacturer's standard, resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Water repellent. 2. Film-forming two-coat, varnish. B. Semitransparent Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard oil-based stain, resistant to mold and fungus. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Solid-Color Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard oil-based penetrating stain, resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Color: Match Architect's sample As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Handle and temporarily support glued-laminated timber to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches; and do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing and finishing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. 4. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION 061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections, to ensure that interior ornamental woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2. B. Do not deliver interior ornamental woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. C. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1. Handle and store fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior ornamental woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish is to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work without Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupancy for the remainder of the construction period. C. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install interior ornamental woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between [25 and 55] [43 and 70] [20 and 50] percent during the remainder of the construction period. D. Field Measurements: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. E. Established Dimensions: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. . 2.2 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate ornamental woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly[ and finishing], to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times ornamental woodwork fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. a. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition ornamental woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. B. Before installing ornamental woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including removing packing and back priming concealed surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install ornamental woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble ornamental woodwork, and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during shop fabrication. C. Install ornamental woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut ornamental woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor ornamental woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 1. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. 2. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with ornamental woodwork. 3. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced and with adjacent rows staggered. 4. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair damaged and defective ornamental woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects[ and to result in interior ornamental woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade]. ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective Work. C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of ornamental woodwork. 1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. D. Field Finish: See [Section 099123 "Interior Painting"] [and] [Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing"] for final finishing of installed ornamental woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. END OF SECTION 064400 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheet paneling. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING 'FRP1' & 'FRP2' A. Prefinished Polyester Glass Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Finish: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 4. Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. C. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. 1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes less than Class A, 25 and 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119 or UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from listings of another qualified testing agency. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. D. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. E. Thermal-Resistance Value (R-Value): R-value as indicated on Drawings in accordance with ASTM C518. 2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Atlas Polyiso Roof and Wall Insulation. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Elevate; Holcim Building Envelope. d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. e. Rmax, A Business Unit of Sika Corporation. 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; complying with ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. c. ROCKWOOL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or those that interfere with insulation attachment. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products, applications and applicable codes. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed. D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION A. Butt panels together for tight fit. B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended in writing by manufacturer. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Fit courses of insulation between obstructions, with edges butted in both directions, and with faces flush. 2. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install unfaced blanket insulation over ceiling area in thickness indicated. Where partitions occur, extend insulation up either side of partition. 7. For wood-framed construction, install blankets in accordance with ASTM C1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF BOARD INSULATION A. Install board insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions per project applications and conditions. B. PROTECTION C. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. D. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Weather barrier types. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: For weather barrier, by a qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For weather barrier, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Qualification Statements: For Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit weather barrier materials to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty requirements. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WEATHER BARRIER TYPES A. Building Wrap: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. 3M: 3015VP Air Barrier with Permeable Backing. . 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Minimum in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure 3. Air Permeance: Not more than when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WEATHER BARRIERS A. Weather Barriers: 1. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Install weather barrier accessories for a complete installation with weather barriers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyethylene vapor retarders. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Polyethylene vapor retarders. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, 10-mil- thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING A. Place vapor retarders on warm side of wall. As indicated on Wall Type A of construction Drawings. VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction. END OF SECTION 072600 VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vertical-rib, seamed-joint, standing-seam metal roof panels. 2. Underlayment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel System: A roof system designed to resist positive and negative loads applied normal to the metal roof panel surface without the benefit of a supporting deck or sheathing. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal roof panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal roof panel Installer, metal roof panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review loading limitations of supporting structure during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal roof panels. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof panel systems during and after installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal roof panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For standing-seam metal roof panels. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color charts, showing full range of available colors for each type of exposed finish. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed finish for metal roof panels and metal panel accessories. 1. Size: Manufacturers' standard size. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates for portable roll-forming equipment. B. Product Test Reports: For standing-seam metal roof panels, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Qualification Statements: For roof installers. E. Sample warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Roof Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs a supervisor who is an NRCA ProCertified Roofing Foreman or installers who are NRCA ProCertified Metal Panel Roof Systems Installers. B. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Certification: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal roof panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal roof panels during installation. E. Copper Roof Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions and warranty requirements. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metal and other materials beyond normal weathering. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel systems that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads when tested in accordance with ASTM E1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. 4. Structural Standing-Seam Steel Roof Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514. 5. Structural Standing-Seam Aluminum Roof Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1637. B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680 or ASTM E283/E283M at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E1646 or ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Watertightness: No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E2140 for hydrostatic-head resistance. E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 30. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. G. Energy Performance: 1. Provide metal roof panels meeting one of the following requirements when tested in accordance with CRRC-1: a. Three-year, aged solar reflectance of not less than 0.55 and emissivity of not less than 0.75. b. Three-year, aged Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) of not less than 64 when calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS, GENERAL A. Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with seamed joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include all accessories required for weathertight installation. 2.3 VERTICAL-RIB, SEAMED-JOINT, STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AEP Span a brand of ASC Profiles LLC, a part of BlueScope. 2. CENTRIA, a Nucor Brand. 3. PAC-CLAD; Petersen; a Carlisle company. B. Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Panel Coverage: 18 inches. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 METAL ROOF PANEL MATERIAL A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with minimum ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with minimum ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Sheet prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.028 inch. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. b. Henry Company; a Carlisle company. 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 220 deg F; ASTM D1970/D1970M. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970/D1970M. B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal roof panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. B. Gutters: Formed from same material as metal roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, of size and metal thickness in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match . STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Downspouts: Formed from same material as metal roof panels. Fabricate in 10 ft. long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Finish downspouts to match gutters. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On-site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal roof panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide roof panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for other than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not permitted on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.8 FINISHES A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages in accordance with ASTM C754 and metal roof panel manufacturer's written installation instructions. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply over the roof area indicated below: a. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall line. b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. c. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches. f. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches. B. Slip Sheet: Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. C. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 ft. on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 074113.16 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 074646 - FIBER-WOOD SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber-Wood siding. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Fiber-Wood siding. B. Product Data Submittals: For each type of fiber-wood siding. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For fiber-cement siding including related accessories. D. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required. 1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 24-inch- wide-by-36-inch- high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 4. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber-wood siding. FIBER-WOOD SIDING 074646 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-wood siding. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of fiber-wood siding, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Lifetime Limited Warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 FIBER-WOOD SIDING A. Fiber Wood Siding: fiber-wood board, produced from rice hulls . B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1 inch. C. Vertical Pattern: 6-inch- wide boards with wood-grain texture and grooves Insert dimension o.c. FIBER-WOOD SIDING 074646 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-wood decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Corner posts. 2. Door and window casings. 3. Moldings and trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-wood siding and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. FIBER-WOOD SIDING 074646 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 FIBER-WOOD SIDING 074646 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Custom flashing and trim fabrications, made from the following: 1. Sheet metal materials. 2. Underlayment. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Entity that employs a supervisor who is an NRCA ProCertified Roofing Foreman or installers who are NRCA ProCertified Architectural Metal Flashings and Accessories Installers. B. For roof edge flashings and copings that are ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested, shop is to be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, are to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim are not to rattle, leak, or loosen, and are to remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Architectural Metal Flashing, Condensation and Air Leakage Control, and Reroofing" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings and copings tested in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with minimum ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with minimum ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D1970/D1970M. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower; ASTM D1970/D1970M. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. b. Henry Company; a Carlisle company. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 ft. on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Seams: 1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 2. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 3. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: 1. Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. 3. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated on Drawings, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Underlayment: Install underlayment, wrinkle free, in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal. 1. Lap horizontal joints not less than 4 inches. 2. Lap end joints not less than 12 inches. B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment: 1. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free. 2. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 3. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. 4. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. 5. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. 6. Roll laps and edges with roller. 7. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water. 2. Lap joints not less than 2 inches. D. Install slip sheet, wrinkle free, per manufacturers recommendations before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water. 2. Lapp joints not less than 4 inches. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM, GENERAL A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant. 3. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 4. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. 5. Space individual cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 6. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil-canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 7. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch. 8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 ft. with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 2. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. a. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. b. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. c. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. d. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. 1) Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system in accordance with cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: 1. Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. 2. Provide for thermal expansion. 3. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. 4. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 5. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 6. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing. 7. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. C. Downspouts: 1. Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 2. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls or wood columns. 3. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SLOPED ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. 1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. 2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: 1. Install roof edge flashings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. 1. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. 2. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.6 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 ft. on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. B. Clean off excess sealants. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended in writing by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. C. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Architect. END OF SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Silicone joint sealants. B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers' special warranties. B. Installer's special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain joint sealants from single manufacturer for each sealant type. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sika Corporation. b. The Dow Chemical Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants in accordance with requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile in accordance with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with Figure 8B in ASTM C1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with Figure 8C in ASTM C1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies is to meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following: 1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door; AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries, AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Group. 3. Steelcraft; Allegion plc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than 0.40 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 or ASTM E1423. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule on Drawings. 1. Doors: a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule on Drawings. 1. Doors: a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Frames: a. Construction: . 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FABRICATION A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule on Drawings, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 REPAIR A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 081316.13 - ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum terrace doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units. 2. Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows" for coordinating finishes among aluminum fenestration units. 3. Section 0880000 "Glazing" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum terrace doors with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes. 3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type of exposed finish. D. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed finish. 1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch-long section with weather stripping, glazing bead and factory-applied color finish. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 3. Insert requirements. E. Product Schedule: For aluminum terrace doors. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranties: For aluminum terrace doors. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes, weather stripping, and operating hardware. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum terrace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, water penetration, and air leakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Failure of insulating glass and laminated glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Aluminum Terrace Door: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Insulating-Glass Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Laminated Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Product Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each door. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: Class CW. C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum total fenestration product U-factor of 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F . D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum total fenestration product SHGC of 0.27. E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum terrace doors, including anchorage, which allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Marvin - Coastline Bi-Fold Door. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum terrace doors from single source from single manufacturer. C. Frames and Doors: Fabricated from aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Thermally Broken Construction: Fabricate frames and door leaves with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier (break) located between separate exterior and interior aluminum profiles in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Threshold: Provide extruded-aluminum threshold of thickness and profile indicated on Drawings; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing: Manufacturer's standard glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 1. Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, q3, Category II safety glass complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. a. see section 088000 "Glazing". 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard hardware complying with requirements in AAMA 907; fabricated from a corrosion-resistant material compatible with materials with which it come in contact; designed to smoothly operate, close, and securely lock aluminum terrace doors; and size to accommodate door-leaf weight and dimensions. 1. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Lock: 1. Active-Leaf Lock Operation: . a. Keying System: Keyed to match other building entrances. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum terrace doors in sizes and with stile and rail dimensions indicated on Drawings. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate components that are reglazable without dismantling door or frame. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each door. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum terrace doors in the factory. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of substrate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight aluminum terrace door installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Install aluminum terrace doors level, plumb, square, true in line, without distortion, warp, or rack of frames and leaves and without impeding thermal movement; anchored securely in place to structural support; and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction. C. Set threshold members in bed of sealant to provide weathertight construction. D. Install aluminum terrace doors and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust doors to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and a weathertight closure. C. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching and locking without unnecessary force or having excessive clearance. D. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing aluminum terrace doors. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, excess sealants, excess glazing materials, dirt, and other foreign substances. E. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. F. Protect aluminum terrace door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances contact aluminum terrace door surfaces, remove contaminants immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. G. Refinish or replace aluminum terrace doors with damaged finishes. H. Replace damaged components. END OF SECTION 081316.13 ALUMINUM TERRACE DOORS 081316.13 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors and transom panels for transparent finish. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Solid-core five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors and transom panels for transparent finish. 2. Solid-core seven-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors and transom panels for transparent finish. B. Product Data Submittals: For each product, including the following: 1. Door edge construction 2. Door frame construction. 3. Factory-machining criteria. 4. Factory-finishing specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door and frame location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts. 8. Requirements for veneer matching. 9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 2. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 3. Polymer edging, in manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 5. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified. 6. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. 2. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weathertight, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors and frames that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty also includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors and frames. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 5. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES, GENERAL 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.2 SOLID-CORE FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS AND TRANSOM PANELS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors, Solid-Core Five-Ply Veneer-Faced : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Oshkosh Door Company. b. VT Industries, Inc. c. Wilsonart LLC. 2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty. 3. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Quality Grade: Custom. 4. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick. a. Species: White oak. b. Cut: Quarter sliced or Rift cut. 5. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type A. 6. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. 5. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. B. Transom and Side Panels: 1. Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. 2. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 3. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. 4. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after fabrication has been completed but before factory finishing. 1. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. 3. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105. D. Job-Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. c. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. d. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 6. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: 1. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15. B. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sectional-door assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. B. Manufacturer's warranty. C. Finish warranty. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of operation cycles. c. Faulty operation of hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Provide sectional doors that comply with performance requirements specified without failure from defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads. 1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Testing: In accordance with ASTM E330/E330M or DASMA 108 for garage doors and complying with DASMA 108 acceptance criteria. 3. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of door width. b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of door height. 4. Operability under Wind Load: Design sectional doors to remain operable under design wind load, acting inward and outward. 2.3 SECTIONAL-DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Sectional Door: Provide sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated so that finished door assembly is rigid and aligned with tight hairline joints; free of warp, twist, and deformation; and complies with requirements in DASMA 102. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Clopay Building Products - Avante B. U-Value: 0.26 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. C. Aluminum Sections: ASTM B221 extruded-aluminum stile and rail members of alloy and temper standard with manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; in minimum thickness required to comply with requirements; with rail and stile dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings; and with overlapped or interlocked weather- and pinch-resistant seal at meeting rails. 1. Glazed Panels: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-framed section with glazing sealed with glazing tape and aluminum glazing bead. Glazing as follows: a. Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturers' standard unit with tempered glass lites complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I, Class 1 (Grey tint, to match 0880000 "Glazing"), Quality-Q3. D. Track: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel, low-head room track system (verify head height for track clearance). Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides. 1. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized-steel members to support track without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. a. Vertical Track: Incline vertical track to ensure weathertight closure at jambs. Provide intermittent jamb brackets attached to track and wall. E. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom top and jambs of door. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of shape and size and in locations indicated on Drawings. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames. Provide the following glazing: 1. Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard. G. Locking Device: 1. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only. 2. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. H. Manual Door Operator: 1. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25 lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. I. Metal Finish: Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Anodized Aluminum Finish: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. a. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker. 1) Color: Black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter. D. Touchup Painting Galvanized Material: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 2. Details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 3. Full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 4. Connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 5. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following: a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware. b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size of wires. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: 1. Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies to comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Ch. 7 "Means of Egress," Section "Means of Egress Components," Article "Inspection of Door Openings." 2. Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies to be certified under DHI's certification program as a Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) or a Certified Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (CFDAI). 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of anodized finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, peeling, or chipping. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems to withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of length of span of the framing member for of up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of length of span of the framing member plus 1/4 inch for greater than 13 feet 6 inches. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units. D. Structural: Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. F. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test in accordance with AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Maximum Water Leakage: In accordance with AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. b. Entrance Doors: U-factor of not more than 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. c. Venting Windows: Whole window U-factor of not more than 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.27 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. b. Entrance Doors: SHGC of not more than 0.27 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. c. Venting Windows: Whole window SHGC of not more than 0.27 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. I. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2.2 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation. 3. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 4. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. 5. Tubelite Inc. 6. U.S. Aluminum; C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRH Americas, Inc. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish. 2. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 4. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker. B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. K. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. L. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware in accordance with entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum windows. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Combination Assemblies: An assembly formed by a combination of two or more separate fenestration products whose frames are mulled together utilizing a combination mullion or reinforcing mullion. B. Combination Mullions: A horizontal or vertical member formed by joining two or more individual fenestration units together without a mullion stiffener. C. Reinforcing Mullions: A horizontal or vertical member with an added continuous mullion stiffener and joining two or more individual fenestration units along the sides of the mullion stiffener. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Finish Matching: Coordinate all exposed exterior aluminum components and trim to ensure uniform and consistent color and appearance. Use products specified in this Section as a benchmark. Architect's decision will be final as to whether a proposed product matches. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type of exposed finish. D. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of exposed finish: 1. Exposed Aluminum Finishes: Manufacturers' standard size . 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units. E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum windows to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Protect aluminum windows against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Handle aluminum windows in a manner that prevents damage before, during, and after installation. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install aluminum windows outside of limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Hardware: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: FGIA certified with label attached to each window. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: AW . 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 30. 3. Mulled Window Systems: Evaluate and rate combination assemblies as single systems as determined by AAMA 450 in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements. C. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): As determined in accordance with NFRC 100: a. Fixed Windows: Not more than 0.37 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Operable Windows: Not more than 0.37 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): As determined in accordance with NFRC 200: a. Fixed Windows: Not more than 0.27. b. Operable Windows: Not more than 0.27 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, which allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Marvin - Coastline Narrow Frame Window . B. Provide manufacturer's standard aluminum window assemblies consisting of frames, sashes, glass, hardware, fasteners, and all components and accessories as required for a complete installation. C. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Projected, awning. 2. Fixed. D. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions of alloy, temper, and strength complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Thermally Broken Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. E. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190. 1. Glass: See section 0880000 "Glazing".. a. Tint: Gray. F. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Window Hardware: . H. Weather Stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite. 1. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. B. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings. C. Panning Trim: Profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings. D. Nail Fins: Manufacturer's standard mounting flanges with holes pre-punched for mechanical fasteners. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D3656/D3656M. 1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Window Assemblies: Combination. Provide window units in configuration indicated on Drawings. Provide window frames, sashes, hardware, and other trim and components necessary for a complete, secure, and weathertight installation, including the following: 1. Combination and reinforcing mullions with interior and exterior trim. 2. Interior and exterior extension and trim. 3. Exterior head and sill casings and trim. G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA AMP 500 "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, air and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Mullions: Install combination and reinforcing mullions for combination assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install windows and components to drain water passing joints and condensation to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows using manufacturer's written instructions. Avoid damaging finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hinges. 2. Bored locks. 3. Exit devices and auxiliary items. 4. Lock cylinders. 5. Surface closers. 6. Wall- and floor-mounted stops. 7. Door gasketing. 8. Thresholds. 9. Metal protective trim units. 10. Auxiliary electrified door hardware. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants must include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants must include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system, including, but not limited to, the following: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of product data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design". 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 2.3 HINGES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allegion plc. b. STANLEY; dormakaba USA, Inc. 2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Bored Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Allegion plc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: ANSI/BHMA A156.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Allegion plc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, permanent cores; face finished to match lockset. 2.7 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five master keys. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2.8 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever, and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release. B. Astragals: ANSI/BHMA A156.22. 2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Allegion plc. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.10 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allegion plc. b. ASI-American Specialties, Inc. c. Trimco. 2.11 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: ANSI/BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Pemko Manufacturing Company Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: ANSI/BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pemko Manufacturing Company Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. 2.13 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: ANSI/BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick ; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allegion plc. b. Trimco. 2.14 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.35. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allegion plc. b. dormakaba USA Inc. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.15 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and ANSI/BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended; however, aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.16 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DOOR HARDWARE A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware. H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulating glass. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. GLAZING 088000 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass. B. Product Test Reports: For fabricated glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricated-Glass Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of fabricated glass units who is approved by primary glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. GLAZING 088000 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Heat-Soaked Tempered Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace heat-soaked tempered glass units that spontaneously break due to nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.3 percent within specified warranty period. Coverage for any other cause is excluded. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300: 1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph. GLAZING 088000 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Importance Factor: 1.0. d. Exposure Category: C. 2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 4. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units. C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. GLAZING 088000 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190. 2.4 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. GLAZING 088000 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. GLAZING 088000 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. GLAZING 088000 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.6 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Tinted Insulating Glass Type: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Vitro Architectural Glass - Solargrey. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted annealed float glass. 5. Tint Color: Gray. 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear annealed float glass. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 9. Visible Light Transmittance: 35 percent minimum. 10. SHGC: 0.25 maximum. 11. Safety glazing required. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each type of gypsum panel and joint finishing material from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings in accordance with ASTM E119; tested by a qualified testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings in accordance with ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413; tested by a qualified testing agency. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C840 requirements. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound-attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from joint compound and remove from floors and other non-gypsum board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during gypsum board installation and finishing. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Ceramic wall tile. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Setting material. 5. Grout materials. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for tile backing panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. C. Large Format Tile: Tile with at least one edge 15 inches or longer. D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Ceramic wall tile. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Waterproof membranes. 5. Setting material. 6. Grout materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, plans, and elevations, of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of movement joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Verification: CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Metal flooring transitions 6-inch 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, including product use classification. C. Product Test Reports: 1. Tile-setting and -grouting products. 2. Certified porcelain tile. 3. Slip-resistance test reports from qualified independent testing agency. D. Field Quality-Control Reports: Water test reports of membrane in wet areas. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Supervisor Certification. 3. Installer employs only Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers for Project. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 WARRANTY A. System Warranty: Manufacturer's non-prorated comprehensive warranty that agrees to repair and replace defective installation areas, material, and labor that fail under normal usage within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 2.3 PORCELAIN TILE A. Porcelain Tile Type 'TW1': Glazed. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Size: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 4. Grout Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 5. Trim Units: Provide metal trim as follows, with finish as noted in the Material List in the Construction Documents: a. 'TR1' Transition Profile: Tile edges and corners, see drawings for locations. Include all inside and outside corners. b. 'TR2' Transition Profile: Wall tile to floor. Include all inside and outside corners. 2.4 CERAMIC WALL TILE A. Ceramic Wall Tile Type 'TW2': Matte. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Module Size: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Tile Color and Pattern: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 4. Grout Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 5. Trim Units: Provide metal trim as follows, with finish as noted in the Material List in the Construction Documents: CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. 'TR1' Transition Profile: Tile edges and corners, see drawings for locations. Include all inside and outside corners. b. 'TR2' Transition Profile: Wall tile to floor. Include all inside and outside corners. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Fiberglass-Mat, Water-Resistant Gypsum Panel: ASTM C1658/C1658M, with fiberglass mat partially or completely embedded into the core. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. USG Corporation . c. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, abuse resistant. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated in accordance with ASTM D3274. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to other requirements in ANSI A118.15. B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Interior Designer approved equal. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting and adhesive materials for installations indicated. B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick. C. Metal Flooring Transitions: Profile designed specifically for flooring applications; height to match tile and setting-bed thickness. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Schluter Systems L.P. b. Futura Transitions. c. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Description: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Material and Finish: See the Material List in the Construction Documents . a. Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. D. Metal Edge Trim: Profile designed for wall terminations and edge protection. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Schluter Systems L.P. b. Futura Transitions. 2. Description: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Terminations: Inside corners Outside corners matching edge-protection profile. 4. Material and Finish: See the Material List in the Construction Documents exposed-edge material. a. Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds or other coatings, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Substrate Flatness: 1. For tile shorter than 15 inches, confirm that structure or substrate is limited to variation of 1/4 inch in 10 ft. from the required plane, and no more than 1/16 inch in 12 inches when measured from tile surface high points. 2. For large format tile, tile with at least one edge 15 inches or longer, confirm that structure or substrate is limited to 1/8 inch in 10 ft. from the required plane, and no more than 1/16 inch in 24 inches when measured from tile surface high points. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE SYSTEM A. Install tile backing panels and treat joints in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. B. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 2. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. C. Install tile in accordance with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series that are referenced in TCNA installation methods and specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. 3. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. 4. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. a. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets, so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished Work. b. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. c. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. 5. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. D. Metal Flooring Transitions: Install at locations indicated. E. Metal Wall Trim: Install at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile in accordance with tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. TCNA W245 'TW1' & 'TW2': Thinset mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board over waterproof membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: 'TW1' & 'TW2'. b. Thinset Mortar: Dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. d. Waterproof Membrane: Polyethylene sheet. e. Joint Width: 1/8 inch. END OF SECTION 093013 CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 095426 - SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sound absorptive planks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of wood ceilings and suspension systems with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For suspended wood ceilings. 1. Include reflected ceiling plans, sections, and details, drawn to scale, showing the following: a. Coordinate plank layout. b. Ceiling suspension members. c. Ceiling-mounted items including, but not limited to, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and access panels. d. Ceiling perimeter and penetrations through ceiling; trim and moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Wood Ceilings: 12-inch- long by 12-inch- wide or full-width Samples of each type, color, and finish. Include samples that show the range of variation expected in grain, texture and color. 2. Exposed Molding and Trim: 12-inch- long Samples of each type, color, and finish. 3. Veneer Edge Banding: Applied to a cut end of a wood-ceiling Sample for each type, color, and finish. 4. Filler Strips: 12-inch- long Samples of each type, color, and finish. 5. Sound Absorbers: 12 inches long by full width. SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 095426 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each suspended wood ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Suspended-Wood-Ceiling Components: Quantity of each wood-ceiling unit, suspension-system component, accessory, and exposed molding and trim equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for testing indicated. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide acoustic planks from a single manufacturer with at least 5 years of prior experience fabricating projects of similar size and complexity. C. Installer: Installation shall be done by qualified carpenters with at least 2 years experience in the installation of architectural woodwork or acoustical systems. Installers must receive training on handling, cutting, machining and field finishing the specified product prior to receiving materials on site. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ceiling components and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they are protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 1. Store materials flat and level, raised from the floor. B. Handle ceiling components and accessories in a manner that prevents damage. SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 095426 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Store and acclimatize wood products in the spaces where they will be installed for a minimum of 72 hours immediately before ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD, LINEAR-PLANK CEILINGS A. Wood-Veneer, Linear-Plank Ceilings 'AC1': Planks consisting of real wood veneer laminated to a fiberglass reinforced polymer. Surface skin shall not be less than 1.5mm (0.060"). The core of the planks shall be comprised of a Class A sintered resin-reinforced glass wool. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide products with the following characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 3. Plank: a. Cut: See Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Width: 6 inches. c. Depth: 1 inch. d. Length: A mix of 96 inches and 120 inches. e. Edge Treatment: Planks will be edge banded with the matching materials and finish, or as specified by the Interior Designer, to match or contrast with the plnak face. f. Plank Weight: 1.6 lbs./ft squared SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 095426 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Perforations: Planks with be furnished with perforated faces consisting of 0.5mm (0.02") diameter holes in an offset pattern. The perforations must be clean without rounded edges or grain pull out between perforations. A minimum of 99.5% of the perforations must be acoustical functional, providing unobstructed passage into the core. Perforations must maintain consistent diameter through the face material and backer with no tapering or roughness. 5. Acoustic Performance: To generate the standing sound waves required for resistive absorption, each plank must have an acoustically reflective back surface the extends the plank's full length and width. Each plank must achieve a minimum NRC test value as stated without any cavity space or back loading. a. NRC Value: 0.90 6. Plank Stability: Linear contraction or expansion to not exceed 0.4% maximum variation in width or height per ASTM D1037. 7. Factory Finish: See Material List in the Construction Documents; applied on every wood surface. 8. Accessories: Manufacturer's accessories required to provide a complete installation of ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. a. Attachment Clips: Manufacturer's standard metal clips for attaching planks to direct to deck. 1) Plank Splice Plates: Manufacturer's standard. b. Acoustic Infill Panels: Manufacturer's standard to provide NRC rating indicated, with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E84. c. Edge Banding: Manufacturer's standard matching planks for treating cut edges; with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. d. Trim: As indicated on Drawings; with trim connectors recommended in writing by ceiling and suspension-system manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which suspended wood ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of suspended wood ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 095426 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of suspended wood ceilings. 1. Balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. 2. Avoid using less-than-half-width units. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS A. Comply with ASTM C636/C636M and seismic requirement indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for hanging planks. 1. For direct mount, install using Plank Clips, which are impaled securely onto a plank’s edge and fastened to a pre-installed 15/16” hat channel or pre-installed level furring strips using self-tapping screws. C. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges and ends of wood units. 1. Screw-attach metal moldings to substrate at intervals of not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 ft. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners on moldings and trim. D. Install wood components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and to accommodate natural expansion and contraction of wood products resulting from fluctuations in humidity. E. Treat field-cut edges of wood components in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations; finish exposed field cuts to match factory finish. 1. Wood-Veneer Units: Edge band exposed field-cut edges F. Confirm all fiend dimensions are coordinated with shop drawings. G. Install field-constructed access panels in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented units. END OF SECTION 095426 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS 095426 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoplastic rubber base. 2. Rubber stair treads. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096519 "Resilient Tile and Plank Flooring" for modular resilient flooring. 2. Section 096813 "Tile Carpeting" for modular carpet tile flooring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation instructions for each type of substrate. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples. C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For resilient base and accessory products, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear ft. for every 500 linear ft. or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E648 or ASTM E662 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 RESILIENT BASE A. Thermoplastic Rubber Base 'RB1' : 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2. Classification: ASTM F1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Height: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 5. Outside Corners: Job formed. 6. Inside Corners: Job formed. 7. Colors: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.3 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Stair Nosing 'TR3': 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Nosing Style: Square See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Nosing Height: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 4. Size: to fit each stair tread in one piece or, for treads exceeding maximum manufactured, in equal-length units. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces in accordance with ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber floor tiles. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed with resilient tile and plank flooring. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. LVP: Luxury vinyl planks. A marketing term that is applied to modular resilient floor plank products. B. LVT: Luxury vinyl tiles. A marketing term that is applied to modular resilient floor tile products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturers' written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturers' written installation instructions for each type of substrate. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient flooring type required. C. Product Schedule: For each type of resilient flooring product required. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For resilient flooring, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient flooring product type to include: 1. Methods for maintaining resilient flooring, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to resilient flooring. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient Tile and Plank Flooring: Furnish no fewer than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient flooring product installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient flooring installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturers' labels indicating brand name and directions for storing. B. Store resilient flooring and accessory materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store resilient flooring on flat surfaces. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install resilient flooring until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer. C. Adhesively Applied Products: 1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. After post installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Resilient Flooring Products: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of flooring installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of flooring due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of purchase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E648 or ASTM E662 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING A. Rubber Floor Tiles 'RT1': Resilient flooring product consisting of modular rubber tiles with smooth square edges. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Size: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Colors and Patterns: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers for substrate and conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient flooring products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions to ensure adhesion of flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare in accordance with ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing in accordance with ASTM F710. Proceed with installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5. RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1. Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. C. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles as shown in the Construction Documents. D. Tile Matching: Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. E. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. F. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. I. Adhered Floor Tile: Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written installation instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times, to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations. E. Cover resilient flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE AND PLANK FLOORING 096519 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" and Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Manufacturer's standard Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Qualification Statements: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles. Include the following: TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 full-size units. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Loss of tuft-bind strength. c. Excess static discharge. d. Delamination. e. Dimensional instability. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE 'CP1' A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2. Interior Designer approved equal. B. Color: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. C. Pattern: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. D. Size: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive types to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and that are recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: See the Material List in the Construction Documents. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings. E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 13.7. C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood wall covering. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement seams and termination points. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified, full width by 36 inches long in size. 1. Wood Wall-Covering Sample: From same run of wood that will be used for the Work, with specified finish applied. D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to 5 percent of amount installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Wood Wall Coverings: Condition spaces for not less than 48 hours before installation. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates in accordance with test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 WOOD WALL COVERING 'WDW1' A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. See Material List in the Construction Documents. 2. Interior Designer approved equal. B. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as 'FSC Recycled 100%, INdoor Advantage Gold" - Indoor Air Quality Certified to SCS-EC10.3-2014 v4.0. C. Plank Size: See Material List in the Construction Documents. D. Milling Construction: Standard: Flush Cut, no Tongue and Groove, Butt Joint. E. Wood Species: See Material List in the Construction Documents. F. Cut and Grade: See Material List in the Construction Documents. G. Finish: Factor finished. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Trim: See Material List in the Construction Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation surfaces being true in plane and vertical and horizontal alignment, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, and mildew. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Apply primer/sealer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: a. Check for pigment bleeding. Apply primer/sealer to areas susceptible to pigment bleeding as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer. b. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. E. Acclimatize wood wall materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD WALL COVERING A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Surface preparation of interior substrates and application of the following: 1. Water-based finish coatings. 2. Floor sealers and paints. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. Submit actual paint drawdowns as specified below for verification Samples. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in applicable interior painting schedule articles to cross-reference paint systems specified in this Section. Include color designations. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match paint products applied and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint Products: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures of less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each paint product from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WATER-BASED FINISH COATINGS A. Interior, Latex, Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Paint: White or colored latex coating with low-odor characteristics and a VOC of less than 10 grams per liter, for use in areas, such as hospitals and other occupied buildings, where the odor and VOC levels of conventional latex products would preclude their use. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Gloss and Sheen Level: See Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.3 FLOOR SEALERS AND PAINTS 'SC1' A. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer: Clear, water-based, acrylic-copolymer-emulsion sealer formulated for oil, gasoline, alkali, and water resistance and for use on concrete traffic surfaces. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Verify that finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with finishes and primers. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Steel Substrates: Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, loose shop primer, and other loose foreign matter. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. F. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. H. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for interior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and remove sanding dust. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. I. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION OF INTERIOR PAINT PRODUCTS A. Apply paints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in the applicable interior painting schedule articles may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if compatible with intermediate and topcoat coatings and acceptable to intermediate and topcoat paint manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire-Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Other items as directed by Interior Designer and Architect. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry-Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry-film thickness. 1. Touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry-film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, apply additional coats as needed to provide dry-film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. Do not clean equipment with free-draining water and prevent solvents, thinners, cleaners, and other contaminants from entering into waterways, sanitary and storm drain systems, and ground. 2. Dispose of contaminants in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Allow empty paint cans to dry before disposal. 4. Collect waste paint by type and deliver to recycling or collection facility. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE, CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A. Horizontal (Traffic) Surfaces: 1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System 'SC1': a. First Coat: Matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Water-based concrete floor sealer. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE, GYPSUM-BASED SUBSTRATES A. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Interior, institutional low-odor/VOC primer sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior, latex, institutional low odor/VOC, See Material List in the Construction Documents. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures of less than 5 deg F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each coating product from single source from single manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: [15] [13] [10] percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. C. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming. b. For varnish-coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, single-roller shades. 2. Motor-operated, single-roller shades. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. 2. Motor-Operated Shades: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of roller shade including actual shadeband material and installation accessories. 1. Size: Manufacturers' standard size. D. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Qualification Statements: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units. Include mounting accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Window Covering Safety Standard: Provide roller window shades that comply with WCMA A100.1. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with and meeting the flame propagation performance criteria of Test 1 or Test 2, as appropriate, of NFPA 701; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by a qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. 1. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories: a. Drapery Operators: UL CCN FDDR, including UL 325. D. Accessibility Standards: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1 for roller window shades designated as accessible. 2.3 MANUALLY OPERATED ROLLER WINDOW SHADES A. Manually Operated, Single-Roller Shades 'WS1': For interior use in rectangular openings. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Draper, Inc. b. Hunter Douglas Architectural Window Coverings. c. Levolor Inc. d. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. e. MechoShade Systems, LLC. f. See Material List in the Construction Documents. g. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. a. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. b. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method . 3. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to six inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly. 4. Shadebands: ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Shadeband Material: Selected by the Interior Designer from Manufacturer's full line. b. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. 1) Type: Elliptical slat enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. 2) Color and Finish: As selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range. 5. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, with endcap covers where exposed, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and installation location and conditions indicated. 6. Installation Accessories: a. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and shadeband assembly and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. 1) Shape: L-shaped. 2) Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches. b. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MOTOR-OPERATED ROLLER WINDOW SHADES A. Motor-Operated, Single-Roller Shades 'WS2': For interior use in rectangular openings. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Draper, Inc. b. Hunter Douglas Architectural Window Coverings. c. Levolor Inc. d. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. e. MechoShade Systems, LLC. f. See Material List in the Construction Documents. g. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. a. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. b. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method . ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Shadebands: a. Shadeband Material: Selected by the Interior Designer from Manufacturer's full line. b. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. 1) Type: Elliptical slat enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. 2) Color and Finish: As selected by Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range. 4. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, with endcap covers where exposed, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and installation location and conditions indicated. 5. Installation Accessories: a. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and shadeband assembly and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. 1) Shape: L-shaped. 2) Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches. b. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MANUAL OPERATION A. Manual Corded Operation: 1. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. a. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard bead chain with WCMA A100.1 compliant tension device installed on roller window shade by manufacturer and mounted on jamb. 1) Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. 2) Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 MOTORIZED OPERATION A. Motorized Operating Systems: Factory-assembled, motorized roller window shades with shade-operator system of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories required for conditions indicated, complete with motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for complete operation. For wired controls, include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. B. Type: 1. Standard Motor with Wired Controls: Roller window shade manufacturer's standard tubular motor to suit conditions indicated, enclosed in roller. a. Controls: 1) Wired Wall Switch: a) Group Motor Control, Two to Five Motors: Wired wall-switch-operated control station for control of all motors together with single station, with five switch positions for open, close, and three preset intermediate stop position functions. Single station, dry-contact, five- or six-button wall switch. b) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure. 2.7 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Weave & Color: As selected by Interior Designer. a. See Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Openness Factor: 0.05 percent. 2.8 FABRICATION OF ROLLER WINDOW SHADES A. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated on Drawings, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. B. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion or sag of material. 3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROLLER WINDOW SHADES A. Install roller shades level, plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings. C. Electrical: 1. Connect motor-operated roller window shades to building electrical system. ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller window shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction through full operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller window shade surfaces, after installation, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller window shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Protect electrical wiring, cabling, raceways, and boxes, after installation. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use, before time of substantial completion. D. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller window shades. END OF SECTION 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 2. Accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans, sections, details, edge and profiles, and attachments to other work. 2. Locations and details of joints. 3. Locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in countertop. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic Laminates: For each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required, 8 by 10 inches in size. 2. Fabrication Sample: For each type and profile of countertop required, provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. High-pressure decorative laminate. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas. B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. C. Keep surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations without Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertop Type 'PL1': B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI/AWI 1236 for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than that of the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of the Contract Documents in addition to those of referenced quality standard. C. Grade: Premium. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: ISO 4586-3, Grade HGS. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. b. Interior Designer approved equal. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. See the Material List in the Construction Documents. F. Edge Treatment: PVC edging. G. Core Material: Particleboard or MDF. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, ISO 4586-3, grade to match exposed surface, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Composite Panel Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets: 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. b. Hafele America Co. c. W.W. Grainger, Inc. d. Interior Designer approved equal. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, grommets and matching caps with slot for wire passage. a. Finish: Molded plastic. b. Outside Diameter: 3 inches. c. Color: Interior Designer selected from manufacturer's full line. B. Support Brackets: 1. Countertop: 'PL1'. a. Style, Material and Color: See Material List in the Construction Documents. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: as selected by fabricator to comply with requirements. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times countertop fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. D. Countertop Installation: 1. Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to maintain not more than 1/8-inch-in-96-inch variation from a straight, level plane. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where impossible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. C. Protection: Provide kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123623.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of countertop material. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans, sections, details, edge and profiles, and attachment to other work. 2. Locations and details of joints. 3. Locations, quantity, and type of supports/brackets. 4. Direction of directional pattern, if any. 5. Locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in countertop. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. One full-size countertop, with front edge and 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas. B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. C. Keep surfaces of countertops covered with protective covering during handling and installation. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI/AWI 1236 for grades of simulated stone countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain more stringent requirements than that of the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of the Contract Documents in addition to those of referenced quality standard. 2.2 SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Solid Surface Countertop Type 'SS1': 1. Grade: Premium. B. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous fabrication of mineral fillers and pigments bound together with a matrix of polymers and resins, complying with ISFA 2-01. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. See Material List in the Construction Documents. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Interior Designer approved equal. 2. Colors and Patterns: See Material List in the Construction Documents. 3. Countertop: a. Type: Standard unless Special Purpose is indicated. b. Thickness: 1) 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. c. Exposed Edge Treatment: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. d. Integral coved. 1) Height: As shown in elevations. 2) Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. B. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate with loose for field assembly. C. Joints: 1. Fabricate countertops without joints. D. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for grommets, plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 4. Counter-Mounted Cooktops: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for cooktops. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with specified grade. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts not finished in the shop. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges to prevent snipping. C. Countertop Installation: 1. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 3. Anchor wall cleating necessary for proper setting for countertops not supported by casework. 4. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 ft., 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 6. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane. 7. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 8. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. a. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position. b. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width. 9. Install and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. 10. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. 11. Seal joints between countertop and if any, and joints where countertop and abut walls. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. C. Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 1 SECTION 211313 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish and install an automatic sprinkler system to protect City of Star Event Center as indicated herein and as shown on the preliminary working Plans. Connect system to a water supply of sufficient pressure to ensure full and sustained water discharge immediately from sprinklers when opened by fire at rated heat temperatures. Water supply shall conform to NFPA water supply requirements with considerations given to the reliability of the public or private water supply, taking into account probable minimum pressure conditions. The Contractor shall verify site water pressure before submitting Working Plans. B. All portions of the systems shall be installed in accordance with the preliminary working plans, Details, and Specifications and as required by jurisdictional authorities and codes. The position is taken that the Owner is entitled to a project which meets or exceeds the minimum requirements of nationally recognized fire protection standards. All efforts and installations shall be directed toward this end. Where there is conflict between the preliminary working plans and/or Specifications, and the requirements of the jurisdictional authorities or codes, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer of Record at least ten (10) days prior to Bidding or be resolved at no cost to the Owner. If the Contractor has not identified conflicts to the Engineer of Record, he shall be responsible for complying with the most stringent code or preliminary working drawing methods. C. Substitution requests shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer of Record at least ten (10) days prior to Bidding and shall conform to the instructions set forth in the Substitution Procedures section of division 01. D. The intent of these Specifications is to describe the complete systems to be installed, including minor details of work or materials not specifically mentioned or shown, but necessary for the successful operation and completion of the installation. E. Work to be performed under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Excavation, backfill and compaction for the fire sprinkler system supply within 0” of the building. 2. Automatic fire sprinkler systems: a. Wet pipe flow switch system. 1) Sprinklers 2) Pipe and fittings. 3) Hangers and supports. 4) Earthquake bracing. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 2 5) Valves. 6) Alarms. 7) Flow and Tamper Switches. 8) Specialties. 9) Air venting system. b. Dry pipe system. 1) Pipe and fittings. 2) Hangers and supports. 3) Earthquake bracing. 4) Dry pipe Valves. 5) Alarms. 6) Pressure and Tamper Switches. 7) Air Compressor, Trim, and vibration dampening components. 8) Nitrogen System. 9) Specialties. F. The following areas shall be furnished with an automatic fire protection system of type or types indicated or as required: 1. Entire First floor: Wet systems 2. Entire Second floor: Wet systems 3. Overhangs/canopies as described in the preliminary working plans: Dry systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the requirements of both the General and Special Conditions. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Fire Alarm Section 283100 C. Examine the complete bid document drawing set and the above referenced Specification parts thoroughly before submitting a Proposal for accomplishment of work in this Section. 1.3 REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The term jurisdictional authority used in this Section of the Specification shall include, as applicable, but not be limited to the following: 1. Star Building Department. 2. Star Fire Marshal 3. Insurance Services Office or Insuring Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4. Owner. 5. State of Idaho Department of Public Health and Human Services, Quality Assurance Division. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 3 B. The design and installation of all systems of fire protection shall conform to all requirements of applicable codes and publications herein defined: 1. International Building Code (2018). 2. International Fire Code (2018). 3. NFPA 13 (2019). 4. NFPA 24 (2019). 5. NFPA 25 (2020). 6. NFPA 72 (2019). 7. All State and local ordinances. 8. Underwriters' Laboratories. 9. American Society of Testing Materials. 10. American National Standards Institute. 11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The successful Contractor shall provide submittal data as required under other portions of this Specification. Submittals shall conform to the instructions set forth in the General and Special Conditions of these Specifications entitled Shop Drawings and Submittals. Submittals must be complete including drawings, calculations and product data. Partial Submittals will not be accepted. 1. The contractor/installer shall have the system “Working Plans” reviewed and approved by a fire protection plan reviewing agency or AHJ to ensure compliance with all local and current national fire codes. The reviewing agency shall be as specified by the local AHJ. Additionally provide with a copy of: a. Preliminary working plans or bid documents. b. Owner Information Certificate (Provided at the end of specification 21 1313). 2. The "Working plans" shall be submitted to the engineer for approval of intent of "Preliminary Plans" per NFPA 13 requirements. B. Installer Reliability: The Installer shall possess a valid State of Idaho Fire Sprinkler Contractor's license. The Installer shall have been actively and successfully engaged in the installation of commercial automatic sprinkler systems for the past three years. C. Materials and Equipment: All equipment and devices shall be of a make and type listed by UL, FM, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for the specific purpose for which it is used. D. Submit Working Plans (Floor Plans - detailed Working Plans) as an electronic submittal (to-scale), showing dimensions, ducts, lights, or other items affecting the fire protection systems to jurisdictional agencies for review and approval. All items identified in NFPA 13 for proper Working Plans shall be complied with. The Engineer of Record will reject all Submittals not in compliance. Submit all necessary Working Plans to authorities having jurisdiction. Concurrently submit to the Engineer of Record for review. After ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 4 approvals from jurisdictional agencies have been returned to the Contractor, they shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record for final acceptance. These final acceptance sets shall have all agencies' stamps of review and acceptance. E. Working Plans shall be prepared in AutoCAD, Revit, or compatible software. F. The Engineer of Record’s review will be for general location only. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to check all drawings for interferences and to do shop fabrication from measurements taken at the job site. G. Work on the Project shall not begin until Plans have been reviewed by the Engineer of Record. H. An electronic submittal of full catalog information shall be submitted for approval for all materials intended for use on this Project. Catalog information indicating more than one item shall be highlighted to clearly indicate the proposed equipment. I. Record Drawings required per paragraph 1.6 and Operation and Maintenance Manuals required per paragraph 1.7 shall be submitted for approval. J. Prepare detailed Working Plans that are signed by a NICET Level III, Level IV Sprinkler Technician or a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering. As the Working Drawing and Calculation review is for technical adequacy only, the installer remains responsible for correcting any conflicts with other trades and building construction that arise during installation. Partial Submittals will not be accepted. Material Submittals shall be approved prior to purchase or delivery to the job site. Suitably bind Submittals in electronic format, notebooks, or binders and provide index referencing the appropriate Specification Section. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Qualifications: a. Provide a copy of the installing Contractor’s fire sprinkler state Contractor's license. b. Provide a copy of the NICET certification for the NICET Level III, Level IV Sprinkler Technician who prepared and signed the detailed Working Plans or the Idaho License number of the Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering. 2. Hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 and with design information given on the preliminary working plans and in the specifications. 3. Manufacturer's Data Sheets: Provide for materials and equipment proposed for use on the system. Include listing information and installation instructions in data sheets. Where data sheet describes items in addition to that item being submitted, clearly identify proposed item on the sheet. K. Re-submittals: A summary of submittal changes will be required for each re-submittal. This summary should briefly reiterate the original comment and give specific direction on how the issue was resolved. Changes made that are not a result of submittal review comments shall be clearly identified in this summary as well. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 5 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall investigate the structural, mechanical, electrical, and finished conditions affecting the piping, and shall arrange the equipment accordingly; furnish required fittings, offsets and accessories. Route fire protection piping to avoid interference with duct work and drain piping. In the event it becomes necessary to make field changes in pipe locations due to building construction, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer of Record before making any changes. Any such changes required shall be made without added cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall determine, and be responsible for, the proper locations and type of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for fire protection work and shall obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress to avoid delay of the work. C. All fees and permits specifically required for fire protection work, not obtained by others as specified elsewhere shall be applied for and paid for by this Contractor. D. All systems of fire protection shall be installed by a licensed (for the location of installation) Fire Protection Contractor, fully experienced in fire protection installation as specified herein. Fire Protection Contractors may be required to provide in writing, specific information as to successfully completed projects and references to show cause as to why they should be considered acceptable to the Engineer of Record. E. Fire protection system shutdowns shall be coordinated and implemented by the Contractor as preplanned impairments per NFPA 25 Chapter 15 and its related Annexes. Where any fire protection system will be placed out of service for more than 10 hours in a 24-hour period, an approved fire watch shall be provided until the system is restored to normal working order. Impairments shall be coordinated with the Owner and other trades to minimize conflict and inconvenience. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. One approved set of preliminary working plans and one set of Working Plans shall be maintained on the job at all times. B. One set of "As-Built" Drawings shall be kept on the job at all times. "As-Built" Drawings shall be kept current daily. "As-Built" Drawings shall be available at all times to Engineer of Record for review and use. C. One reproducible set of "As-Built" Drawings shall be provided to the Engineer of Record upon completion of the work. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. An electronic PDF format operating and maintenance instructions submittal shall be provided to the Owner upon completion. Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 6 1. "As-Built" Drawings. 2. Revised hydraulic calculations based on "As-Built" Drawings. 3. Catalog cut sheets of all materials installed. 4. Equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates. 6. Certification of Owner Training. 7. Contractor Guarantee and Warranty. 8. "As-Built" AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) file or equal on CD disk. B. One factory-bound edition of NFPA 25 shall be provided to the Owner. 1.8 TRAINING A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the systems. Instruction shall continue until the Owner is fully satisfied that he understands the operation of his system. B. Contractor shall obtain Owner's dated signature that all training has been accomplished and is acceptable to the Owner. 1.9 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall guarantee to the Owner in writing, all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after the fire protection system has been placed in continuous service and has been accepted by all authorities having jurisdiction. B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall not be held responsible for improper or negligent maintenance by the Owner after operating and maintenance indoctrination has been given to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tyco. 2. Victaulic. 3. Viking. 4. Reliable. B. Install sprinklers from reviewed Working Plans. C. All sprinklers shall be of similar design and from a single manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 7 D. The operating temperature of sprinklers shall be as required by the specific location of installation. E. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used unless specified in the preliminary working plans. F. Sprinklers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13, as indicated in the preliminary working plans, and as follows: 1. Brass upright or pendent may be used in all attic, mechanical, storage or other non-public spaces. 2. Recessed shall be used in all finished areas, offices, patient rooms, etc. unless otherwise noted. Coordinate color with architect. 3. Application specific attic sprinklers shall be used in attics. 4. Where surface mounted obstructions will not allow for recessed installation, two- piece escutcheons may be used to extend sprinklers to a maximum deflector distance as allowed by NFPA or U.L. listing with prior approval of the architect. 5. Applications specific combustible concealed sprinklers shall be used as indicated on the preliminary working plans, per NFPA 13, and the listing of the sprinkler. 6. Sidewall sprinklers may be used in accordance with listing and jurisdictional requirements. 7. All sprinklers shall be quick-response glass bulb type when applicable. 8. Dry pendent sprinklers shall be used in all areas subject to freezing when the sprinklers are supplied from a heated area wet system. 9. Dry pendent sprinklers shall be used in Dry Pipe systems, Preaction systems, etc. per NFPA 13. 10. Sprinklers with deflectors less than 7’-6” above the finished floor shall have sprinkler guards. 11. Pendent sprinklers in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and janitor closets shall have sprinkler guards. G. Escutcheons for seismic areas shall be oversized expansion plate type to allow 1” clearance. Or utilize Flex drops in ceilings not seismically braced. 2.2 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. FlexHead Industries, Inc. 2. VicFlex Victaulic. B. Flexible sprinkler hose fittings for use in commercial suspended and gypsum board ceilings may be used as a contractors’ option to hard pipe armover and drops per NFPA and installed per the manufacturers’ listing. C. All flexible sprinkler hose fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved. D. Provide flexible hose assemblies and end fittings with 100% Type 304 Stainless steel, with a 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Flexible hose assemblies shall be fully ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 8 welded non mechanical fittings, braided, leak tested with minimum 1 inch true bore internal corrugated hose diameter. E. Flexible hose assemblies shall have G90 galvanized steel ceiling bracket, direct attachment type, having integrated snap on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper resistant screws. Provide flexible hose attachment with removable hub type with set screw. 2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS-EXTERIOR A. Piping underground shall be Class 52 cement lined ductile iron pipe or as required by the local utility company a minimum of 5’-0” from the building. Straight runs of pipe with no offsets may be rubber joint with bell and spigot. All fittings shall consist of mechanical joint type. B. All buried pipe and fittings shall be installed in a trench of type 1 pipe bedding (sand or 3/4” minus crushed rock) 6 inches under pipe and filled with type 1 pipe bedding (sand or 3/4” minus crushed rock) to 12 inches minimum above pipe. C. Block or rod underground piping and fittings for static and surge pressures. Furnish and install concrete thrust blocks and joint ties at each change in direction of all underground piping in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 requirements. Set screw ("Mega-Lug") restraint shall be used in addition to concrete thrust blocks. Hardware shall be stainless steel. D. Prior to connection to existing water line, the Water Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be contacted for inspection and the procedures used. E. All underground installations of pipe, fittings, and valves shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 requirements. 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS-INTERIOR A. Interior piping for automatic sprinkler system shall conform to NFPA 13 and as follows: 1. Pipe shall be products manufactured in the United States of America. 2. Wet system sprinkler piping above ground with threaded fittings shall be Schedule 40, black steel pipe with a corrosion resistance rating equal to or greater than 1.0. Threaded thinwall pipe with a CRR less than 1.0 shall not be used. 3. Fittings for threaded and coupled pipe shall consist of cast iron, ductile iron, or malleable threaded fittings joined with Teflon tape thread sealing compound or pipe joint compound. Pressure rating of fittings shall be as required for application. 4. Wet system sprinkler piping above ground with grooved fittings for sizes 2-1/2- inch and larger shall be roll grooved Schedule 10 black steel pipe with a corrosion resistance rating equal to or greater than 1.0. Wet system sprinkler piping above ground with grooved fittings for sizes 1-1/4-inch and larger may be ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 9 roll grooved Schedule 40 black steel pipe with a corrosion resistance rating equal to or greater than 1.0. 5. Fittings for grooved end pipe shall consist of Tyco Grinnell Series ductile iron or equal ductile iron couplings and fittings in accordance with NFPA 13. Gaskets shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 6. All above ground dry or preaction sprinkler systems piping 2-inch and smaller shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or roll grooved fittings. Sizes 2-1/2-inch and larger shall be roll grooved Schedule 10 pipe. Fittings shall be painted. Grooved pipe couplings shall be painted. Grooved pipe gasket type and lubrication shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 7. Dry system pipe that is field roll grooved shall be cleaned, prepped, and cold galvanized before installation. Preparation and application of cold galvanized finish shall be per the finish manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Fittings for plain end pipe shall not be used. C. Reducer couplings shall not be used. Use reducer fittings only. D. Mechanical Outlet or Strap Outlet type fittings shall not be used in new system installations. E. CPVC piping shall not be used. F. Alternate piping systems approved by NFPA 13 may be allowed with prior approval of the Engineer of Record. G. All piping shall be identified with pre-manufactured piping identification labels. H. All drain piping and fittings shall be galvanized schedule 40. I. All Fire Department Connection piping and fittings up-stream of check valve shall be galvanized. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Space pipe hangers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Construct hangers, hanger rods, inserts and clamps as approved by the same. 2.6 EARTHQUAKE BRACING A. Furnish and install all earthquake bracing as required by NFPA 13, Authority Having Jurisdiction, Owner's insurer, and as follows: 1. Seismic Coefficient (Cp) force factor requirements are provided and shown on the preliminary working plans. 2. In structures of seismic design categories D the requirements for the hangers and piping shall follow the requirements of ASCE standard 7-16. 3. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 10 4. Seismic expansion loops shall be Metraflex or equal with a minimum of 4” of movement listed for fire sprinkler systems. 2.7 VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Mueller. 2. Kennedy. 3. Nibco. 4. Tyco. 5. AGF. 6. United Brass. 7. Victaulic. 8. Watts. B. Gate valves shall be approved indicating type as required by NFPA 13. Check valves shall be as required by NFPA 13. Test and drain valves shall be approved brass globe, angle, or ball valves. Locate sprinkler system isolation valves as shown on the drawings and as required per NFPA 13 complete with a tamper alarm switch. C. Interior: 1. Interior Gate: a. Make: Nibco. b. Sizes: 2½ inches, 3 inches, 4 inches, 6 inches and 8 inches. c. Ends: Flanged. d. Model: F-607-OTS. Pre-Grooved Stem. 2. Interior Butterfly: a. Make: Tyco b. Sizes: 2½ inches through 10 inches. c. Ends: Grooved. d. Model: BFV-300 Note: Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of OS&Y valves at the Contractor's option for 2 ½ inches and larger valves. Exception: Suction side of Fire Pumps shall be OS&Y valves. 3. Interior Butterfly (Normally Closed): a. Make: Victaulic b. Sizes: 2 inches through 8 inches. c. Ends: Grooved. d. Model: FireLock 707C Normally Closed 4. Ball Valve: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 11 a. Make: Watts b. Sizes: ¼ inch to 2 inches. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Model: WBV 5. Check Valves: a. Make: Tyco b. Sizes: 2 ½ inches, 3 inches, 4 inches and 6 inches. c. Ends: Grooved. d. Model: CV-1F. With Removable Cover 6. Drain Valves Interior: a. Make: United Brass b. Sizes: ½ inch through 2 inches. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Model: 125 SUL 7. Test N Drain: a. Make: AGF. b. Sizes: 1 inch through 2 inches. c. Ends: Threaded. d. Model: 2511T and 1011T with Pressure relief and Gauge. 2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. FEBCO - LF850 or LF870. 2. Ames - Colt or Maxim series. 3. Watts - 757 or 774. B. Install new backflow prevention devices as required by the Water Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Devices shall be UL or FM approved. D. Hydraulic flow rate shall fall below the UL Tested flow rate of the device. E. All reduced pressure backflow prevention devices shall be provided with a splash guard and piped, sized for maximum relief valve discharge flow rate, with an air gap to the exterior or to an adequate floor drain with galvanized pipe and fittings. Installation shall be made using manufacturer's recommended practices. 2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 12 1. Potter Roemer. 2. Croker. B. Furnish and install where shown on Plans and approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction fire department connections, complete with clapper, plugs and chains. C. Finish shall consist of Rough Brass. D. Fire department connections shall be set 2 feet 6 inches above grade. E. Connections for sprinkler system shall be indexed "auto spkr". The indexing shall be "cast in" by the manufacturer. Required indexing shall be permanently installed directly above the connection. F. Connection shall be complete with interior swing clapper, brass plugs, and chain and shall have threads to meet the local fire department requirements. Provide an automatic ball-drip piped to exterior with galvanized pipe. G. Number of outlets shall be provided to allow a maximum of 250 GPM per inlet of combined fire sprinkler and inside hose stream demands. H. Standpipe connection shall be complete with interior single swing clapper, brass plugs, and chain and shall have threads to meet the local fire department requirements. Provide an automatic ball-drip piped to exterior with galvanized pipe. Number of inlets shall be provided to allow a maximum of 250 GPM per inlet as per NFPA 14 requirements. 2.10 SPECIALTIES A. Fire Seals: 1. Where piping passes through walls, floors or other building construction which by code requires a fire rating, approved fire rated assemblies shall be used. Proposed protection shall be submitted for approval. Plans shall clearly indicate details and locations of required protection. B. Escutcheon Plates: 1. Where exposed piping passes through finish work, chrome plated wall plates or other wall plate finishes acceptable to the Engineer of Record, shall be installed. All wall plates shall be metal. 2. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall only be used in remodel projects. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. All wall plates shall be metal. 3. Solid galvanized wall plates shall be used at both sides of all exterior walls. C. Valve Identification: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 13 1. All valves within the building shall have permanently marked identification signs provided in accordance with NFPA 13 standards. Signs shall be manufactured and not hand written. Signs shall be hung with galvanized or chrome chain. D. Spare Sprinkler Supply: 1. Furnish and install a supply of extra sprinklers of each type and degree link installed in the project, complete with mountable cabinet. Mount cabinet on wall next to sprinkler entry; provide wrenches for each type of sprinkler installed in cabinet. Provide a list of all sprinklers installed throughout the property in the spare sprinkler cabinet as required by NFPA 13. E. Piping Identification: 1. All piping shall be identified at 40’ maximum spacing and a minimum of one identification label per room. Labels shall be Seton wrap around style or equal. 2.11 WET SYSTEM RISER MANIFOLD A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tyco 2. Viking 3. Reliable B. Install Riser manifold complete with necessary integral test and drain valve with test orifice, and pressure relief valve where shown on the drawings. Assembly shall have an integral flow switch with contacts for wiring to the fire alarm system. C. The manifold shall be ductile iron and finished in corrosion resistant red paint. D. The manifold shall be UL listed and FM approved. 2.12 DRY PIPE VALVE AND NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Tyco 2. Viking 3. Reliable B. Install dry pipe valve complete with necessary drain valves, pressure switches, check valves, etc., as required by NFPA 13 where shown on the drawings. Assembly shall have pressure switch with contacts for wiring to the fire alarm system. C. Provide and install packaged nitrogen generation and air compressor systems, automatic maintenance devices, low air alarms, and flexible connections as required by NFPA 13. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 14 D. Provide low air alarm switch and pressure flow switch. E. Provide accelerator if required. F. Nitrogen Generation system: The fire sprinkler contractor shall provide all required equipment, materials, labor and services needed to install a complete and operational Nitrogen Generation Corrosion inhibiting System. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. ECS Engineered Corrosion Solution, Packaged system. b. Tyco – Corrosion Solutions, Packaged system. c. South-Tek Systems, Packaged system. d. Potter Electric Signal Company, Integrated system. e. Provide complete prior approval submittal documentation 10 days before bid date for alternate manufacturers. 2. Nitrogen system: a. Generator module, air compressor and tank assembly, refrigerated dryer, nitrogen receiver tank, and nitrogen maintenance device. b. Air compressor(s) shall be capable of producing a continuous volume of compressed air that is sufficient to meet the design requirements of the fire protection system. c. The system must all be installed within the confines of the riser room. d. Provide a system that is capable of delivering a minimum of 98 percent nitrogen composition throughout all of the system piping. e. The complete nitrogen generator system must be self-contained and skid mounted with "drop-in" operability with a simple one step direct connection of the nitrogen gas supply line to each zone. f. Comply with the NFPA 13 requirement to have the compressor capacity capable of restoring normal gas pressure in the system within 30 minutes. g. Any air maintenance device used in conjunction with the nitrogen generation system must be FM Approved for use on sprinkler systems. h. Provide with an automatic purge/automatic venting system and install. Each sprinkler system shall have a Purge Valve furnished with a restricted orifice to restrict venting to a minimum to attain the 98% or greater nitrogen purity level. i. Locate at a remote, accessible location within the Fire Protection System, in an area where water will not collect. j. Nitrogen Generation System shall include a Leak Detection System/ Corrosion Monitoring System: 1) The alarm shall contain an isolated dry contact rated up to 240VAC 16 amps (NC&NO Contacts available). The fire sprinkler contractor shall coordinate with the electrical and alarm contractors to run signal line in code approved electrical conduit from the Nitrogen Generation System to the supervisory circuit on the building fire alarm panel. k. Provide air compressors and nitrogen generator compressor equipment manufacturer’s line starter with installation. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 15 l. Provide with manufacturer’s vibration isolation attachments and flexible hose assembly. m. The fire sprinkler contractor shall install all interconnecting piping between the Nitrogen Generator, air compressor, and the sprinkler risers to allow adequate nitrogen supply to all risers. n. The fire sprinkler contractor shall determine the operating pressure range for the dry pipe (pre-action) nitrogen generator and set the air maintenance device for each zone to the correct setting. Coordination of this final setting shall be achieved with input from the dry pipe or pre-action valve manufacturer. o. Technical start-up services with report and training shall be provided from the manufacture on all nitrogen generation systems as well as provide instruction and training to site engineers and owner representatives. G. Fire sprinkler sub-contractor shall coordinate all electrical requirements with Fire Alarm (Division 28) and Electrical (Division 26) requirements and with the fire alarm and electrical contractors. 2.13 WET SYSTEM AIR VENTING A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. South-Tek Systems; Dual Vent O2. 2. Potter Electric Signal Company, PAV with drain line. 3. Engineered Corrosion Solutions, PAV-W with drain line. 4. Provide complete prior approval submittal documentation 15 days before bid date for alternate manufacturers. B. Install UL Listed & FM Approved automatic air vents for fire sprinkler systems. Vents shall be rated for up to 175 PSI. C. Vents shall be brass construction. D. Vents shall be provided with drain pans and drain lines or be of the redundant design not requiring pans or drain lines. Drain lines required shall be ½” galvanized schedule 40. E. Provide with assembly isolation valve. F. Automatic air vents shall be provided at all high point on the sprinkler system in each sprinkler system zone and each standpipe riser. Bids shall account for a minimum of 2 air vent assemblies, all drain piping, and all isolation valves. 2.14 FORWARD FLOW TEST HEADER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Potter Roemer (5800 series). Wall plate 5900 series style (custom engraved – “Backflow Test outlet”). ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 16 2. Croker (6610 series). Wall plate 6700 series style (custom engraved – “Backflow Test outlet”). B. Furnish and install where shown on plans. C. Set test connections 3 feet above exterior grade or as required by the Fire Marshal. D. Provide custom brass finish plate indicating “Forward Flow Test” and Caps with Chains. E. Size for a maximum of 250gpm per 2-1/2” outlet. 2.15 DRY SYSTEM AUXILIARY DRAINS A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Model: 1. AGF Manufacturing Inc.– Model 5400A (Heated) 2. AGF Manufacturing Inc.– Model 5300 (Standard dry system Auxiliary drain) 3. Provide complete prior approval submittal documentation 10 days before bid date for alternate manufacturers. B. Packaged auxiliary drain shall have a heated enclosure, enclosure temperature sensor and gauge viewable from the enclosure cover, and drum drip capacity float switch with audible/visual signal and interconnected with the building alarm panel (supervisory). C. Drain lines required shall be 1” galvanized schedule 40. D. Auxiliary drain assemblies shall be provided at all low points on the dry pipe sprinkler system. Bids shall account for a minimum of two drain assemblies, all drain piping and electrical and alarm system requirements. 2.16 ELECTRICAL DEVICES A. All electrical devices shall be coordinated with Electrical (Division 26) and Fire Alarm (Section 28 3100) requirements for compatibility of voltages and manufacturer. B. Tamper Switch: 1. Potter OSYSU-2. 2. Potter PCVS-2. 3. Potter RBVS. C. Flow Switch: 1. Potter VSR. 2. Potter VSR-S. D. Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 17 1. Potter PS10-2A. E. Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch: 1. Potter PS40-2A. F. Air Maintenance Device: 1. General Air Products AMD-1 G. Air Compressor: 1. General Air Products OLT Series (tank mounted). 2. Provide with manufacturer’s air compressor manufacturer’s Magnetic line starter. 3. Provide with manufacturer’s vibration isolation attachments and flexible hose assembly. H. Riser Tank Kit: General Air Products OLR-TK. I. Audio/Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances: 1. Audio/Visual units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed to accommodate either horns, bells, or chimes. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180 degree field of view. Integral Xenon strobe shall provide a minimum light output of 4.5 candela at 24VDC at a 45 flashes per minute rate. Xenon strobes shall provide a 4-wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware including backbox. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Working Plan Information: Provide working plans, calculations, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and the following: 1. Recommendations in annexes shall be treated as requirements. 2. Sprinkler Protection: To determine spacing and sizing, apply the following coverage classifications: a. See occupancy design table and notes on the preliminary working plans. b. Request clarification from the Architect for any hazard classification not identified. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 18 3. Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the Area/Density method. Provide a hydraulic placard for each zone, occupancy hazard, and each floor of the building minimum. 4. The room design method is not allowed unless indicated in the preliminary working plans. 5. Quick response sprinkler reductions are not allowed unless indicated on the preliminary working plans. 6. Minimum design areas shall be 1500 sf, including residential sprinkler designs unless otherwise indicated on the preliminary working plans. 7. Flexible sprinkler assemblies shall be included in hydraulic calculations using the UL listing equivalent length of Schedule 40, nominal 1 inch diameter pipe, with a minimum of three 90-degree bends and a maximum of four 90-degree bends. 8. Hydraulic calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than 10 psi below the available water supply curve. 9. Velocities shall not exceed 20 feet per second in any pipe. 10. Water Supply: Base water supply on a flow test as indicated on the preliminary working plans. B. The preliminary working plans indicate approximate locations of sprinklers and conceptual routing of piping. Final spacing and layout is the responsibility of this contractor and final approval of the layout and routing is to be by the Engineer of Record. C. The fire protection system supplier shall design the piping to supply the system. Piping shall be laid out so as not to interfere with the installation of other piping, ductwork, light fixtures, or equipment. D. The entire sprinkler system is not shown on Plans. The intent is to provide complete sprinkler systems as required. This Contractor shall be responsible for surveying the site, existing construction, new construction, and the complete contract document set and prepare Working Plans for the total system. E. All piping shall be run concealed wherever possible. Where piping is run exposed, special notation on Contractor's Working Plans to that effect shall be evident and conspicuous on the Working Plans. Any piping determined to be a problem shall be relocated at no cost to the Owner. F. System piping to be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Furnish sprinkler system with the following components: 1. Systems shall be equipped with a supervised isolation valve and an approved flow alarm connected to the building fire alarm system. 2. A Fire Department Connection shall be installed on the system side of the water supply check valve complete with its own check valve and ball drip. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 19 3. A main drain shall be installed on each riser or sectional zone control valve and shall drain to the exterior or to an adequate drain connection. 4. Auxiliary drains shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents drainage of sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve. 5. A test pipe of not less than 1 inch diameter terminating in an orifice equivalent to one sprinkler shall be provided for each system or sectional zone. 6. Exterior alarm shall be installed as near as practical to Fire Department Connection with identification sign. Exterior horn/strobe shall be wired to alarm system. B. Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed Contractor. Provide a qualified technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being installed, to supervise the installation and testing of the system. C. Delivery, storage, and handling of materials to and on the construction site shall be consistent with good practices, manufacturers’ requirements, and the following procedures. Components shall be protected from moisture, dirt, and debris. Storage shall be elevated above grade and protected from damage. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Deliver piping and valves with protective caps installed; if removal of protection is required for inspection, reinstall for storage. Store piping in a manner to prevent sagging or bending. CPVC or other plastic piping shall be protected from direct sunlight. Any deficiencies discovered in the delivery, storage, or handling of materials shall be recorded and remedied immediately in such a way as to minimize damage and preserve the integrity of the system and components. D. Installation of Piping: 1. Ensure the ends of all sprinkler system pipes are smooth and free of any burrs or fins. To help reduce the potential for accelerated internal pipe corrosion of longitudinally welded black steel pipe, install such pipe with the weld line rotated at least 45 degree in relationship to the floor (for reference, the weld line points at the floor at 0 degree). 2. Dry and preaction systems: Internally and externally cold galvanize all threaded and roll grooved ends cut in the field. Properly clean the pipe per manufacturer’s instruction before applying the finish. 3. Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer and work into place without springing or forcing. In any situations where bending of the pipe is required, use a standard pipe-bending template. 4. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints. 5. Install concealed piping in spaces that have finished ceilings. Pipe installed near equipment shall not block or encroach on equipment access or impede maintenance. Where ceiling mounted equipment exists, install sprinklers so as not to obstruct the movement or operation of the equipment or block access. Sidewall sprinklers may need to be utilized. 6. Locate piping in stairways as near to the ceiling as possible to prevent tampering by unauthorized personnel, and to provide a minimum headroom clearance of ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 20 seven feet six inches. To prevent an obstruction to egress, provide piping clearances in accordance with NFPA 101. 7. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2” and larger end connections. 8. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. 9. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. 10. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. E. Installation of Valves: 1. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2” and smaller. 2. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Provide separate support where necessary. 3. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center. 4. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install Flexible sprinkler assemblies with a maximum of three 90-degree bends. G. Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13. H. Drains: Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks. Install drum drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13. Locations of drains shall be indicated on shop and as-built drawings. A map of all drain locations shall be permanently affixed to a visible location near the fire riser to aid in their identification. I. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Install waterflow switch and adjacent valves in easily accessible locations. J. Inspector's Test Connection: Install and supply in conformance with NFPA 13, locate in a secured area, and discharge to the exterior of the building. K. Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and non-threaded pipe connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe connection near to the pipe from where they were cut. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 21 L. Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete Schedule 10 pipe. Provide space between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL Listed through penetration fire stop material per UL assembly listings. M. Seals: Seal all interior fire rated wall penetrations with fire caulk. Seal all exterior wall penetrations with fire calk or foam insulation and silicone sealing to maintain the fire rating and thermal/moisture integrity of the wall system. N. Provide pressure gauge at each water flow alarm switch location, riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection at the top of each standpipe, at the inlet side of all double check or reduced pressure backflow assembly, and at each main drain connection. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS ¼” and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal and install where they are not subject to freezing. O. Provide a pressure relief valve at each system riser or zone riser as required. P. Automatic air vents shall be installed at all high point on the sprinkler system. Q. For each fire department connection, provide the symbolic sign given in NFPA 170 and locate 8 to 10 feet above each connection location. Size sign 18 by 18 inches with the symbol being at least 14 by 14 inches. R. Securely attach identification signs and tags to control valves, drain valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water flow switch. A map of any isolation valves installed in the building at locations other than on the fire riser in the riser room shall be permanently affixed to a visible location near the fire riser to aid in their identification. S. Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the sprinkler system by the installer at no additional expense to the Owner. T. Where details of installation are not given, the installation shall be made using manufacturer's recommended practices and at the direction of the Engineer of Record through the RFI process as per Division 1. U. Coordinate draft-curtains with the General contractor as required for application specific combustible concealed sprinklers and application specific attic sprinklers. V. This Contractor shall complete the fire protection systems ready for operation, in all respects, as soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use. After system has been activated for continuous use, water charges will be paid by the Owner. W. This Contractor shall remove from the building all rubbish and unused materials due to or connected with this installation. This contractor is responsible for proper removal and disposal of all demolition items, as indicated on the plans or no longer required for a complete operational system, in conformance with the Division 01 - General Requirements. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 22 X. All piping and components shall be cleaned and left ready for painting in good condition and free of damage, leakage, and corrosion. 3.3 TESTING A. This Contractor shall call for inspection and complete Contractor's Material and Test Certificates per NFPA 13 “Underground Piping”, “Systems Acceptance”, and NFPA 14 “Systems Acceptance”. The Forms shall be signed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. The backflow device shall be forward flow tested per NFPA 13 “Systems Acceptance”. C. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig pressure for a period of not less than two hours with no pressure drop in the system. D. The underground fire service main shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig pressure for a period of not less than two hours with + or – 5 psi pressure drop in the system maximum per NFPA 24. Coordinate these requirements with the general contractor. E. All testing shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer of Record or Owner. F. Where jurisdictional authority's or NFPA 13 standards are more stringent than the above test, they shall prevail. END OF SECTION 211313 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 23 OWNER'S INFORMATION CERTIFICATE Name / Address of property to be protected with sprinkler protection: City of Star Event Center Name of Owner: City of Star Existing or planned construction is: ☐Fire resistive or noncombustible ☒ Wood frame or ordinary (masonry walls with wood beams) ☐ Unknown Is the system installation intended for one of the following special occupancies: Aircraft hangar ☐Yes ☒No Fixed guideway transit system ☐Yes ☒No Race track stable ☐Yes ☒No Marine terminal, pier, or wharf ☐Yes ☒No Airport terminal ☐Yes ☒No Aircraft engine test facility ☐Yes ☒No Power plant ☐Yes ☒No Water-cooling tower ☐Yes ☒No If the answer to any of the above is "yes" the appropriate NFPA standard should be referenced for sprinkler density / area criteria. Indicate whether any of the following special materials are intended to be present: Flammable or combustible liquid ☐Yes ☒No Aerosol products ☐Yes ☒No Nitrate film ☐Yes ☒No Pyroxylin plastic ☐Yes ☒No Compressed or liquefied gas cylinders ☐Yes ☒No Liquid or solid oxidizers ☐Yes ☒No Organic peroxide formulations ☐Yes ☒No Idle pallets ☐Yes ☒No If the answer to any of the above is "yes" describe type, location, arrangement, and intended maximum quantities. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211313 - 24 Indicate whether the protection is intended for one of the following specialized occupancies or areas: Spray area or mixing room ☐Yes ☒No Solvent extraction ☐Yes ☒No Laboratory using chemicals ☐Yes ☒No Oxygen-fuel gas system for welding or cutting ☐Yes ☒No Acetylene cylinder charging ☐Yes ☒No Production or use of compressed or liquefied gasses ☐Yes ☒No Commercial cooking operation ☐Yes ☒No Class A hyperbaric chamber ☐Yes ☒No Cleanroom ☐Yes ☒No Incinerator or waste handling system ☐Yes ☒No Linen handling system ☐Yes ☒No Water-cooling tower ☐Yes ☒No If the answer to any of the above is "yes" describe the type, location, arrangement, and intended maximum quantities. Will there be any storage of products over 12 ft. (3.6 in height? ☐Yes ☒No If the answer is "yes" describe product, intended storage arrangement, and height. Will there be any storage of plastic rubber or similar products over 5 ft. (1.5 high except as described above? ☐Yes ☒No If the answer is "yes" describe product, intended storage arrangement, and height. Assumptions: I certify that I have knowledge of the intended use of the property and that the above information is correct. Signature of Owner's Representative or Agent: Cushing Terrell Inc. – See stamped Preliminary Working Plans Date: 9/5/25 Relationship and firm of Agent (please print): Fire Protection Engineer ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Thermometers, filled system, lead free. 3. Thermometers, liquid in glass, lead free. 4. Thermometers, light activated, lead free. 5. Pressure gauges, dial type, lead free. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water meters. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Existing Piping to Remain: Existing piping that is not to be removed and that is not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product, excluding motors which are included in Part 1 of the plumbing equipment Sections. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components, and finishes. b. Include operating characteristics and furnished accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Provide products suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Provide products and installations to accommodate maximum axial movement as scheduled or indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTIONS A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least pipe fittings, including tee in main. C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least pipe fittings, including tee in riser. D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least pipe fittings, including tee in main. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES - GENERAL A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves. 2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in floors/slabs/walls without sleeve-seal system. Select to maintain fire resistance of floor/slab/wall. D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants that joint sealant manufacturer's literature indicates is appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF METERS AND GAUGES A. Install thermometer with thermowell at each required thermometer location. B. Install thermowells in vertical position in piping tees. C. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. D. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. E. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. G. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. H. Install direct-mounted pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at most readable position. I. Install remote-mounted pressure gauges on panel. J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids. K. Install test plugs in piping tees. L. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller. 5. Outlet side of hot-water-balancing valve. 6. Each main hot-water-recirculating line return pipe. M. Install pressure gauges in the following locations: 1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service and maintenance of meters, gauges, machines, and equipment. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals: 1. Perform the following tests and inspections: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. b. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Prepare test and inspection reports. B. Escutcheons: 1. Using new materials, replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates. 3.9 SLEEVES APPLICATION A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Concrete Slabs above Grade: 3.10 ESCUTCHEONS APPLICATION A. Escutcheons for New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: 1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Chrome-Plated Piping: One piece, with polished, chrome-plated finish. 3. Insulated Piping: a. One piece, steel with finish. b. One piece, stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish. c. One piece, cast brass with finish. d. One piece, stamped steel or split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 4. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: a. One piece, steel with finish. b. One piece, stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish. c. One piece, cast brass with finish. d. One piece, stamped steel or split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 5. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: a. One piece, steel with finish. b. One piece, stainless steel with polished stainless steel finish. c. One piece, cast brass with finish. d. One piece, stamped steel or split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 6. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. One piece, steel with polished, chrome-plated finish. b. One piece, cast brass with finish. c. One piece, stamped steel or split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 7. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: a. One piece, steel with polished, chrome-plated finish. b. One piece, cast brass with finish. c. One piece, stamped steel or split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. B. Escutcheons for Existing Piping to Remain: 1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split casting, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish 3. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split plate, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 4. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split plate, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 5. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split plate, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. 6. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split plate, stamped steel with hinge with polished, chrome-plated finish. C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: One piece, floor plate. 2. Existing Piping: Split floor plate. END OF SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ball valves. 2. Check valves. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer. C. FKM: Fluoroelastomer. D. NBR: Nitrile butadiene rubber (also known as Buna-N). E. NRS: Nonrising stem. F. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. G. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. H. RPTFE: Reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene. I. RS: Rising stem. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooved ends, press ends, solder ends, and weld ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position. 6. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems or other components as lifting or rigging points unless specifically indicated for this purpose in manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standards: 1. Domestic-water piping valves intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption must comply with the U.S. Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA), requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and NSF 61/NSF 372; or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61/NSF 372 by an American National Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party certification body, that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or equal to 0.25 percent. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves. 4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 5. ASME B16.18 for cast-copper solder-joint connections. 6. ASME B16.22 for wrought-copper solder-joint connections. 7. ASME B16.34 for flanged- and threaded-end connections. 8. ASME B16.51 for press joint connections. 9. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections. D. Provide bronze valves made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are unacceptable. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. H. Valve Actuator Type: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn ball valves NPS 4 and larger. 2. Hand Lever: For quarter-turn ball valves smaller than NPS 4. I. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Provide 2-inch extended neck stems. 2. Provide extended operating handles with nonthermal-conductive covering material and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Provide memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 2.3 BALL VALVES, LEAD FREE A. Ball Valves, Lead Free, Threaded or Soldered Ends - Brass, Two Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim: 1. Standards: MSS SP-110 and MSS SP-145. 2. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 3. Body Design: Two piece. 4. Body Material: Forged brass. 5. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See Part 3 ball valve schedule articles. 6. Seats: PTFE. 7. Stem: Brass. 8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 9. Port: Full. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Examine press fittings to verify they have been properly pressed. F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. Remove defective valves from site. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Provide support of piping adjacent to valves such that no force is imposed upon valves. C. Locate valves for easy access and where not blocked by equipment, other piping, or building components. D. For valves in horizontal piping, install valves with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position that does not project into aisles or block access to other equipment. F. Install valves in position to allow full stem and actuator or manual operator movement. G. Verify that joints of each valve have been properly installed and sealed to assure there is no leakage or damage. H. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Check Valves: Center-guided type, in horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 2. Check Valves, Swing Type: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3. Check Valves, Lift Type: With stem upright and plumb. I. Adhere to manufacturer's written installation instructions. When soldering or brazing valves, do not heat valves above maximum permitted temperature. Do not use solder with melting point temperature above valve manufacturer's written recommended maximum. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Stainless Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 8. For Stainless Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends. 9. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Valve ends may be grooved. 10. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. 11. Wafer-Type Valves: Flanged connections. 3.5 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER BALL VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - brass, one piece. 2. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, two piece with full port and brass trim; threaded soldered ends. 3. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, two piece with full port and stainless steel trim; ends. 4. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, two piece with regular port and brass trim; ends. 5. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, two piece with regular port and stainless steel trim; ends. 6. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, three piece with full port and brass trim; ends. 7. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - brass, three piece with full port and stainless steel trim; ends. 8. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, one piece with bronze trim. 9. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, one piece with stainless steel trim. 10. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, two piece with full port and bronze or brass trim; ends. 11. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, two piece with full port and stainless steel trim; ends. 12. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, two piece with regular port and bronze or brass trim. 13. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, two piece with regular port and stainless steel trim. 14. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, three piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 15. Ball valves, lead free, threaded ends - bronze, three piece with full port and stainless steel trim. 16. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, three piece with regular port and bronze or brass trim; ends. 17. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, three piece with regular port and stainless steel trim; ends. 18. Ball valves, lead free, threaded or flanged ends - stainless steel, two piece with full port; ends. 19. Ball valves, lead free, press ends - brass, two piece with full port and brass trim. 20. Ball valves, lead free, press ends - brass, two piece with full port and stainless steel trim. 21. Ball valves, lead free, press ends - bronze, two piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. 22. Ball valves, lead free, press ends - stainless steel, two piece with full port. 23. Ball valves, lead free, flanged or threaded ends - steel, with full port, Class 150; ends. 3.6 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER CHECK VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Check valves, lead free, swing type, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, with bronze disc, Class 150; ends. 2. Check valves, lead free, swing type, threaded or soldered ends - bronze, with nonmetallic disc, Class 150; ends. 3. Check valves, lead free, swing type, press ends - bronze. END OF SECTION 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports - metal. 2. Pipe hangers - metal, trapeze type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design , strut support systems, equipment supports. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment are to withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS - METAL, TRAPEZE TYPE A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221. B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination is to include weight of supported components plus 200 lb. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. B. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. C. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Coordinate location of concrete inserts before concrete is placed. D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. E. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. F. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used as an option. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields are to span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used as an option. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. G. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. H. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate in accordance with ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. I. FRP Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-58. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. J. Strut System Installation: Metal, rod type; arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. K. Thermal Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS L. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick after concrete is placed and cured. Use installers that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Install lag screw wood fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Install fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. M. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types, except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. N. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. O. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. P. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 2. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. 3. Grouting: Place grout under supports for floor-mounted equipment, and make bearing surface smooth. 4. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers . B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: 1. Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type For suspension of up to 1050 deg F pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical adjustment is unnecessary. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to expansion and contraction, is required. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP. d. Champion America. e. Craftmark Pipe Markers. f. emedco. g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures of up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances of up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Champion America. 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 7. emedco. 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Services Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction in accordance with ASME A13.1. C. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. D. Locate identifying devices so that they are readily visible from the point of normal approach. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT LABELS, WARNING SIGNS, AND LABELS A. Permanently fasten labels on each item of plumbing equipment. B. Sign and Label Colors. 1. White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-green background. C. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. D. Arc-Flash Warning Signs: Provide arc-flash warning signs on electrical disconnects and other equipment where are-flash hazard exists, as indicated on Drawings, and in accordance with requirements of OSHA and NFPA 70E, and other applicable codes and standards. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE LABELS A. Install pipe labels showing service and flow direction with permanent adhesive on pipes. B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system. C. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Within 3 ft. of each valve and control device. 2. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 3. Within 3 ft. of equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 4. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 ft. along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 ft. in areas of congested piping and equipment. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Do not apply plastic pipe labels or plastic tapes directly to bare pipes conveying fluids at temperatures of 125 deg F or higher. Where these pipes are to remain uninsulated, use a short section of insulation or use stenciled labels. E. Flow-Direction Flow Arrows: Use arrows, in compliance with ASME A13.1, to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. F. Pipe-Label Color Schedule: 1. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue background. 2. High-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue background. 3. Vacuum Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 Safety blue background. 4. Domestic Cold-Water Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-green background. 5. Domestic Hot-Water Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-green background 6. Domestic Hot-Water Return Piping White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-green background. 7. Sanitary Waste Piping: White letters on a black background. END OF SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation system materials are to be delivered to the Project site in unopened containers. The packaging is to include name of the manufacturer, fabricator, type, description, and size, as well as ASTM standard designation and maximum use temperature. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation, jacket materials, adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials are applied. B. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Materials are as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, compress, or otherwise damage insulation or jacket. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom (12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions) of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet during storage or in the installation process before being properly covered and sealed in accordance with Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved by the engineer-of-record. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth, but not to the extent of creating wrinkles or areas of compression in the insulation. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles below. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece is butted against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation conforms to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install sections of pipe insulation and miter if required in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install prefabricated valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available. 2. When prefabricated valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless steel bands at 12-inch intervals, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Install two-layer insulation with joints butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless steel bands at 12-inch intervals. B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with jackets with vapor retarders on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install prefabricated pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same material and thickness as that of pipe insulation. Where voids are difficult to fill with block insulation, fill the voids with a fibrous insulation material suitable for the specific operating temperature. D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed insulation sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, or via self-seal mechanism to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. 3.10 FINISHES A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. END OF SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 3. Copper Press Seal-Fittings: Shall conform to the material requirements of ASME B16.22 copper and ASME B22.18 Bronze and the performance requirements of IAPMO PS117. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation. 2) NIBCO, Inc. 3) Tyco GRINNELL. 4) Viega. b. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper or lead-free bronze fitting with EPDM sealing element in each end and un-pressed fitting leak identification feature. c. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Lead-free bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM sealing element in each end, 420 stainless grip ring, PBT separator ring and un-pressed fitting leak identification feature. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions. MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball- and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 4. Copper Press-Seal Fittings: Shall conform to the material requirements of ASME B16.18 bronze and ASME B16.22 copper, and the performance requirements of IAPMO PS117. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation. 2) NIBCO, Inc. 3) Tyco GRINNELL. 4) Viega. b. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper or lead-free bronze fitting with EPDM sealing element in each end. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 c. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Lead-free bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM sealing element in each end, 420 stainless grip ring, PBT separator ring and un-pressed fitting, leak identification feature. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials: 1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. NPS 1/2 to NPS 4: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper or lead-free bronze press- seal- fittings. C. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller is to be any of the following: 1. Annealed-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, water tube, annealed temper. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, brazed-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast- iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 D. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. E. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze press-seal ball valves for NPS 2 and smaller type L copper tube. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." B. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead- free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. C. Press Seal Joints: Shall be installed using the most current edition of the manufacture's installation guidelines. A factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for the Contractor's field personnel engaged in the operation and installation of pressure-sealed-joints. The factory trained representative shall periodically visit the jobsite, review the product installation, and provide additional training if new manpower has been assigned to pressure-sealed-joint piping installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. B. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. C. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. D. Fire stopping shall be provided to both be compatible with the piping and meet the requirements of ASTM E 814 or ULC S115, "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops." Pipe insulations or fire resistive coating shall be removed where the pipe ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 passes through a fire stop and, if required by the firestop manufacturer, for 3 inches beyond the firestop outside of the fire barrier. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections, and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 7. After press-seal fittings have been installed a "step test" shall be followed. Utilizing air, water, or dry nitrogen, pressurize the system not to exceed 85 psi. Walk the system and check for leaks. If you do not locate any leaks proceed to pressurize the system to the recommended pressures, not to exceed 600 psi. Should you locate a leaking joint that has not been pressed, relieve the pressure from the system, ensure the tube is fully inserted into the fitting and proceed to press the fitting. Should you locate a fitting that is leaking that has been previously pressed, you can press the fitting a second time. Resume test procedure, after the necessary repairs have been made. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 221116 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1 SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Balancing valves. 3. Temperature actuated water mixing valves. 4. Strainers. 5. Outlet boxes. 6. Hose Bibbs. 7. Wall Hydrants. 8. Drain Valves. 9. Water hammer arresters. 10. Trap-seal primer valves. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller. 5. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger. b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. c. See Schedule on Drawings. 2.2 BALANCING VALVES A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. International, Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div. d. Nexus Valves. e. NIBCO INC. f. TAC Americas. g. Taco, Inc. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. 3. Body: Brass or bronze, 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case. B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Gerand Engineering Company. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. Nexus Valves. i. NIBCO INC. j. Red-White Valve Corp. 2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. 2.3 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. International, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Cash Acme. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Honeywell Water Controls. f. Legend Valve. g. Leonard Valve Company. h. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. i. Symmons Industries, Inc. j. Taco, Inc. k. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. l. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 4 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bradley Corporation. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Leonard Valve Company. g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze. 8. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. 2.4 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. 2.5 DRAIN VALVES A. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5 4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.6 OUTLET BOXES A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. IPS Corporation. c. LSP Products Group, Inc. d. Oatey. e. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. 2.7 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs: 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 5. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. 2.8 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 6 2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products, Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.10 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. C. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Mechanical Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports: 1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. END OF SECTION 221119 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1 SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic cold- and hot-water circulation: 1. High velocity cartridge circulator. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 HIGH VELOCITY CARTRIDGE CIRCULATOR ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 2 A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Pumps Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 4. Taco, Inc. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, close-coupled, in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps. 1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge-type unit with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontally. 2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded companion-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated. 5. See Schedule on Plumbing Schedule drawing. 2.3 CONTROLS A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Honeywell International, Inc. b. Square D. c. White-Rodgers Div.; Emerson Electric Co. 2. Type: Water-immersion sensor, for installation in hot-water circulation piping. 3. Range: 50 to 125 deg F. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac. 7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg Fand stop pump at 120 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation. 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 3 B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal. 3.3 CONTROL INSTALLATION A. Install immersion-type thermostats in potable hot-water return piping. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. 1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps and check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. 2. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. D. Ground equipment and connect wiring according to Division 26. E. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 4 6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains and prepare pump for operation. 7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps. END OF SECTION 221123 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AB&I Foundry. 2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 3. Tyler Pipe. B. Above Grade Pipe and Fittings: All above grade Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM-888 and shall be marked with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institutes collective trademarks. All pipe and fittings shall be American made and tested, no imported pipe is acceptable. C. Documentation: At the request of the engineer the manufacturer shall furnish the following information to confirm Compliance with CISPI 301: 1. Radiation Screening records. 2. Mechanical Testing records. 3. Chemical Testing records. 4. Dimensional Inspection reports. 5. Certificate letter from manufacturer with legal name and address. D. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: Couplings shall conform to CISPI standard 310. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty and Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. E. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. MG Piping Products Company. 2. Standard: ASTM C 1277. 3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC, or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch, and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back-to-back or side by side with common drainpipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. 3. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. J. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." K. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. L. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6 N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints. B. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes. 3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7 E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. D. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 8 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections, and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 9 C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste riser piping NPS 4 shall be the following (to match existing sanitary riser piping: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. C. Aboveground, soil drain and waste and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION 221316 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains/ Floor sinks. 3. Grease Interceptor. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary and storm piping specialty components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. 4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 2.2 FLOOR SINKS AND FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Sinks and Floor Drains: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. B. Air-Gap Fittings: 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. C. Vent Caps: 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. 2.4 GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Grease Interceptors: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Greenturtle Tech. b. Schier Products Company. 2. Grease Interceptors: Fiberglass, sized based on anticipated usage and flow rates to meet applicable sanitary sewer discharge limits, including local codes and regulations. 3. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI G101 for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and greases from food wastewater. 4. Include accessways, tanks, and piping or openings to retain grease and to permit waste water flow. 5. PVC cement welded socket ports, or straight pipe, fitted into interceptor wall for each pipe connection. 6. Accessway Extension Collar: a. Fiberglass risers, 24 inches. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4 7. Accessway Frames and Covers: Round cover with non-slip cover finish, gasketed and non-vented top design with "Grease Interceptor" lettering cast into cover. a. Cast Iron: AASHTO M306 Traffic load rated. 24 inch diameter cover with 0.25 gasket, two pick holes, non-bolted and Class A48 CLB35B. 8. Watertight Flexible Caulking: to provide watertight seal at extension collar joints. 2.5 FIBERGLASS ACCESSWAY RISERS A. Fiberglass accessway extensions: Fiberglass wound pipe. 1. Extension Sections: 0.25 inch minimum thickness and 24 inch diameter as a single continuous piece, without joints unless approved by the manufacturer. 2. Sealant: Watertight flexible caulking to provide watertight seal at extension collar joining to tank on bottom and access frame top, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5 3. Install floor-drain/floor sink flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07. 1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. F. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. G. Install floor-sink, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. H. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. I. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. J. Install steel plate reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. K. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. L. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. M. Install fiberglass grease interceptors according to manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Plumbing Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 6 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221319 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1 SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Electrical Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. C. ASME Compliance: 1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 2 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters: 1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: One year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Rheem Manufacturing Company. b. Bock Inc. c. AO Smith. d. PVI. e. Bradford White. 2. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 3. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. 4. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working- pressure rating. a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing. 1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 3 b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable- water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable- water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets. 5. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances: a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water heaters, and natural-gas fuel. g. Temperature Control: Manufacturer controller with digital display, built-in diagnostics, status, run history and alarms. h. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. i. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. j. Provide condensate neutralization kit with each water heater. k. Provide water heater control with integrated solid state temperature and ignition control device with integral diagnostics, graphic user interface, fault history display and shall have digital temperature readout. Provide connectivity using Bacnet communication for remote viewing and fault notification to BMS. 6. Direct vent intake and exhaust connections. 2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Flexcon Industries. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Pentair Pump Group. e. Smith, A. O. Corporation. f. State Industries. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 4 g. Taco, Inc. 2. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank. 3. Construction: a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable- water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed. d. ASME rated. B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. C. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. D. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve. E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. F. Intakes for Direct Vent Service: PVC Schedule 40, cellular core, ASTM F891, PVC socket fittings ASTM D 2466, and two-step solvent cement adhesive. G. Exhaust Flues Direct Vent Service: CPVC Schedule 40, cellular core, ASTM F891, CPVC socket fittings ASTM D 2466, and two-step solvent cement adhesive. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water heaters on concrete base. 1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. 1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. 1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves. 2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner. 3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control. 4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123 "Natural-Gas Piping." D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." F. Install intake and exhaust vents separately through roof in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Terminate intake and exhaust in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, including insect and bird screening. G. Fill domestic-water heaters with water. H. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 6 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "Natural-Gas Piping." C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. END OF SECTION 223400 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1 SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. Faucets for lavatories, showers, and sinks. 2. Flushometers. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Protective shielding guards. 5. Fixture supports. 6. Toilets. 7. Lavatories. 8. Urinals 9. Sinks. 10. Service sinks 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2 C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 4. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3. 5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 9. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016. 3. Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014. 6. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445. 7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3 8. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 11. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021. 4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Lavatory Faucets: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4 e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Just Manufacturing Company. h. Kohler Co. i. Moen, Inc. j. Speakman Company. k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. l. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2.2 SINK FAUCETS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawing: A. Sink Faucets: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Just Manufacturing Company. h. Kohler Co. i. Moen, Inc. j. Speakman Company. k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. l. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2.3 FLUSHOMETERS - See Plumbing Schedule on drawings. A. Flushometers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delta Faucet Company. b. Sloan Valve Company. c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2.4 TOILET SEATS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Toilet Seat: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bemis Manufacturing Company. b. Church Seats. c. Kohler Co. d. Olsonite Corp. e. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. 2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Engineered Brass Co. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. e. TCI Products. f. TRUEBRO, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Josam Company. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Lavatory Supports: 1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall- mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6 C. Urinal Supports: 1. Description: Type II, urinal carrier with hanger and bearing plates for wall- mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights. D. Sink Supports: 1. Description: Type II, sink carrier with hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod for sink-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. 2.7 TOILETS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Toilets: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. c. Eljer. d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e. Kohler Co. f. TOTO USA, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2.8 LAVATORIES - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Lavatories: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. c. Eljer. d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e. Kohler Co. f. TOTO USA, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2.9 SINKS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Sinks: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 7 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Eljer. c. Kohler Co. d. Just Manufacturing Company. e. Kohler Co. f. Moen, Inc. 2.10 SERVICE SINKS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Service Sinks: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fiat Products Inc. b. Florestone Products Co. Inc c. Stern Williams Co Inc. 2.11 DISPOSERS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Disposers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.; Kitchen Systems Div. c. In-Sink-Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co. d. KitchenAid. 2. Description: household, food-waste disposer. Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; anti- splash guard; and combination cover/stopper. 2.12 URINALS - See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings. A. Urinals: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 8 a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. c. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. TOTO USA, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. 2. Description: Wall-mounting, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. Provide each Urinal fixture support. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures. C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports. D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 9 behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. J. Install flushometer valves for accessible toilets with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. K. Install toilet seats on toilets. L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. M. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. O. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms. P. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. Q. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. R. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. S. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one- part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment and connect electrical wiring per Division 26. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 10 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream. C. Operate and adjust disposer. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls. D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 224000 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WATER COOLERS 224700 - 1 SECTION 224700 - WATER COOLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following water coolers and related components: 1. Water coolers with bottle filling. 2. Fixture supports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities. B. Cast Polymer: Dense, cast-filled-polymer plastic. C. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking. D. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture. E. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated. F. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WATER COOLERS 224700 - 2 Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities. C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style classifications. E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications. F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS WITH BOTTLE FILLING A. Water Coolers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation. d. Larco, Inc. e. Oasis Corporation. f. Sunroc Corp. 2. Description: Dual, Accessible, ARI 1010, Type PB, pressure with bubbler, wall- mounting water cooler and bottle filling station. a. Cabinet: Bilevel with two attached cabinets, vinyl-covered steel with stainless-steel top. b. Provide water cooler with bubblers, control, supply valve, filter, drain grid with horizontal waste and trap, and refrigerated cooling system, and bottle filling station. c. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WATER COOLERS 224700 - 3 2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Josam Co. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported. 1. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights. 2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of steel pipe uprights. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated. B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install fixtures level and plumb. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WATER COOLERS 224700 - 4 C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system. E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep- pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew- resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other related Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment and connect electrical wiring per Division 26. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 2. Report test results in writing. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height. B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings. 3.7 CLEANING A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 224700 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Motors. 2. Packed expansion joints. 3. Packless expansion joints. 4. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 5. Alignment guides and anchors. 6. Sleeves without waterstop. 7. Sleeves with waterstop. 8. Stack-sleeve fittings. 9. Sleeve-seal systems. 10. Grout. 11. Silicone sealants. 12. Escutcheons. 13. Thermometers, bimetallic actuated. 14. Thermometers, filled system. 15. Thermometers, liquid in glass. 16. Thermometers, light activated. 17. Duct-thermometer mounting brackets. 18. Thermowells. 19. Pressure gauges, dial type. 20. Gauge attachments. 21. Test plugs. 22. Test-plug kits. 23. Sight flow indicators. 24. Flowmeters. 25. Thermal-energy meters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product, excluding motors which are included in Part 1 of HVAC equipment Sections. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components, and finishes. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Include operating characteristics and furnished accessories. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motor Requirements, General: 1. Content includes motors for use on alternating-current power systems of up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 2. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in equipment schedules or Sections. 3. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Motor Characteristics: 1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 2700 ft. above sea level. 2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. C. Polyphase Motors: 1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 2. Efficiency: Premium Efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 3. Service Factor: 1.15. 4. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. 5. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Insulation: Class F. 8. Code Letter Designation: a. Motors 15 Hp and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. b. Motors Smaller Than 15 Hp: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 9. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. D. Additional Requirements for Polyphase Motors: 1. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. 2. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time-rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters. b. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. c. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 3. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. E. Single-Phase Motors: 1. Motors larger than 1/20 hp must be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: a. Permanent-split capacitor. b. Split phase. c. Capacitor start, inductor run. d. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 2. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. 3. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. 4. Motors 1/20 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. 5. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device will automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. F. Electronically Commutated Motors: 1. Microprocessor-Based Electronic Control Module: Converts 120 V 240 V single-phase AC power to three-phase DC power to operate the brushless DC motor. 2. Three-phase power motor module with permanent magnet rotor. END OF SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports - carbon steel. 2. Pipe hangers and supports - stainless steel. 3. Pipe/tube hangers and supports - copper. 4. Pipe hangers - metal, trapeze type. 5. Pipe hangers - FRP. 6. Strut support system - metal, rod type. 7. Strut support system - metal, cable type. 8. Strut support system - FRP. 9. Strut support system - rooftop-mounted pipe stand, compact. 10. Strut support system - rooftop-mounted pipe stand, single base, single pipe, low profile. 11. Strut support system - rooftop-mounted pipe stand, single base, single pipe, high profile. 12. Strut support system - rooftop-mounted pipe stand, curb-mounted type. 13. Strut support system - rooftop-mounted pipe stand, multiple pipe, high profile. 14. Thermal hanger shield inserts. 15. Fastener system - powder-actuated fasteners. 16. Fastener system - mechanical expansion anchors. 17. Equipment supports. 18. Equipment stands - outdoor type. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.2 EQUIPMENT STANDS, OUTDOOR TYPE A. Equipment Stands, Outdoor Type: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DiversiTech Corp. b. MIRO Industries Inc. c. RectorSeal HVAC; a CSW Industrials Company. 2. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground- or roof-supported outdoor equipment components, without roof membrane penetration, in a prefabricated system that can be modularly assembled on site. 3. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene. 4. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel. 5. Wind/Sliding Load Resistance: Up to 100 mph minimum. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221. B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as rods. F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination is to include weight of supported components plus 200 lb. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: 1. Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. B. Use carbon-steel metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. END OF SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Duct labels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. c. Carlton Industries, LP. d. Champion America. e. Craftmark Pipe Markers. f. emedco. g. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. h. LEM Products Inc. i. Marking Services, Inc. j. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. 2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures of up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances of up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Champion America. 6. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 7. emedco. 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Services Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction in accordance with ASME A13.1. C. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. D. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. E. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. F. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings. Also include: 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Include flow-direction arrows on main distribution piping. Arrows may be either integral with label or applied separately. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances of up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.3 DUCT LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. Champion America. 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 6. emedco. 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Services Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products; a Brady Corporation company. B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. C. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances of up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings. Also include the following: 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Include flow-direction arrows on main distribution ducts. Arrows may be either integral with label or may be applied separately. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances of up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. D. Locate identifying devices so that they are readily visible from the point of normal approach. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Permanently fasten labels on each item of mechanical equipment. B. Sign and Label Colors: 1. White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue background. C. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE LABELS A. Install pipe labels showing service and flow direction with permanent adhesive on pipes. B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Within 3 ft. of each valve and control device. 2. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 3. Within 3 ft. of equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 4. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 ft. along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 ft. in areas of congested piping, ductwork, and equipment. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Flow-Direction Arrows: Use arrows to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. D. Pipe-Label Color Schedule: 1. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue background. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LABELS A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels showing service and flow direction with permanent adhesive on air ducts. 1. Provide labels in the following color codes: a. For air supply ducts: White letters on blue background. b. For air return ducts: White letters on blue background. c. For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts: White letters on blue background. B. Locate label near each point where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 ft. where exposed or are concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section Includes: 1. TAB of Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. TAB of equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. F. TDH: Total dynamic head. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures, as specified in "Preparation" Article. C. Certified TAB Reports D. Sample report forms. E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration and calibration interval. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialist Firm's Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Certified Professional: Employee of the TAB specialist firm and certified by NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist firm and certified by NEBBor TABB. B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in system designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Submit Contract Documents Examination Report summary of findings. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for TAB. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. E. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean and permanent filters are installed, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. F. Verify, with installation Contractor, that startup strainer screens have been replaced with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. G. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS H. Observe demonstration of operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. I. Examine control dampers for proper installation for their intended function of isolating, throttling, diverting, or mixing air flows. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Prepare system-readiness checklists of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed. e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed. i. Windows and doors are installed and are in normal operating positions. j. Note location of balancing devices that are inaccessible. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment casings for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. Installing Contractor to Perform the Following: a. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. b. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." c. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish in accordance with Section 230713 "Duct Insulation" and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. C. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Test, adjust, and balance HVAC equipment indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Motors. 2. Fans and ventilators. 3. Unit heaters. 4. Condensing units. 5. Energy-recovery units. 6. Air-handling units. 7. Split-system air conditioners. 8. Heat pumps. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet. c. Measure static pressure differential across each component that makes up the air-handling system. 3. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all volume dampers have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets' and outlets' airflow. Apply correction factors as applicable for each size and style of air device. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design range. Readjust to within design tolerance if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Traverse the supply airflow in full airside economizer mode. Observe the mixed air plenum pressure as compared to normal operation: return air dampers open and minimum outside air varying to 100 percent outside air dampers fully open and return air dampers fully closed. Mixed air pressure is to remain constant plus/minus 20 percent or, otherwise, damper/fan adjustments will be required. 5. Mark all final settings. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 4. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets. 5. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors: 1/2 hp and larger; test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Service factor and frame size. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation. Verify and report Hz at maximum and minimum flows. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fan(s). B. Measure and record entering- and leaving-air temperatures. C. Measure and record operating data of compressor(s), fan(s), and motors. 3.9 DUCT-LEAKAGE TESTS A. Witness the duct-leakage testing performed by Installer. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified limits. C. Report deficiencies observed. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water-flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, flow rate is within 10 cfm. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, flow rate is within 10 cfm. 3.11 FINAL TESTING AND BALANCING REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist firm and technician. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Project Architect's name, firm, and address. 6. Project engineer's name, firm, and address. 7. Project Contractor's name, firm, and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents, including the following: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fan performance forms, including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Heating coil, dry-bulb conditions. e. Settings for pressure controller(s). f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and speed. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Fan speed. d. Inlet and discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. For each filter bank, filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. E. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Motor horsepower and speed. h. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. i. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. j. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. k. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Motor voltage at each connection. g. Motor amperage for each phase. F. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Heat output in Btu/h. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase. G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and speed. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan speed. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Report Data: a. System fan and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. K. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration and interval. 3.12 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT A. The TAB specialist firm's test and balance technician is to conduct the final verification in the presence of Commissioning Authority. B. Commissioning Authority are to randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking is to be limited to the lesser of either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements are to be noted as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the TAB are to be considered incomplete and are to be rejected. E. If recheck measurements find the number of failed measurements noncompliant with requirements indicated, proceed as follows: 1. TAB specialists are to recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. All changes are to be tracked to show changes made to previous report. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may pursue others Contract options to complete TAB work. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.13 REVERIFICATION A. TAB specialist firm technicians are to recheck all measurements and make adjustments as required to complete the balancing. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit final report and request a second verification. B. If the second verification also fails, Architect may contact AABC headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty. 3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 5. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers are to be marked with the manufacturer's name, appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation, jacket materials, adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials are to be applied. B. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Glass-Fiber Blanket: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use temperature up to 450 deg F in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II, and ASTM C1290, Type I, unfaced Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Certainteed; SAINT-GOBAIN. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based, Interior Use: Suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 2.5 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2. PSK Jacket: Aluminum foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) CL WARD & Family Inc. 3) Gemco. 4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 5) Nelson Stud Welding. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel Aluminum Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. 6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. RPR Products, Inc. 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, compress, or otherwise damage insulation or jacket. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet during storage or in the installation process before being properly covered and sealed in accordance with Contract Documents. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth, but not to the extent of creating wrinkles or areas of compression in the insulation. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GLASS-FIBER AND MINERAL-WOOL INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. B. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over compress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection is limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. G. Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. H. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated ; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. J. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. K. Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. L. Exposed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. M. Exposed, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. N. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. O. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. P. Exposed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation is the following: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75 lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3.9 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: 1. None. DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. END OF SECTION 230713 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation system materials are to be delivered to the Project site in unopened containers. The packaging is to include name of manufacturer, fabricator, type, description, and size. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation, jacket materials, adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials are applied. B. Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, or expanded-rubber materials; suitable for maximum use temperature between minus 70 deg F and 220 deg F. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I, for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA. E. Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use temperature up to 850 deg F in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. 3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. F. Mineral Wool, Preformed Pipe: Mandrel-wound mineral wool fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin, unfaced; suitable for maximum use temperature up to 1200 deg F in accordance with ASTM C447. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. c. ROCKWOOL Technical Insulation. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. 3. Fabricated shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc. 2.4 ADHESIVES A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA. 2. Flame-spread index is 25 or less and smoke-developed index is 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F. 4. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F. 5. Color: Black. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation. e. The Dow Chemical Company. 2.5 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 4. Color: White. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.6 SEALANTS A. Materials are as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. d. Owens Corning. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. a. Color: White or gray. C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Airex Manufacturing. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Proto Corporation. e. Speedline Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. C. Metal Jacket: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket (Asphaltic): 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a cross-laminated polyethylene film covered with aluminum-foil facing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MFM Building Products Corp. b. Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel, with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. RPR Products, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, compress, or otherwise damage insulation or jacket. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom (12 o'clock and 6 o'clock positions) of horizontal runs. E. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. F. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet during storage or in the installation process before being properly covered and sealed in accordance with the Contract Documents. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth, but not to the extent of creating wrinkles or areas of compression in the insulation. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. 4. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 5. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles below. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using prefabricated fitting insulation or mitered or routed fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece is butted against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with prefabricated fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Insulate valves using prefabricated fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using prefabricated fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install sections of pipe insulation and miter if required in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install prefabricated valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available. 2. When prefabricated valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF GLASS-FIBER AND MINERAL WOOL INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install prefabricated pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with glass-fiber or mineral-wool blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install prefabricated sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install prefabricated sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When prefabricated sections are not available, install fabricated sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.9 FINISHES A. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection is limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 14 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation is the following: HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 15 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick. END OF SECTION 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 16 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1 SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Temperature Control (TC) Contractor. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for the HVAC systems and components, including control components for equipment that is not supplied with factory-wired controls. B. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Temperature Control (TC) Contractor. C. The Controls Contractor will be required to provide a Tridium JACE, Niagara 4 Supervisory Controller. Hardware/software keys such as the NIC (Niagara Interoperability Conformance) Statement that can lock up a JACE shall be unlocked, and the Owner shall be provided the highest level password. 1.3 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Facility Management System (FMS) shall be a complete system designed for easy accessibility by the Owner. A. Dedicated Facility Management System Local Area Network - The Facility Management System (FMS) shall reside on a dedicated Local Area Network (LAN) provided and installed by the Temperature Controls (TC) Contractor. B. All points of user interface shall be on standard Web Browsers that do not require the purchase of any special software from the manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The primary Controls Operator Interface will be a standard Web Browser. C. The TC Contractor work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 2 insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned FMS. D. The TC system as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions, and services: 1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions. 2. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and reporting functions. 3. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of control system functions. 4. Offsite monitoring and management access. 5. Energy management. 6. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. The Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control system installations who is a factory authorized dealer for an approved manufacturer. Installer must have 5 years’ experience installing and maintaining similar system in the vicinity of the project site. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. 3. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel as a direct employ of manufacturer representative of the temperature control system. 4. The TC Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 200-mile radius of the job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day- a-week basis. 5. As evidence and assurance of the contractor's ability to support the Owner's system with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the TC business for at least the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed total projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in each of the preceding five years. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: 1. At a minimum, submit the following: a. FMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections. b. Systems schematics, sequences, and flow diagrams. c. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 3 d. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper provided under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type. e. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type. f. Details of all FMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. g. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and description for all products including software. B. Preliminary Review: A PDF copy of submittal data shall be transmitted to the Engineer for preliminary review by the Engineer. A PDF copy will be returned with required changes noted. 1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Digital copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished in PDF format, and include the following for the FMS provided: a. Table of contents. b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal. c. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software. d. System Operator's manuals. e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences. f. FMS network diagrams. g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED CONTRACTORS / MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers/ Suppliers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products and installation by one of the following: 1. Alerton Controls; by ATS Inland NW; Boise, ID 2. Reliable Controls Corp.; by Sunbelt Controls; Boise, ID 3. Automatic Logic Controls; by Clima-Tech; Boise, ID 4. Johnson Controls; by Johnson Controls, Inc.; Boise, ID ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 4 5. Schneider Electric; by Yamas Controls Intermountain; Boise, ID 6. Siemens Building Technologies Inc.; by Siemens; Boise, ID 7. Trane Controls; by Trane; Boise, ID and Salt Lake City, UT 8. Distech Controls: by Harris; Boise, ID or by Sunbelt Controls; Boise; ID 2.2 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS) GENERAL A. The FMS shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, all Network Controllers shall support open communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided networks. B. The FMS shall consist of the following: 1. Network Controller(s) 2. Programmable Field Controllers(s) 3. Application Specific Controllers(s) 4. VAV Controller(s) 5. Input/Output Module(s) 6. Network processing, data storage and communications equipment. 7. Other components required for a complete and working FMS. C. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers, and operator devices. D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. 2.3 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. Automation Network: 1. The FMS shall network multiple Network Controllers, Programmable Field Controllers, Application Specific Controllers, and VAV controllers. Provide application and data server(s) as required for systems operation. 2. The automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network communication. 3. Network Controllers shall reside on the automation network. 4. The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices. 5. Java-based systems will not be allowed. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 5 B. Dedicated Facility Management System Local Area Network: 1. The Facility Management System (FMS) shall reside on a dedicated Local Area Network (LAN) provided and installed by the Temperature Controls (TC) Contractor. 2. The FMS system shall not be connected to the Owners Ethernet Network by the TC Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to connect the FMS LAN to the Building LAN at any time. 3. Upon receiving written permission from the Owner, the TC Contractor has the option of providing a dedicated FMS Internet Service Provider (ISP) for construction warranty and / or service support. All costs associated with the FMS ISP shall be the responsibility of the TC Contractor unless the Owner has agreed in writing to cover the costs. The Owner reserves the right to terminate the FMS ISP connection at any time and must communicate the termination to the TC Contractor in writing. C. Control Network: 1. Network Controllers shall provide supervisory control over the control network and shall support one of the two following communication protocols: a. BACnet Standard IP or MS/TP Bus Protocol 2. Control networks shall utilize either IP or MS/TP communications protocol. 3. DDC Controllers shall reside on the control network. 4. BACnet Protocols a. Control network communication protocol shall be BACnet Standard IP or MS/TP Bus Protocol. b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for each controller device (master or slave) that will communicate on the BACnet MS/TP Bus. 5. The Network Controller shall be a Tridium JACE, Niagara 4 Supervisory controller. 6. Network Controller hardware / software keys such as the NIC (Niagara Interoperability Conformance) Statement that can lock up a JACE shall be unlocked, and the Owner shall be provided the highest level password. 7. The Controls Contractor will be required to provide the owner all software and hardware tools and files necessary to program all field controllers provided in the project. D. Integration: 1. Hardwired: a. All controls interface critical to the operation of equipment shall be hard- wired to the DDC system. Including but not limited to VFD’s, boilers, chillers, and air handlers. 2. BACnet Protocol Integration: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 6 a. When 3rd party BACnet controls connectivity is required, connection is used to acquire additional operational and monitoring parameters not critical to the control of the equipment. All 3rd party communication shall reside on an IP network or a dedicated 3rd party MSTP communication network. When both MS/TP communications and IP communications integration options are available, IP communication is preferred. 2.4 USER INTERFACE A. Dedicated Web Based User Interface: 1. Utilize a standard PC web browser to access the controls system. 2. User interface shall provide display/adjust/override capability, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. Each users capabilities shall be based on a password matrix. 3. All real-time control functions, including scheduling, trends, history collection, and alarming, shall reside in the Network Controller(s) to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability. B. Distributed Web Based User Interface: 1. All features and functions of the dedicated user interface previously defined in this document shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or virtual private network (WAN/VPN) to the automation network and conforming to the following specifications. 2. The software shall run on a standard web browser. 3. Java-based systems will not be allowed. C. User Interface Application Components: 1. Operator Interface: a. A standard web browser shall be used as the user operator interface program. b. All Inputs, Outputs, Setpoints, and all other parameters as defined within Part 3, shown on the design drawings, or required as part of the system software, shall be displayed for operator viewing and modification from the operator interface software. c. All controller software operating parameters shall be displayed for the operator to view/modify from the user interface. These include: sensor inputs, control outputs, setpoints, alarms, time delays, run-times, point statistics, trend data, schedules, and so forth. d. The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1) User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution. 2) Monitoring and reporting. 3) Alarm, non-normal, and return to normal condition annunciation. 4) Selective operator overrides and other control actions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 7 5) Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display, and reporting. 2. Alarms: a. Alarms shall be routed directly from Network Controllers to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the user interface shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions: 1) Log date and time of alarm occurrence. 2) Generate a "Pop-Up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received. 3) Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm. 4) Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp. 5) Provide the ability to send alarms requiring acknowledgment at the user interface, and / or direct alarms to an e-mail address and/or text messaging. 6) Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm. 3. Schedules: a. A graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of building operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be provided: 1) Weekly Schedules. 2) Exception Schedules. 3) Calendars. b. Weekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific time use schedule. c. It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule including references to calendars. d. calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device or keyboard and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the exception schedules. 4. Password: a. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to user interface control, display, and database manipulation capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 8 b. Each user shall have the following: a user name, a password, and access levels. c. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported. d. A minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported. e. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on. f. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms. 5. Dynamic Color Graphics: a. The graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User Interface. b. The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime function. c. The control system graphical interface shall include graphics for each mechanical system, each piece of HVAC equipment, and each floor plan with all display/ adjust / override points necessary to graphically operate the control system. d. The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on real- time data that is acquired, derived, or entered. e. Graphics Runtime Functions: Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions: 1) All graphics shall be fully scalable. 2) The graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio. 3) Multiple fonts shall be supported. 4) Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis. 5) The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate if the status of the object attribute. f. Operation from Graphics: It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment by using drop-down windows accessible via the pointing device. g. Graphic Editing Tool: A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of performing/defining all animations and defining all runtime binding. 1) The graphic editing tool shall in general provide for the creation and positioning of point objects by dragging from tool bars or drop-downs and positioning where required. 2) In addition, the graphic editing tool shall be able to add additional content to any graphic by importing backgrounds in the SVG, BMP or JPG file formats. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 9 h. Historical trending and data collection. i. Each Network Controller shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital inputs and outputs, as follows: 1) Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. 2) Each Network Controller shall have the capability to store multiple samples for each physical point and software variable based upon available memory, including an individual sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with different collection parameters. 6. Trend Data Viewing and Analysis: a. Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points. b. It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name. c. The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to include multiple trends. d. Displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style. e. Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom capability. f. Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of the data being displayed. g. Trend studies shall be capable of calculating and displaying calculated variables including highest value, lowest value, and time based accumulation. 2.5 NETWORK CONTROLLERS (NWC) A. Network Controllers: 1. The Network Controller (NWC) shall be a fully programmable supervisory controller. The NWC shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to- peer basis with other Network Controllers. 2. Automation Network: The NWC shall reside on the automation network and shall support a subnet of Programmable Field Controllers, Application Specific Controllers, and VAV Controllers. 3. User Interface: Each NWC shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI. a. The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NWC or Web Server. Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user's personal computer are not acceptable. b. The NWC shall support a minimum of two concurrent users. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 10 c. The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data through the workstation. d. Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) shall also have limited or total system access based on the password matrix. e. The NWC shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. f. Systems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable. 4. Power Failure: In the event of the loss of normal power, the NWC shall perform an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence. 5. Certification: The NWC shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 6. Controller Network: The NWC shall support one of the following communication protocols on the controller network: a. The NWC shall support BACnet Standard IP or MS/TP Bus Protocol on the controller network. 1) All BACnet controls devices shall be ASHRAE certified. 2) The NWC shall support a minimum of 100 control devices. 2.6 DDC CONTROLLERS A. Programmable Field Controllers (PFC): 1. The Programmable Field Controller (PFC) shall be a fully programmable digital controller that communicates via BACnet protocol. 2. The PFC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points. 3. The PFC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Universal Inputs shall be configured to monitor any of the following: 1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Input, Current Mode. 3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode. 4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode. b. Binary Inputs shall be configured to monitor either of the following: 1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 2) Pulse Counter Mode. c. Analog Outputs shall be configured to output either of the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 11 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Output, Current Mode. d. Binary Outputs shall output the following: 1) 24 VAC Triac. e. Configurable Outputs shall be capable of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Binary Output Mode. 4. The PFC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the field bus. 5. The PFC shall support, but not be limited to, the following: a. Hot water, chilled water/central plant applications. b. Built-up air handling units for special applications. c. Terminal units. d. Special programs as required for systems control. B. Application Specific Controllers (ASC): 1. The Application Specific Controller (ASC) shall be a programmable digital controller that communicates via BACnet protocol. 2. The ASC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points. 3. The ASC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs: a. Universal Inputs shall be configured to monitor any of the following: 1) Analog Input, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Input, Current Mode. 3) Analog Input, Resistive Mode. 4) Binary Input, Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 5) Binary Input, Pulse Counter Mode. b. Binary Inputs shall be configured to monitor either of the following: 1) Dry Contact Maintained Mode. 2) Pulse Counter Mode. c. Analog Outputs shall be configured to output either of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Analog Output, Current Mode. d. Binary Outputs shall output the following: 1) 24 VAC Triac. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 12 e. Configurable Outputs shall be capable of the following: 1) Analog Output, Voltage Mode. 2) Binary Output Mode. 4. The ASC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the field bus. 5. The ASC shall support, but not be limited to, the following: a. Fan coil units, roof top units, heat pump units and unit ventilators applications. b. Terminal units. c. Special programs as required for systems control. 6. Sensor Support: a. The controller shall support an LCD display room sensor. b. The controller shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog input requirements. C. VAV Controllers: 1. The VAV Controller shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of pressure-independent, variable air volume terminal units. It shall address both single and dual duct applications. 2. The VAV Controller shall communicate via BACnet protocol. 3. The VAV Controller shall have internal electrical isolation for AC power, DC inputs, and MS/TP communications. 4. The VAV Controller shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure transducer. 5. The VAV Controller shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB. 6. The controller shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral dead-ended differential pressure transducer or an integral thermistor with filter. The airflow device shall be maintenance-free. 7. Each controller shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects. 8. The controller shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space temperature control loops. 9. The controller shall provide the ability to download and upload configuration files, both locally and via the communications network. 10. Control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to non-volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent operation in the event of communication failure. 11. The controller shall interface with balancer tools to provide an adjustable box flow pickup gain factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop to the box minimum and maximum airflow setpoints. 12. Inputs: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 13 a. Analog inputs with user defined ranges shall monitor the following analog signals, without the addition of equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet: 1) 0-10 VDC Sensors. 2) Resistive type RTDs or thermistors. 3) NTC Thermistors. b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to eliminate false signals resulting from input "bouncing." c. For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and output circuits. 13. Outputs: a. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs: 1) 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA. b. Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC. c. For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power, communications, and other output circuits. 14. Sensor Support: a. The controller shall support an LCD display room sensor. b. The controller shall also support standard room sensors as defined by analog input requirements. c. The controller shall support humidity sensors defined by the AI side loop. 2.7 FIELD DEVICES A. Networked Thermostats: 1. The Networked Thermostats shall be capable of controlling the following: a. Cabinet heaters or unit heaters. b. Finned-tube radiation. 2. The Networked Thermostat shall communicate over the I/P or MS/TP. a. The Networked Thermostat shall support remote read/write and parameter adjustment from the web based User Interfaceable through a Network Controller. 3. The Networked Thermostat shall include an intuitive User Interface providing plain text messages with backlit display. 4. The Networked Thermostats shall provide the flexibility to support the following inputs: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 14 a. Integral Indoor Air Temperature Sensor. b. Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor. c. Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy Override and LED Indicator. d. Two configurable binary inputs. 5. The Networked Thermostats shall provide the flexibility to support the following outputs: a. Three Speed Fan Control. b. On/Off Control. c. Floating Control. d. Proportional (0 to 10V) Control or 0-20 mA. 6. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to adjust the following parameters: a. Adjustable Temporary Occupancy from 0 to 24 hours. b. Adjustable heating/cooling deadband from 2 deg F to 5 deg F. c. Adjustable heating/cooling cycles per hour from 4 to 8. 7. The Networked Thermostat shall employ nonvolatile electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) for all adjustable parameters. B. Network Sensors (NS): 1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following variables as required by the systems sequence of operations: a. Zone temperature. b. Zone setpoint. 2. The NS shall transmit the zone information back to the controller using BACnet 3. The Network Sensors shall include the following items: a. A backlit Liquid Display (LCD) to indicate the Temperature, Humidity and Setpoint. b. An LED to indicate the status of the override feature. c. A button to initiate a timed override command. 2.8 INPUT DEVICES A. General Requirements: 1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements. B. Temperature Sensors: 1. General Requirements: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 15 a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations. b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type RTDs or Thermistors. c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion: Point Type Accuracy Room Temp + .5 deg F. Duct Temperature + .5 deg F. All Others + .75 deg F. 2. Room Temperature Sensors: a. Room sensors shall be constructed for wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have the following options: 1) Stainless steel wall plate with no adjustment or display. Room set point changed from Operator interface only. 2) Stainless steel wall plate with momentary push-button for timed override request, or custom programming sequence. Room set point changed from Operator interface only. 3. Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display: a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and keypad with the following capabilities: 1) Display room temperatures and outside air temperature 2) Display and adjust room comfort setpoint 3) Display and adjust fan operation status 4) Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of after-hours operation. 5) Display controller mode 6) Facility Operator adjustment of setpoint limits and override modes 4. Thermowells: a. When thermo wells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly, including wellhead and Greenfield fitting. b. Thermo wells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure. c. Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2-inch NPT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. d. Thermo wells shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel or brass. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 16 e. Fill thermo wells with thermally conductive material. 5. Outside Air Sensors: a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element. c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures. 6. Duct Mount Sensors: a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly, including lock nut and mounting plate. c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used. 7. Averaging Sensors: a. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used. b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing points per 12-foot long segment. c. Capillary supports at the sides of the duct shall be provided to support the sensing string. C. Humidity Sensors: 1. The sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall resist service contamination. 2. The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA 0-100 percent linear proportional output. 3. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead loss and Analog to Digital conversion. 3 percent between 20 percent and 80 percent RH at 77 deg F unless specified elsewhere. 4. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel bushings. 5. A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated. 6. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 17 D. Carbon Dioxide Sensor: 1. General Requirements: a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations. b. The carbon dioxide sensor shall use non dispersive infrared technology and have a corrosion free sensing chamber for stable sensing. c. Sensors shall have analog and relay outputs based on CO2 levels. CO2 sensor measurement range shall be 0-2000 ppm, accuracy pressure 20 ppm, measuring accuracy range - 1.4 percent change in reading per 0.15 psig deviation from 14.5 psig, and operating temperature range 32 deg F to 122 deg F. d. Sensor shall be UL listed and similar to Honeywell C7232. e. Models can be available in duct mount or wall mount, see Drawings and Specification for application location. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Differential Pressure Transmitters: 1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements: a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100 percent pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40 percent over-range input. b. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal. c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut- off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection. d. A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels. e. Provide transmitter with display. f. Provide static tips for duct-mounted air pressure sensors. Provide wall plates for room pressure sensors. Provide Outside Pressure Pickup Port for outdoor pressure references. g. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra or Equal. 2. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-0.25 inch to +0.25 inch a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: 1) Up to -0.25 to +0.25 w.c. input differential pressure ranges adjustable. (Select -0.10 inches to +0.10 inches for building pressure applications. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 18 2) 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output. 3) Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown. 4) Reference Accuracy: +0.2 percent of full span. 5) Provide transmitter with display. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra or Equal. 3. Duct Air Pressure Applications (0 inch to 5 inches a. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal in response to variation of differential pressure or air pressure sensing points. b. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications: 1) (0.00 - 1.00 inch to 5.00 inch) w.c. input differential pressure ranges. (Select range appropriate for system application.) 2) 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal 3) Reference Accuracy: +0.2 percent of full span. 4) Provide transmitter with display. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra or Equal. F. Flow Monitoring: 1. Air Flow Monitoring: a. Outdoor Air Flow Measurement System: 1) Provide where indicated, a complete, dedicated fixed resistance outdoor airflow measuring station capable of directly measuring the airflow through an outside air inlet / opening and providing the measured airflow values via a local display, multiple analog outputs and a single serial output for BACnet or Modbus. Basis of Design – Air Monitor VOLU-Flo OAM II, as manufactured by Air Monitor Corporation, Santa Rosa, California. 2) The Outdoor Airflow Measurement System shall consist of a dedicated monitor / transmitter and flow sensing element(s) combined to create a complete system. The system shall be factory calibrated and configured based on the application and installation configuration. 3) Transmitter: The transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure (NEMA 4 enclosure; NEMA 4 enclosure with heater and insulation), with an integral color graphic display and four button keypad for use during the configuration and field characterization process. The display shall be configurable to indicate two measured process variables (volume, velocity, temperature) during normal operation. The transmitter shall incorporate a temperature sensor input as required to perform continuous airflow density compensation. The Transmitter shall provide BACnet MS/TP (MODBUS RTU) and three ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 19 field configurable analog outputs designed to interface with the Facility Management System (FMS). The ability to perform configuration changes and field characterization shall be accomplished via the user interface/display, the need for additional utility software shall not be required. The transmitter shall be the Air Monitor VOLU-flo/OAM II. 4) Flow sensing elements for use with louvers and rain hoods – The flow sensing element(s) shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and other materials that are designed to resist corrosion due to the presence of salt or chemicals in the airstream. The flow sensing elements shall not be affected by the presence of moisture, dirt or debris in the airstream and shall not be affected by gusting wind. Flow sensing element types affected by moisture in the airstream, such as thermal dispersion shall not be allowed. The flow sensor element shall be Air Monitor UNI-SENSOR type. 5) Flow sensing elements mounted in a factory-constructed frame for use in ducts and plenum openings – The flow sensing element(s) shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and other materials that are designed to resist corrosion due to the presence of salt or chemicals in the airstream. Sensors shall be factory mounted in an airflow station constructed of 14 gauge (18 gauge. for circular units) galvanized steel, 8" deep casing with 90º connecting flanges and a galvanized expanded metal sheet. The airflow station shall have the flow elements manifolded together with 1/4” SS tubing and 1/4” compression fittings for field installation. The reference airflow temperature sensor shall be mounted in the Airflow Station. The airflow station shall be the Air Monitor OAM II – AFS type. 6) The Outdoor Airflow Measurement System shall provide airflow measurement accuracy of 5% of reading within the factory calibrated velocity range. The System shall be capable of measuring outdoor airflow velocities from 100 FPM to 2400 FPM. The System’s readings shall not be affected by the presence of moisture, dirt or debris in the airstream and shall be unaffected by gusting wind. The measured airflow shall be density corrected for ambient temperature variances and atmospheric pressure due to site altitude. The System shall not require any straight duct upstream of the airflow station to achieve stated accuracy of 5% of reading. b. Fan Inlet Air Flow Measuring Stations: 1) At the inlet of each fan and near the exit of the inlet sound trap, airflow traverse probes shall be provided that shall continuously monitor the fan air volumes and system velocity pressure. 2) Each traverse probe shall be of a dual manifolded, cylindrical, type 3003 extruded aluminum configuration, having an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction. The multiple total pressure manifold shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching airflow. The manifold should not have forward projecting sensors into the air stream. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tops on the ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 20 opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as + 20 deg in the approaching air stream. 3) The airflow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presence in the air stream. Each airflow- measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing. 4) Airflow measuring stations shall be manufactured by Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air Systems, Inc., Ebtron, or Dietrich Standard. c. Single Probe Air Flow Measuring Sensor: 1) The single probe airflow-measuring sensor shall be duct mounted with an adjustable sensor insertion length of up to eight inches. The transmitter shall produce a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA signal linear to air velocity. The sensor shall be a hot wire anemometer and utilize two temperature sensors and a heater element temperature. The other sensor shall measure the air temperature. The temperature differential shall be directly related to airflow velocity. d. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations: 1) Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results in accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the ASHRAE Handbook of fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation Handbook. 2) Airflow measuring stations shall be fabricated of 14-gauge galvanized steel welded casing with 90 deg connecting flanges in configuration and size equal to that of the duct into which it is mounted. Each station shall be complete with an air directionalizer and parallel cell profile suppressor (3/4 inch maximum cell) across the entering air stream and mechanically fastened to the casing in such a way to withstand velocities up to 6000 feet per minute. This air directionalizer and parallel cell honeycomb suppressor shall provide 98 percent free area, equalize the velocity profile, and eliminate turbulent and rotational flow from the air stream prior to the measuring point. 3) The total pressure measurement side (high side) will be designed and spaced to the Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition, Page 9- 5. The self-averaging manifolding will be manufactured of brass and copper components. 4) The static pressure sensing probes (low side) shall be bullet-nosed shaped, per detailed radius, as illustrated in Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition, Page 9-5. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 21 5) The main take-off point from both the total pressure and the static pressure manifolds must be symmetrical. 6) Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for connection to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each unit casing, listing model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity. 7) Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air, Ebtron, and Dietrich Standard. G. Power Monitoring Devices: 1. Current Measurement (Amps): a. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System. b. Current Transformer: A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps. 1) Operating Frequency: 50 - 400 Hz. 2) Insulation: 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL. 3) UL recognized. 4) Five amp secondary. 5) Select current ration as appropriate for application. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries. c. Current Transducer: A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include: 1) 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps. 2) Manufactured to UL 1244. 3) Accuracy: percent, Ripple +1 percent. 4) Minimum Load Resistance: 30kOhm. 5) Input 0-20 Amps. 6) Output 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA. 7) Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5 percent). 8) Acceptable Manufacturers: Veris Industries. H. Refrigerant Leak Detectors: 1. The refrigerant leak detector shall be a standalone device and shall provide a SPDT output to directly energize the refrigeration room exhaust ventilation fans. The detector shall include a sensor or sensors connected to a control panel. Two relay contacts at the control panel shall provide trouble and alarm indication to the Facility Management System. The alarm relay contact shall also directly energize the exhaust fans. Equal to MSA model "Chillguard XF." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 22 2. The refrigerant leak detector shall sense the type of refrigerant used in the specified chillers. Multiple sensors shall be required to detect different refrigerants and/or provide proper sensing coverage for the area of the refrigeration room. 3. The photoacoustic infrared monitor shall have high/low alarm level, latching and not-latching relay contacts for each alarm level, relay contacts for fault indication, LED indicators on front panel, audible alarm, output a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA signal to interface with the building automation, calibration kit, span gas, and beacon horn. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: MSA Instruments, Yokagowa Industrial Automation. I. Status and Safety Switches: 1. General Requirements: a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the FMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment. 2. Current Sensing Switches: a. The current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over- current up to twice its trip point range. b. Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads. c. Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status. 3. Air Filter Status Switches: a. Differential pressure switches used to monitor air filter status shall be analog type transmitters with adjustable setpoints in the workstation. b. A complete installation kit shall be provided, including: static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filters. c. Provide appropriate scale range and programmed alarms for intended service. 4. Air Flow Switches: a. Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated snap acting micro-switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service. 5. Air Pressure Safety Switches: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 23 a. Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with DPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120 VAC. b. Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cleveland Controls or equal. 6. Water Flow Switches: a. Water flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74. 7. Low Temperature Limit Switches: a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC. b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 feet in length and shall react to the coldest 18-inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures. c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the air stream. d. The low temperature limit switch shall be equal to Johnson Controls A70. 2.9 OUTPUT DEVICES A. Actuators: 1. General Requirements: a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic. 2. Electronic Damper Actuators: a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount. b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator manufacturer's recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure, and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction and a gear release to allow manual positioning. c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. Floating point actuators are not considered modulating actuators. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 24 d. VAV damper actuators may utilize floating point control for closed loop control with an airflow measuring device, unless specifically excluded in the FMS Point Schedule or the sequence of operation, or when VAV damper position feedback is required. 3. Electronic Valve Actuators: a. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer. b. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator. c. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve close-off against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be sized Based on valve manufacturer's recommendations for flow and pressure differential. All actuators on valves shall have mechanical spring return unless specified as fail in last position in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction. d. Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. Floating point actuators are not considered modulating actuators. e. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position, or be hard wired to start/stop the associated pump or chiller. B. Control Dampers: 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers unless the Drawing Schedules specifically designate the damper provider. All automatic dampers shall be sized for the application by the damper provider or as specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear. 3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required. 4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60 inches. Damper blades shall be 16-gauge minimum and shall not exceed eight inches in width. Damper frames shall be 16-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be made of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing, low leakage type, with ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 25 elastomeric seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48 inch by 48 inch size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per square foot when closed against 4 inch w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500. 5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure exceeds 2.5 inch w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6 inches w.g. 6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face velocities of 1500 FPM or below. 7. Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive at least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist C. Control Relays: 1. Control Pilot Relays: a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips. b. Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount. c. DPDT, 3 PDT, or 4 PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application. d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120 VAC. e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light. 2. Control Power Relays: a. SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application. b. Contacts shall be rated for the proper resistive, inductive, or motor HP load. c. Relays shall have an integral indicator light. 3. Lighting Control Relays: a. Lighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts. b. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC. c. The coil shall be a split low-voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact armature to the ON or OFF latched position. d. Lighting control relays shall be controlled by: 1) Pulsed Tri-State Output: Preferred method. 2) A Binary Input to the Facility Management System shall monitor integral status contacts on the lighting control relay. Relay status contacts shall be of the "dry-contact" type. e. The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change-of-state, and so that multiple same state commands will simply maintain the commanded state. Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF position. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 26 D. Control Valves: 1. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification. 2. Heating water control valves shall be modulating plug or ball, as required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 3 PSI. Valves (3-way) serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25 percent the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 3 PSI. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 3 PSIG pressure drop. 3. All control valves shall have a minimum Cv = 1.5, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 4. Ball valves shall be used for hot and cold water applications, water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units except those described hereinafter. 5. High temperature characterized ball valves shall not be allowed as control valves in steam applications. 6. Modulating plug water valves of the single-seat type with equal percentage flow characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated. Valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel. 7. Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than modulating plug valves, and for all two-position, open/close applications. In- line butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble-tight. E. Variable Frequency Controllers: 1. General: a. The temperature control contractor shall furnish complete variable frequency drives (VFD's) as specified herein for the fans and pumps designated on the Drawing Schedules to be variable speed unless the Drawing Schedules specifically designate the VFD provider. All standard and optional features shall be included within the VFD enclosure, unless otherwise specified. The VFD package shall be housed in a U.L. type enclosure according to the installation and operating conditions at the job ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 27 site. The VFD's UL listing shall allow mounting in plenum or other air handling compartments. If a NEMA 12 enclosure is required for the plenum rating, the manufacturer must supply a NEMA 12 rated VFD. b. Inverters shall be manufactured in the United States and meet provisions of the Buy American Act. To ensure compatibility with future equipment, the manufacturer shall have one design to cover the full range of controllers required. c. The inverter manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing inverters and shall have a minimum of 7 years experience with IGBT transistors used with the inverter to produce the output PWM waveform, allowing quiet motor operation. Inverters up to 135 RW with carrier frequencies below 12 kHz will not be acceptable. All inverters must be IGBT's. d. The adjustable frequency drive manufacturer shall have established for not less than two years prior to the bid opening, a service and repair representative within 200 miles of project site. The local service representative shall inspect the installation, provide startup and calibrate of the drives, and provide immediate response during the one-year warranty period. e. To ensure adequate technical and factory support, VFDs that are manufactured by a third party and “brand labeled” shall not be acceptable. 2. Manufacturers: a. ABB b. Danfoss c. Yaskawa 3. Products: a. The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three- phase AC motors. The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization currently suitable for centrifugal pump and fan control and to eliminate the need for motor de-rating. b. With the motor's rated voltage applied to the VFD input, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated amps, RMS fundamental volts, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFD's utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current during full load and full speed operation. c. The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental power factor near unity regardless of speed or load. d. The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508. The complete VFD, including all specified options, shall be assembled by the manufacturer, which shall be UL-508 certified for the building and assembly of option panels. Assembly of the option panels by a third-party panel shop is not acceptable. The appropriate UL stickers shall be applied to both the VFD and option panel, in the case where these are not contained in one ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 28 panel. When these VFD's are to be located in Canada, CSA or C-UL certifications shall apply. Both VFD and option panel shall be manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities. e. The VFD shall have DC link reactors on both the positive and negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics. VFD's without DC link reactors shall provide a minimum of 3 percent impedance line reactor. f. The VFD's full load ramp rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110 percent of rated current for 60 seconds and 160 percent of rated current for up to 0.5 second while starting. g. The VFD shall be able to provide full torque at any selected frequency from 28 Hz to base speed to allow driving direct drive fans without de-rating. h. An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided standard in the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continually monitor the motor's speed and load and adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings and provide up to an additional 3 percent to 10 percent energy savings. i. Input and output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks or damage to the VFD. Switching rate may be up to 1 time per minute on the input and unlimited on the output. j. An automatic motor adaptation test algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the motor or de-couple the motor from the load to run the test. k. Galvanic and/or optical isolation shall be provided between the VFD's power circuitry and control circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop currents. VFD's not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O and discrete I/O shall include additional isolation modules. l. VFD shall eliminate the audible motor noise through the use of an adjustable carrier frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and VFD efficiencies while reducing motor noise. m. Protective Features: 1) A minimum of Class 20 l2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor applications and thermal-mechanical overloads for multiple motor applications shall be provided. 2) Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit, output ground fault, overvoltage, under-voltage, VFD over-temperature and motor over-temperature. 3) Protect VFD from sustainable power or phase loss. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as low as 90 percent of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output with an input voltage as low as 164 V AC for 208/230 volt units, and 313 V AC for 460 volt units. 4) The VFD shall incorporate a motor preheat circuit to keep the motor warm and prevent condensation build up in the stator. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 29 5) The VFD package shall include semi-conductor rated input fuses to protect power components. 6) To prevent breakdown of the motor winding insulation, the VFD shall be designed to comply with IEC Part 34-17. 7) VFD shall include a "signal loss detection" circuit to sense the loss of an analog input signal such as 4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 V DC, and shall be programmable to react as desired in such an instance. 8) VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running and continue to follow remote commands. No warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad. 9) VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed. 10) VFD shall be rated for 100,000 amp interrupting capacity (AIC). 11) VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to detect and report phase loss to the motor. The VFD will identify which of the output phases is low or lost. 12) VFD shall continue to operate without faulting until input voltage reaches 300 V AC on 208/230 volt VFD's. n. Interface Features: 1) The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto start/stop and hand/auto speed control. The drive shall incorporate “bumpless transfer” of speed reference when switching between “Hand” and “Auto” speed control modes. Potentiometers for speed control are not acceptable. 2) Lockable, alphanumeric backlit keypad. 3) The keypads for all sizes of VFD's shall be identical and interchangeable. 4) A quick setup menu with factory present typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the VFD eliminating the need for macros. 5) As a minimum, the following points shall be controlled and/or accessible: VFD Start/Stop, Speed reference, Fault Diagnostics, Metering points: Output frequency, motor speed, motor voltage, motor current, motor torque, motor power (kW), DC bus voltage. 6) Two programmable Form-C relay outputs shall be available for factory or field installation within the VFD. 7) BacNet communication shall be available for factory or field installation within the VFD. 8) Two set-point control interface (PID control) shall be standard in the unit. VFD shall be able to look at two feedback signals, compare with two set-points and make various process control decisions. 9) Floating point control interface shall be provided on increase/decrease speed in response to contact closures. 10) Three simultaneous displays shall be available. They shall include frequency or speed, output amps, and output KW power. 11) Sleep mode shall be provided to automatically stop the VFD when its speed drops below set "sleep" level for a specified time. The VFD shall automatically restart when the speed command exceeds the set "wake" level. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 30 12) The sleep mode shall be functional in both follower mode and PID mode. 13) Run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a "system ready" signal to ensure that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of sending an output signal as a start command to actuate external equipment before allowing the VFD to start. 14) The following displays shall be accessible from the control panel in actual units: Reference Signal Value in actual units, Output Voltage, DC Bus Voltage, VFD Temperature in degrees, and Motor Speed in engineering unit either in a linear, square or cubed relationship to output frequency as appropriate to the unit chosen. 15) The display shall be programmed to read in inches of water column (in-wg) for an air handler application, pressure per square inch (psi) for a pump application, and temperature for a cooling tower application. 16) VFD shall be able to be programmed to sense the loss of load and signal a no load/broken belt warning or fault. 17) If the temperature of the VFD's heat sink rises to 80 deg C, the VFD shall automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. If the temperature of the heat sink continues to rise the VFD shall automatically reduce its output frequency to the motor. As the VFD's heat sink temperature returns to normal, the VFD shall automatically increase the output frequency to the motor and return the carrier frequency to its normal switching speed. 18) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation and minimized losses. 19) The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 faults and related operational data. 20) Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the systems control and safety interlock circuitry. 21) Two digital Form-C relay outputs shall be provided, with programming capability of VFD ready or run status. 22) Three programmable analog inputs shall be provided and shall accept a direct-or-reverse acting signal. Analog reference inputs accepted shall include two voltage (0 to 10 V DC, 2 to 10 V DC) and one current (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA) input. 23) Two programmable 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA analog outputs shall be provided for indication of VFD status. These outputs shall be programmable for output speed, frequency, current and power. They shall also be programmable to provide a selected 24 V DC status indication. 24) Under fire mode conditions, the VFD shall be able to be programmed to automatically stop. o. Adjustments: 1) VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency in steps of not less than 0.1 kHz to allow tuning the VFD to the motor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 31 2) Sixteen preset speeds shall be provided. 3) Four acceleration and four deceleration ramps shall be provided. Accel and decel time shall be adjustable over the range from 0 to 3,600 seconds to base speed. The shape of these curves shall be automatically contoured to ensure no-trip acceleration and deceleration. 4) Four current limit settings shall be provided. 5) If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for automatic or manual reset: under-voltage, over- voltage, current limit and inverter overload. 6) The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds. 7) An automatic "on delay" may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. p. Disconnect: 1) Stand-alone VFD’s shall include a main fused disconnect padlockable in the off position. q. Bypass: 1) Manual 3-contactor bypass consisting of a door interlocked main fused disconnect padlockable in the off position, a built-in motor starter and a three position DRIVE/OFF/BYPASS switch controlling three contactors. In the DRIVE position, the motor is operated at an adjustable speed from the VFD. In the OFF position, the motor and VFD are disconnected. In the BYPASS position, the motor is operated at full speed from the AC power line and power is disconnected from the VFD so that service can be performed. In case of an external safety fault, a customer supplied normally closed dry contact shall be able to stop the motor whether in DRIVE or BYPASS mode. r. Service Conditions: 1) Ambient temperature, -10 to 40 deg C (14 to 104 deg 2) 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. 3) Elevation to 3,300 feet without de-rating. 4) AC line voltage variation, -10 to 10 percent of nominal with full output. 5) No side clearance shall be required for cooling of any units. All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom. s. Quality Assurance: 1) To ensure quality and minimize infantile failures at the jobsite, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall operate a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be cycled during the test. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 32 2) All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation. t. Warranty: The VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from date of shipment. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized on-site service. The warranty shall be provided by the VFD manufacturer. F. Local Control Panels: 1. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch. 2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so forth that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted. 3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals. 4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring. 5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped. 6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers. G. Power Supplies: 1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not exceed 75 percent of the rated capacity of the power supply. 2. Input: 120 VAC +10 percent, 60Hz. 3. Output: 24 VDC. 4. Line Regulation: +0.05 percent for 10 percent line change. 5. Load Regulation: +0.05 percent for 50 percent load change. 6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak. 7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the power supply. 8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply. PART 3 - PERFORMANCE / EXECUTION 3.1 FMS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install all control equipment including motorized dampers, valves and actuators according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 33 B. Programming: Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as required to satisfy the sequence of operation. Programming and adjustments required during the building startup and warranty period shall be provided at no additional cost. C. Graphic Displays: 1. The control system graphical interface shall include graphics for each mechanical system, each piece of HVAC equipment, each terminal unit, and each floor plan with all display/ adjust / override points necessary to graphically operate the control system. At a minimum provide graphics for the following: a. Floor Plan views with all zones indicated. Provide colored shading to provide indication of zone temperature difference from set point. b. Air handler views showing all components of air handling system including dampers, valves, fans, coils, filters and related building exhaust and/or relief systems. The graphics shall include all points related to each controlled device. c. Field equipment views showing all components of the equipment being controlled such as RTUs, heat pumps, terminal units, etc. Graphics shall include all dampers valves and other points related to each controlled device. 2. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or menu selection. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. FMS Wiring: 1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Facility Management System including power wiring for all controllers shall be provided by the TC Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this Section. 2. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the TC Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the TC Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components. 3. Class 2 Wiring: a. All Class 2 (24 VAC or less) wiring in mechanical rooms and exposed areas shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified. b. Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations shall be in EMT conduit or shielded plenum rated cable. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be neatly bundled, installed parallel to the building structural lines, and supported every 5 feet from the building structure using hangers designed ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 34 for this application, such as D-rings or J-hooks. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements. 4. Class 2 signal wiring and 24 VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 90 VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring. 5. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels, and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops. B. FMS Line Voltage Power Source: 1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Facility Management System shall be taken from existing panel boards and circuit breakers. Power for Facility Management System controls is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor. C. FMS Raceway: 1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2 inch. 2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect. 3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed. D. Penetrations: 1. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated FMS conduits and raceways. 2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using approved fire resistive sealant. 3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway. 4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square. E. FMS Identification Standards: 1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. 2. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting. F. FMS Panel Installation: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 35 1. The FMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than three feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. The FMS Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and Mechanical Contractors. G. HVAC Input Devices - General: 1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation. 2. Locate components of the FMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible. 3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc. 4. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions. 5. Outside Air Sensors: a. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover, mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately. 6. Space Sensors: a. All space sensor rough-ins shall be provided by the TC Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. b. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements, unless specific mounting heights are called out on the Plans. c. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the Plans. 7. Low Temperature Limit Switches: a. Install on the discharge side of the first water coil in the air stream. b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern ensuring each square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor. c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream. 3.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE INSTALLATION A. Start-up Service: 1. The manufacturer shall provide start-up commissioning of the VFD and its optional circuits by a factory certified service technician who is experienced in start-up and repair services. Sales personnel and other agents who are not factory certified shall not be acceptable as commissioning agents. Start-up services shall include checking for verification of proper operation and installation ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 36 for the VFD, its options and its interface wiring to the Facility Management System. B. Examination: 1. Contractor to verify that job site conditions for installation meet factory recommended and code-required conditions for VFD installation prior to start-up, including clearance spacing, temperature, contamination, dust, and moisture of the environment. Separate conduit installation of the motor wiring, power wiring, and control wiring, and installation per the manufacturer's recommendations shall be verified. 2. The VFD is to be covered and protected from installation dust and contamination until the environment is cleaned and ready for operation. The VFD shall not be operated while the unit is covered. 3.4 TRAINING A. The TC Contractor shall provide the following training services: 1. One day of on-site training by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the Project shall be performed following substantial completion of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as-built drawings, the FMS software layout and naming conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Sequence Verification: The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative or the engineer when the systems are performing as specified in the Sequence of Operation. Instruct the engineer on access to the building's control system and provide with proper username and password to verify that all systems are operating as specified. At the engineers request the control contractor shall demonstrate that specific sequences are operating as intended. Include a minimum of 8 hours of on site time with the engineer verifying systems operation if requested. The control contractor shall simulate conditions and change set points as directed by the engineer to prove compliance. Make changes as required to meet the sequence of operation and at conclusion of sequence verification process, initiate point trending as directed by the engineer. All software changes needed for proper system operation during the warranty period shall be made at the expense of the Contractor. B. Point Trending: The temperature control contractor shall set up trending on any point requested by the engineer to verify that control loops are operating as intended and meets the design intent. At a minimum provide trends for a one week time period for the following points: 1. Space Temperatures 1 deg of Setpoint) at 10 minute intervals. 2. Duct Static Pressure 10 percent of control range) at 1 minute intervals. 3. Equipment Staging (ON/ OFF status) at 5 minute intervals. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 37 4. Economizer Modulation (percent open) at 1 minute intervals. 5. VFD Control (percent output) at 1 minute intervals. END OF SECTION 230900 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1 SECTION 231123 - NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: More than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig. B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 2 B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating and protect from direct sunlight. D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's written permission. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o- rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. B. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion- resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 4 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Forged brass. 3. Ball: Brass. 4. Stem: Brass; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 5 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 2 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 2 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 11. Visual position indicator. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 6 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger. B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 7 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. 3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 8 J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. U. Install pressure gage from each line regulator. V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless- steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. B. Install underground valves with valve boxes. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 9 C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. 3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 10 D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for Plumbing and HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping. 2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 11 3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints. 3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve. C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve. E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance or equipment shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 231123 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Refrigerants. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality-Control Reports: For each field quality-control test and inspection. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34. B. Comply with ASME B31.5. C. Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-454B: 1. Suction Tubing for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig. 2. Hot-Gas and Tubing Lines: 535 psig. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR. 2.3 REFRIGERANTS A. R-454B, ASHRAE 34: R-32 (68.9 percent by mass) and R-1234yf (31.1 percent by mass). REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arkema Inc. b. Honeywell International Inc. c. Mexichem Fluor, Inc. (Koura). d. The Chemours Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULES A. Refrigerant: R-454B. B. Suction, Hot-Gas, and Liquid Tubing for Heat-Pump Applications, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. C. Suction, Hot-Gas, and Liquid Tubing for Heat-Pump Applications, NPS 2 to NPS 4: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 2. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 3. Liquid lines may be installed level. O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves in accordance with Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." 3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints in accordance with AWS BRH, "Brazing Handbook," Ch. 35, "Pipe and Tubing." 1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. C. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting. E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System must maintain test pressure at the manifold gauge throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 2. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 3. Charge system. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. B. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. END OF SECTION 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings - single wall. 2. Round ducts and fittings - single wall. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. 2.2 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Rectangular Ducts and Fittings - Single Wall: 1. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on static-pressure class indicated on the Drawings. a. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." a. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. b. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 4. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Round Ducts and Fittings - Single Wall: 1. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class indicated on the Drawings. a. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel. 2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods. Sheet metal materials are to be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. 3. Lockforming Quality: Sheet steel and galvanized coating is to be able to be formed with back-to-back bends in seams such as the Pittsburgh lock at high speed without cracking or flaking of the coating on the outside of the bend. C. PVC-Coated, Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Minimum Thickness for Factory-Applied PVC Coating: 4 mils thick on sheet metal surface of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions, and minimum 1 mil thick on opposite surface. 2. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1. D. Stainless Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish is to be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter for 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch- minimum diameter for longer than 36 inches. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.5 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. Sekisui Voltek, LLC. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain fibrous-glass duct liner from single manufacturer. 3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 4. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound is to be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 5. Liner Adhesive: Water-based liner adhesive, complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916. B. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 7. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. 2.6 SEALANTS AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets are to be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings. B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Install ducts in maximum practical with fewest possible joints. D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." L. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit. 1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections. N. Installation of Metal, Cable-Type Strut Support System for Ductwork: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class B. 3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class C. 7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class B. 8. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 ft. E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts: For pressure class of 3-inch wg or higher; test representative duct sections totaling no less than 100 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage. 5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning, and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media is to not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR. C. Use service openings for entry and inspection. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 3.9 STARTUP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below. B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. 2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units. a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: . a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. PVC-Coated Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized. 3. Stainless Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized. 4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. F. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct - Requirements for All Velocities: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to-Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows: 1) Stamped or pleated for 12 inches and smaller diameters. 2) Standing seam for 14 inches and larger diameter. G. Branch Configuration: METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Control dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For duct-mounted duct silencers, include pressure drop, dynamic insertion loss, and self-generated noise data. Include breakout noise calculations for high-transmission-loss casings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Pottorff. d. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. 2. Performance: a. Leakage Rating Class III: Leakage not exceeding 40 cfm/sq. ft. against 1 inch wg differential static pressure. 3. Construction: a. Linkage out of airstream. b. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications. 4. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized steel; 16 gauge thick. 5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 6. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. a. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearing at each end of every blade. 7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 8. Locking device to hold damper blades in a fixed position without vibration. 2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Pottorff. 4. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. B. General Requirements: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel-blade configuration for two-position control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use opposed-blade configuration. 2. Factory or field assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper assembly of size required by the application. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Construction: 1. Linkage out of airstream. 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications. 3. Frames: a. Hat, U, or angle shaped. b. Frame Thickness: 18-gauge- thick stainless steel. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 4. Blades: a. Blade Material: Stainless steel. 5. Blade Jamb Seal: Flexible stainless steel, compression type. 6. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch diameter; stainless steel. 7. Blade-Linkage Hardware: Zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. Linkage mounted out of air stream. 8. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. a. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearings at each end of every blade. D. Damper Actuator - Electric: 1. Electric - 120 V ac. 2. UL 60730-2-14 and UL 2043, plenum rated. 3. Actuator Type: Two position with fail-safe spring return. a. Sufficient motor torque and spring torque to drive damper fully open and fully closed with adequate force to achieve required damper seal. b. Minimum 90-degree drive rotation. 4. Clockwise or counterclockwise drive rotation as required for application. 5. Environmental enclosure: NEMA 2. 6. Actuator to be factory mounted and provided with a single-point wiring connection. 2.3 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 3. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 4. Elgen Manufacturing. 5. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.4 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aero-Dyne Sound Control Co. 2. CL WARD & Family Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 6. Elgen Manufacturing. 7. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: 1. Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PRESSURE-RELIEF DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aire Technologies, Inc.; DMI Companies. 2. Arrow United Industries; Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; MESTEK, Inc. 4. CL WARD & Family Inc. 5. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 6. Duro Dyne Inc. 7. Elgen Manufacturing. 8. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 9. McGill AirFlow LLC. 10. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. 11. United Enertech Corp. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12. Ventfabrics, Inc. 13. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. B. General Requirements: Fabricate access doors in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and Figure 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." C. Access Doors: 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Material matching duct material, with insulation fill matching duct insulation type and thickness, and access door wall thickness matching duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Material matching door material, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 2.6 DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 5. Elgen Manufacturing. 6. Ventfabrics, Inc. 7. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, fabric materials, and accessory materials are to have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream are to comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. E. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. F. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Indoor System, Duct Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 5. Elgen Manufacturing. 6. Hardcast; Carlisle Construction Materials. 7. United Enertech Corp. 8. Ventfabrics, Inc. 9. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. B. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. C. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for longer than 36 inches. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Install duct accessories in accordance with applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Where multiple damper sections are necessary to achieve required dimensions, provide reinforcement to fully support damper assembly when fully closed at full-system-design static pressure. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated and as needed for testing and balancing. F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. G. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. H. Label access doors in accordance with Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of each access door. I. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. J. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors, and verify that size and location of access doors are adequate to perform required operation. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation, and verify that vanes do not move or rattle. END OF SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 233400 - HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fans, centrifugal - backward-inclined blades. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. a. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fans. b. Rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. c. Fans: 1) Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2) Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3) Fan construction and accessories. 4) Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5) Fan speed controllers. d. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. HVAC FANS 233400 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of unit components. 2.2 FANS, CENTRIFUGAL - BACKWARD-INCLINED BLADES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. 3. Canarm Ltd. 4. Central Blower Company. 5. Chicago Blower Corporation. 6. Cincinnati Fan. 7. COMEFRI. 8. Loren Cook Company. 9. New York Blower Company (The). 10. Northern Blower, Inc. 11. Greenheck. B. Source Limitations: Obtain backward-inclined centrifugal fans from single manufacturer. C. Description: 1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, direct-driven centrifugal fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 2. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch. D. Standards: Comply with UL 705. E. Housings: 1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Spun inlet cone with flange. 4. Outlet flange. HVAC FANS 233400 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Wheels: 1. Cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. G. Motor Enclosure: Open, dripproof. H. Accessories: 1. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with blades constructed of two plates formed around, and to, shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install fans level and plumb. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Support duct-mounted and other hanging fans directly from the building structure, using suitable hanging systems as specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Install units with adequate clearances for service and maintenance. F. Label fans in accordance with requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Where installing ducts adjacent to fans, allow space for service and maintenance. 3.3 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. HVAC FANS 233400 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE: A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 5. For direct-drive fans, verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation, adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 9. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.6 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing and after completing startup service, clean fans internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Fans and components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 233400 HVAC FANS 233400 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Diffusers - louver face. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. a. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. b. Diffuser Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIFFUSERS - LOUVER FACE A. Diffuser - Louver Face: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. METALAIRE, Inc. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries Limited. d. Titus; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. e. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 3. Material: Aluminum. AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 5. Mounting: Surface. 6. Pattern: Two-way core style. 7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF AIR DIFFUSERS A. Install diffusers level and plumb. B. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713.13 AIR DIFFUSERS 233713.13 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 233713.23 - AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grilles - linear bar. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For each type of product. a. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. b. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES A. Grilles - Linear Bar: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hart & Cooley, LLC. b. Krueger-HVAC; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Price Industries Limited. e. Titus; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. f. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face-Blade Arrangement: a. Fixed 30-degree discharge angle. 5. Frame: 1 inch wide. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb. B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713.23 AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 235533.16 - GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gas-fired unit heaters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired unit heater. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of gas-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International. 2. Modine Manufacturing Company. 3. REZNOR, a brand of Nortek Global HVAC. 4. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company. 5. Trane. GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533.16 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6. C. Gas Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site. D. Type of Venting: Indoor, separated combustion, power vented. E. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods. 1. External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion-resistant-treated surface. 2. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable, horizontal blades. F. Accessories: 1. Four-point suspension kit. 2. Power Venter: Centrifugal aluminized-steel fan, with stainless steel shaft; 120-V ac motor. G. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. H. Burner Material: Aluminized steel with stainless steel inserts. I. Propeller Unit Fan: 1. Aluminum propeller blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub, dynamically balanced, and resiliently mounted. 2. Fan-Blade Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance. J. Motors: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." K. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. 1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature. 4. Control transformer. 5. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 6. Thermostat: L. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533.16 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated gas and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. B. Substrate-Mounted Units: Provide supports connected to substrate. Secure units to supports. 1. Spring hangers are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired unit heater, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Gas Piping: Comply with Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. D. Vent Connections: Comply with Section 235123 "Gas Vents." E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections: GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533.16 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. C. Gas-fired unit heater will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. END OF SECTION 235533.16 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533.16 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compressor and condenser units, air cooled, 6 to 120 tons. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each compressor and condenser unit. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Include equipment dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. B. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Startup service reports. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete." B. Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Compressor failure. b. Condenser coil leak. 2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system in accordance with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 34. B. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS (21 TO 422 kW) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Global Corporation. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane. 4. AAON. B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. C. Refrigerant: R454b. D. Condenser Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, including subcooling circuit and backseating liquid-line service access valve. 1. Factory pressure test coils, then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen or refrigerant. E. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven. Include the following: 1. Permanently lubricated, ball-bearing motors. 2. Separate motor for each fan. 3. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies. PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Operating and safety controls include the following: 1. Automatic-reset, low-pressure cutout switches. 2. Control transformer. 3. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. 4. Timer to prevent excessive compressor cycling. G. Accessories: 1. Non-fused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical power connection. See Section 262816 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers." 2. Low-noise fans. 3. 115 V ac convenience, ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle in weatherproof enclosure. 4. Security grilles. H. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following: 1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces; treated and finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating. 2. Perimeter base rail with forklift slots and lifting holes to facilitate rigging. 3. Gasketed control panel door. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of compressor and condenser units. B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where compressor and condenser units will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install compressor and condenser units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete." C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. D. Loose Components: Install piping specialties, electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance. B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled compressor and condenser units; maintain required access to unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate is to be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. f. Verify that controls are connected and operational. B. Start unit in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's startup checklist. C. Measure and record airflow and air temperature rise over coils. D. Verify operation of condenser capacity control device. E. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections prevent vibration transmission to structure. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain compressor and condenser units. END OF SECTION 236200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 237213 - HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heat wheel air-to-air energy recovery units. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of unit components. C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2.2 HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AIRotor, LLC. HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 237213 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Airxchange Inc. 3. Desiccant Rotors International, Inc. 4. Heatex, Inc. 5. Klingenburg. 6. Novelaire Technologies. 7. SEMCO, LLC; part of FlaktGroup. 8. Greenheck. 9. Renewaire B. Source Limitations: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 2.3 HEAT WHEELS A. Casing: 1. Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum with standard factory finish. 2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section. 3. Rotor: a. Aluminum, metallic, or polymer segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes impregnated with nonmigrating, water-selective, molecular-sieve desiccant coating. B. Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed by variable-frequency controller and self-adjusting multilink belt around outside of rotor. 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." 2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 237213 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 INSTALLATION OF HEAT WHEELS A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is away from exhaust side to purge section to supply side. 1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals. 2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building side for bypass during startup. 3. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install floor-mounted units on 4-inch- high concrete base. C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Comply with requirements for ductwork specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate is to be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 237213 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Adjust seals and purge. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points. 5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. B. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect motor drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Comply with requirements for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units. END OF SECTION 237213 HEAT WHEEL AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS 237213 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 237313.13 - INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor, basic air-handling units. 2. Unit casings. 3. Fan, drive, and motor section. 4. Coil section. 5. Air filtration section. 6. Dampers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Include unit dimensions and weight. 4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 5. Fans: a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Include fan construction and accessories. d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories. 6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 7. Include filters with performance characteristics. 8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, basic, air-handling unit. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of indoor, basic air-handling units, as well as procedures and diagrams. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components. 2.2 INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Global Corporation. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane. 4. AAON. B. Unit Casings: 1. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: a. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. b. Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. c. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. Hermetically seal at each corner and around entire perimeter. d. Base Rail: 1) Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Double-Wall Construction: a. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick, with manufacturer's standard finish. b. Inside Casing Wall: G90 galvanized steel, , minimum thick. c. Casing Insulation: 1) Materials: injected polyurethane foam insulation. 2) Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum R-6.25. 3) Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in casing walls, floors, or roofs of air-handling unit. 3. Panels and Doors: INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Doors: 1) Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness as casing. 2) Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against airflow. Provide safety latch retainers on doors so that doors do not open uncontrollably. 3) Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of frame. 4. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Location: Each type of cooling coil. b. Construction: 1) Single-wall, galvanized-steel or noncorrosive polymer sheet. c. Width: Entire width of water producing device. C. Fan, Drive, and Motor Section: 1. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 2. Fans: Centrifugal, galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft. a. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment. 1) Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. b. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell. 1) Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. c. Housings, Plenum Fans: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing. Provide inlet screens for Type SWSI fans. d. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels (Plenum Fan Wheels): Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews. e. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing. 3. Drive, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive. 4. Motors: a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. D. Coil Section: 1. General Requirements for Coil Section: a. Comply with AHRI 410. b. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). c. Coils are not to act as structural component of unit. 2. Cooling Coils: a. Refrigerant Coil: 1) Tubes: Copper. 2) Fins: a) Material: Aluminum. 3) Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond. E. Air Filtration Section: 1. Panel Filters: a. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported disposable air filters with holding frames. b. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. c. Media: Interlaced glass, or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial coating. 2. Adhesive, Sustainability Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. F. Dampers: 1. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed -blade arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate is not to exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg. INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately of mixing section. G. Materials: 1. Steel: a. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel. b. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet. 2. Stainless Steel: a. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing. b. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture. 3. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M. 4. Aluminum: ASTM B209. 5. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Coat with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of withstanding a 2500 -hour salt-spray test in accordance with ASTM B117. a. Standards: 1) ASTM B117 for salt spray. 2) ASTM D2794 for minimum impact resistance of 100 in-lb. 3) ASTM B3359 for cross hatch adhesion of 5B. b. Gloss: Minimum gloss of 60 on a 60-degree meter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Replace with new insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS A. Equipment Mounting: INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance. C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters. D. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to air-handling unit, allow for service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection. 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Nameplate is to be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain minimum outdoor-air setting. 6. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 7. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils. 8. Install new, clean filters. B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.8 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling unit and air-distribution systems, and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units. END OF SECTION 237313.13 INDOOR, BASIC AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313.13 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Split-system air-conditioners. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Global Corporation. 2. Lennox. 3. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc. 4. Samsung HVAC. 5. Trane. 6. YORK; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Building Solutions North America. B. Indoor Units (5 tons or Less): 1. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components: a. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. b. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. c. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. d. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor. e. Fan Motors: 1) Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC." 2) Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. 3) Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. f. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. g. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 2. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components: a. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. b. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. C. Outdoor Units (5 tons or Less): SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components: a. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. b. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor is to have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1) Compressor Type: Scroll. 2) Refrigerant: R-454B. 3) Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110. c. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. d. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. e. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. f. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to -13 deg F. D. Accessories: 1. Thermostat: a. Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. 2. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 238216.14 - ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electric-resistance air coils. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and pressure drops for each air coil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components. 2.2 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc. ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS 238216.14 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Chromalox, Inc. 3. INDEECO. 4. Greenheck. B. Source Limitations: Obtain electric-resistance air coils from single source from single manufacturer. C. Heating Elements: 1. Open Elements: a. Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium; supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in a frame. b. Safety Screens: Install safety screens to protect operators from accidentally coming into direct connect with elements. D. Frame: Galvanized stainless or aluminized steel; minimum 0.052 inch thick for flanged mounting. Include intermediate element support brackets equally spaced at a maximum of 36 inches o.c. across electric-resistance air coil. E. Terminal Box/Control Panel: Unit mounted Remote mounted Unit or remote mounting arrangement indicated on Drawings; with disconnection means and overcurrent protection. 1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 12 enclosure complying with UL 50. 2. Full-face-hinged door. 3. Factory insulate terminal box to prevent condensation from occurring within box. 4. Install a laminated elementary wiring diagram on inside face of heater control panel door or in another protected location than visible be service personnel. Wiring diagram to match installation. F. Controls: 1. Safety Controls: Each heater is to be provided with the following factory-mounted safety controls: a. Disk-type thermal cutout switch with automatic reset. b. Primary linear thermal limit cutout switch with automatic reset. c. Secondary linear thermal limit cutout switch with local manual reset. d. Airflow Proving Switch: Pressure differential type; with pressure range selected to ensure reliable operation throughout full range of air-handling unit airflow down to minimum airflow indicated. 2. Staging Control: Magnetic contactors for switching stages of heat. 3. SCR Control: Silicone-controlled rectifier (SCR) for 100 percent stepless capacity control. G. Electrical: ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS 238216.14 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Install and wire the heater to accommodate a single field electrical connection for electrical power. 2. Disconnecting Means: Provide each heater with a main electrical power connection, door mounted and interlocking, and disconnecting means to prevent access into panel, unless switched to the off position. a. Fused disconnect switch with lockable handle. b. Minimum Short-Circuit Current Rating: As required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A. 3. Factory install and wire branch circuit fusing or circuit breakers in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Pilot Lights: Include labeled pilot lights on face of control panel for the following: a. Power on. b. Low-airflow alarm. c. High-temperature alarm. d. One for each stage on. 5. Terminations: Wire terminations and field interface terminations to labeled terminal strips. 6. Control Transformer: Size control circuit transformer for load. 7. Labeling: Label each electrical device with a laminated phenolic tag. 8. Use only NRTL-labeled electrical components. H. Nameplate: Include the following data: 1. Manufacturer name, address, telephone number, and website address. 2. Manufacturer model number. 3. Serial number. 4. Manufacturing date. 5. Coil identification (indicated on Drawings). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install coils level and plumb. ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS 238216.14 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." C. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris. 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O control designation feeding connection. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS 238216.14 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 238216.14 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE AIR COILS 238216.14 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 238239.16 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Propeller unit heaters with hot-water, steam, or electric-resistance heating coils. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. C. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Heaters: Assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 2021. PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 238239.16 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 HOUSINGS A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heaters before shipping. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. 2.3 COILS A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 60-Hz hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in steel or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends are to be enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature is not to exceed 550 deg F at any point during normal operation. 1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection of heaters. 2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless steel or corrosion-resistant material. 2.4 FAN AND MOTOR A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. 2.5 CONTROLS A. Control Devices: 1. Unit -mounted thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation. PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 238239.16 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters. END OF SECTION 238239.16 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 238239.16 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1 SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and all Division 26. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest adopted IBC Codes, NFPA Codes, Elevator Codes, ANSI, UL, ADAAG, and applicable Local and State Codes. Also comply with Utility Company regulations, industry standards and Construction Documents. B. Work shall be done by only trained, licensed and experienced workmen familiar with the requirements. C. All microprocessor based equipment and software with equipment shall utilize 4 digits for the year part of all dates. A two digit date shall be an option for only for printing at Government's preference. 1.4 EXTENT OF DRAWINGS / SPECIFICATION A. Drawings indicate intent and general layout of electrical systems for the Project. Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not indicate all fittings and accessories which may be required. Provide such fittings and accessories as required to form a complete and operating system in general conformance with Specifications and Drawings. 1.5 PRIOR APPROVALS A. All products submitted for prior approval shall be received by the Contracting Officer 10 business days prior to Bid. Supply technical data, photometrics and dimensional ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2 Drawings showing that substitutes are equal to product specified. Faxed prior approvals will not be accepted. 1.6 DISCREPANCIES A. Prior to submitting Bid, Contractor shall refer any apparent discrepancies or omissions to Contracting Officer for clarification. The more stringent provisions shall take precedence where codes, Specifications and Drawings differ with one another. The Contractor shall Bid the more expensive requirement, unless discrepancy is addressed by Addendum prior to Bid. 1.7 TEMPORARY LIGHTING/POWER A. Provide temporary electrical power and lighting for all trades that require service during the course of this Project. Provide temporary service and distribution as required. Comply with the NEC and OSHA requirements. Energy Costs by General Contractor. 1.8 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Submit for final and official approval through the General Contractor. B. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number LNHS- 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Contracting Officer. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Government, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Contracting Officer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 3 h. Specification Section number and title. i. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. j. Indication of full or partial submittal. k. Transmittal number. l. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m. Remarks. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for electrical installations. C. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections. F. Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Actual location of all electrical service gear/feeders, panel/motor/special equipment feeders, all major underground or underslab conduits, all conduit stubs for future use, any change in branch circuitry from Drawings, key junction boxes and pull boxes not indicated on Drawings, any control locations or indicator lights not shown on Drawings. 2. Addendum items, Change Order items and all changes made to Drawings from Bidding phase through to Project completion. 3. Actual equipment and materials installed. Where manufacturer and catalog number are indicated on Drawings, generally or in fixture or equipment schedules, change to reflect actual products installed. 4. Change service panel and branch panel breaker locations and schedules to reflect actual installed conditions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 4 1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01. Assemble O & M Manuals as follows: 1. Compile Operating and Maintenance Manuals for the electrical systems and equipment. The manuals shall be provided to the Contracting Officer for approval complete and at one time, prior to requesting final payment. Partial or separate data will be returned for completion. 2. Manuals shall be assembled in three-ring binders. Binders shall be 3 inches thick or less and have slip sleeve jacket on binder side and front. More than one binder shall be used for each set of data if required to prevent overfilling of one binder. All information shall be arranged in Sections and each Section shall have a blank buff colored, heavy paper divider with a protruding tab clearly labeled. Sections shall be arranged in the same order that the equipment is listed in the Specification and each Specification Section shall have a separate tab. Shop Drawings which are larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch shall be individually folded so they are 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch or less and inserted behind the appropriate tab. 3. Tabs shall be labeled and arranged as follows: a. Index: Furnish under the first tab an index of Sections listing name of Section and Specification numbers. b. Equipment Manufacturers: Furnish under the second tab a complete typed list of equipment suppliers and manufacturers representative including type of equipment, name, address and phone number. The company listed here should be the one which could furnish replacement parts and offer technical information about the equipment. c. Product Literature: Each tab, starting with the third shall contain the name of a Specification Section. Behind each tab shall be the previously submitted and approved Shop Drawing, factory published operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists. Also include description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 4. Upon completion and approval of the booklets, one copy shall be given to the Contracting Officer, and two to the Government. Using the booklet, the Electrical Contractor shall explain in detail and instruct the Government's operating personnel in the correct operation and maintenance of the equipment. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 5 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. END OF SECTION 260500 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less. 3. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 4. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. PV: Photovoltaic. B. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. C. VFC: Variable-frequency controller. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Okonite Company (The). 8. Service Wire Co. 9. Southwire Company. 10. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.2 ALUMINUM BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn aluminum current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Okonite Company (The). 8. Southwire Company. 9. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Aluminum, complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Bare Conductor. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Okonite Company (The). 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Southwire Company. 9. WESCO. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 D. Circuits: 1. Single circuit and multi-circuit with color-coded conductors. 2. Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits: Comply with UL 1424. E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. Aluminum, complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801. F. Ground Conductor: Insulated. G. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. H. Armor: Steel or Aluminum, interlocked. I. Jacket: PVC applied over armor. 2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. ILSCO. 7. NSi Industries LLC. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 9. Service Wire Co. 10. TE Connectivity Ltd. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper or Aluminum. 2. Type: One or Two hole with standard barrels. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 3. Termination: Compression. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger. C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW- 2, single conductors in raceway. B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW- 2, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW- 2, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6 D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 7 C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. D. Comply with requirements in Section 284621.11 "Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor and identify as spare conductor. 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. END OF SECTION 260519 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Foundation steel electrodes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 a. Plans showing as-built, dimensioned locations of system described in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1) Ground rods. 2) Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. b. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B. 1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by NETA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Advanced Lightning Technology, Ltd. 2. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 3. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 4. ERICO International Corporation. 5. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 6. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 7. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 8. ILSCO. 9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 10. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 11. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4-inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16-inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16-inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 6 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals. D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, aluminum or copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long- stud capable of single and double conductor connections. J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw. K. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp or copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. L. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal two-piece clamp. M. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. N. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts. a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Die-cast zinc alloy. b. Listed for direct burial. 2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector or copper ground connector rated for direct burial. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4-inch by 10 feet. B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches long. 2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material. C. Ground Plates: 1/4-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. F. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6 C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one- rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 7 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. G. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation. 2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete. H. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 8 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Contracting Officer and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S0.00. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4-inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S0.00. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. EMT: Electrical metallic conduit. E. ENT: Electrical non-metallic conduit. F. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. G. LFMC: Liquid flexible metal conduit. H. LFNC: Liquid flexible non-metallic conduit. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 3. ARC: Not allowed. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: 1. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 5. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. 6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. D. Comply with TIA-569-D for communication systems applications. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Fiberglass: a. Comply with NEMA TC 14. b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways. c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways. 3. ENT: Not allowed. 4. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC with EPC-80 PVC fittings, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 5. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 6. Rigid HDPE: Not allowed. 7. Continuous HDPE: Not allowed. 8. Coilable HDPE: Not allowed. 9. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14. B. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 2. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 3. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, type as indicated on Construction Documents, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Tele-Power Poles: 1. See Construction Documents for the specified product. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices, mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele- power pole as required for complete system. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. Comply with TIA-569-D for communications systems. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. See Construction Drawings for specified product. 2. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable (only where called out on Construction Documents). 1. See Construction Drawings for specified product. 2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, NEMA, enclosure type as indicated on Construction Documents with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, NEMA enclosure type as indicated on Construction Documents, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or "COMMUNICATIONS" or as indicated for each service type. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards. 2.8 COMMUNICATION CABLING HOOKS A. Description: Pre-fabricated sheet metal cable supports for communications cabling. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D. 3. Steel J type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC with Type EPC-80-PVC fittings. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings are not allowed. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. Comply with NECA 105, NECA III and TIA-569-D for communication systems. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any electrical power or lighting conduit. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Contracting Officer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9 Q. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. R. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. S. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. T. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. U. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. V. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum of 50- feet. 2. 1-inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum of 75-feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. W. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. X. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. Y. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Z. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. AA. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. BB. Communications Cabling Hooks: 1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity limits. 2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or support rods. 3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and communications equipment. 4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c. 5. Provide a hook at each change in direction. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 11 CC. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. DD. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. EE. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. FF. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. GG. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. HH. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. II. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. JJ. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. KK. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 12 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct- buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade. E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 13 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 9. Receptacle labels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. Utilize same label mediums as identified in Part 2.1 above. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Junction Boxes within Buildings: Identify each exposed or accessible junction and pull box with spray paint and with permanent marker indicating voltage and contained circuits. Example: "480 V, H1-26." Apply spray paint to identify the system type as follows: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Emergency: Orange. 3. Communications: Green. 4. Mechanical/Electrical Supervisory System: Blue. 5. Security Systems: Yellow. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 a. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. b. Apply Colors as Follows: 208Y / 120 Volts Phase Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral Green Ground D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source. E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6 I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Power-generating units. n. Monitoring and control equipment. K. Receptacle Circuit Labels: Identify all 120 VAC and 208 VAC power receptacle cover plates with serving panel and circuit number designation. Utilize clear self-adhesive label with black letters. Example: "L3 - 25." END OF SECTION 260553 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 1 SECTION 260573.13 - SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain items shall remain functional throughout the construction period. B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA. C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies. E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion of the circuit from the system. G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For computer software program to be used for studies. 2. Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form. a. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. b. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1) Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Contracting Officer for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. 2) Revised one-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. For overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 2. The following are from the Short-Circuit Study Report: a. Final one-line diagram. b. Final Short-Circuit Study Report. c. Short-circuit study data files. d. Power system data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis. B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. C. Manual calculations are unacceptable. 1. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: Computer program shall be designed to perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add- on module designed to perform short-circuit studies. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 3 D. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. E. Short-Circuit Study Certification: Short-Circuit Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. F. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: 1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work. 2. A member company of NETA. 3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. Power Analytics, Corporation. 6. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551. 1. Analytical features of power systems analysis software program shall have capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current- characteristic curves as part of its output. 2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS A. Executive summary of study findings. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results. C. One-line diagram of modeled power system, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 4 2. Conductor types, sizes, and 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations and ratings. 6. Derating factors and environmental conditions. 7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study. D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements or revisions in a written document, separate from one-line diagram. E. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to available short-circuit currents. Verify that equipment withstand ratings exceed available short-circuit current at equipment installation locations. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: 1. One-line diagram of system being studied. 2. Power sources available. 3. Manufacturer, model, and interrupting rating of protective devices. 4. Conductors. 5. Transformer data. G. Short-Circuit Study Output Reports: 1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance. 2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 5 c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents: 1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7. 3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to Contracting Officer's attention. 2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with requirements in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for recording circuit protective device characteristics. Record data on a Record Document copy of one-line diagram. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDIES 260573.13 - 6 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 8. Conductor sizes, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 9. Derating factors. 3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399. B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551. C. Base study on device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer. D. Extent of electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings. E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to system overcurrent protective devices as follows: 1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240 V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated less than 125 kVA. F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system- switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. G. Include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, motors, and generators and apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. Also account for the fault-current dc decrement to address asymmetrical requirements of interrupting equipment. H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and a single line-to-ground fault at each equipment indicated on one-line diagram. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. I. Include in the report identification of any protective device applied outside its capacity. END OF SECTION 260573.13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 1 SECTION 260573.19 - ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA. C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies. E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system. G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form: 1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. 3. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Contracting Officer for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide maintenance procedures in equipment manuals according to requirements in NFPA 70E. 2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Government's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis. B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. C. Manual calculations are unacceptable. D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc-flash analysis or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform arc-flash analysis. E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the arc-flash study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 3 study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. F. Arc-Flash Study Certification: Arc-Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: 1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work. 2. A member company of NETA. 3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. Power Analytics, Corporation. 6. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. 2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary of study findings. B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results. C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and environmental conditions. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 4 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings. D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article. E. Short-Circuit Study Output Data: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit Studies." F. Arc-Flash Study Output Reports: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each equipment location included in the report: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis. G. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Restricted approach boundary. 6. Limited approach boundary. 7. Working distance. 8. Incident energy. 9. Hazard risk category. 10. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction. H. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout. 2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self-adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each work location included in the analysis. B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 5 1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Protection boundaries. a. Arc-flash boundary. b. Restricted approach boundary. c. Limited approach boundary. 4. Required minimum arc rating of PPE in Cal/cm squared. 5. Available incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date. C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study. 3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study. B. Preparatory Studies: Perform the Short-Circuit study prior to starting the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis. 1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output Reports" Paragraph in "Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573.13 "Short-Circuit Studies." C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size. 1. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions. 2. Calculate arc-flash energy at 85 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to IEEE 1584 recommendations. 3. Calculate arc-flash energy at 38 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to NFPA 70E recommendations. 4. Calculate arc-flash energy with the utility contribution at a minimum and assume no motor contribution. D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 6 E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except equipment rated 240 V ac or less fed from transformers less than 125 kVA. F. Calculate the limited, restricted, and prohibited approach boundaries for each location. G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five cycles. 2. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles). H. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location. I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2. 3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram on Drawings and under "Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call discrepancies to Contracting Officer's attention. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 7 overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance or available short circuit current at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground). 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 10. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 11. Low-voltage conductor sizes, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 3.4 LABELING A. Apply one arc-flash label on the front cover of each section of the equipment for each equipment included in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each location. B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it: 1. Low voltage transformers. 2. Panelboard and safety switch over 250 V. 3. Applicable panelboard and safety switch under 250 V. C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to arc-flash hazard during their work. 1. Indicate arc-flash energy. 2. Indicate protection level required. 3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS A. Install arc-flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System Analysis Specialist. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 260573.19 - 8 A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Government's maintenance personnel in potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of arc-flash warning labels. END OF SECTION 260573.19 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1 SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Time switches. 2. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching and dimming controls. 3. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 4. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors. 5. Digital timer light switches. 6. Wall-box Dimmers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors including the following: 1. Provide full size floor plan drawings with each lighting control device, how the devices interconnect with wiring and how the devices function. 2. Mounting hardware for each installation types. 3. For each occupancy type, indicate technology types, special features, amperage data, sensor coverage, ideal sensor placement, adjustability parameters and default sensor settings. 4. For each Power pack relay type, indicate the contact amperage and voltage ratings and documentation on how many occupancy sensors can be supported. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. Provide names, versions, and website addresses for locations of installed software. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of lighting control software. b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices. 2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 3. Intermatic, Inc. 4. Invensys Controls. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. TE Connectivity Ltd. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3 B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application. 2. Contact Configuration: SPST. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac. 4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program on selected channels. 6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock. 2.2 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. TE Connectivity Ltd. 9. Watt Stopper. B. System Description: System operates indoor lighting. C. Sequence of Operation: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed. 1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions: a. When no daylight is present (target level). b. When significant daylight is present. D. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with integrated power pack, that detects changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. E. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power pack, that detects changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4 F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered by the power pack. 4. Sensor Output: Digital signal compatible with power pack. 5. Zone: Single. 6. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. a. LED status lights to indicate load status. b. Plenum rated. 7. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 20 to 60 fc (215 to 640 lux), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 8. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling. 9. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent above the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set points. 10. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings check. 11. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct. 12. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles. 2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Intermatic, Inc. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC. 9. Philips Lighting Controls. 10. RAB Lighting. 11. Sensor Switch, Inc. 12. Square D. 13. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand. B. General Requirements for Sensors: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5 1. Wall-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors 3. Passive infrared, Ultrasonic and Dual technology. 4. Integrated power pack. 5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Operation: a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. c. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied, or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 7. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. 8. Power: Line voltage. 9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277- V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24- V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 10. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights off when selected lighting level is present. C. PIR Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. 2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 6 4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48 inches above finished floor. D. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48 inches above finished floor. 2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Intermatic, Inc. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC. 9. Philips Lighting Controls. 10. RAB Lighting. 11. Sensor Switch, Inc. 12. Square D. 13. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand. B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24. 2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 7 3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg 4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA ballast or LED load at 120 V. 2.5 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Sensor Switch, Inc. 3. Intermatic, Inc. 4. Invensys Controls. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. TE Connectivity Ltd. B. Description: Combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting control unit. Switchbox-mounted, backlit LCD display, with selectable time interval in 10 minute increments. 1. Rated 960 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 amps at 277-V ac for ballast or LED, and 1/4 horsepower at 120-V ac. 2. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 3. Voltage: 120 V. 4. Color: White. 5. Faceplate: Color matched to switch. 2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Intermatic, Inc. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC. 9. Philips Lighting Controls. 10. RAB Lighting. 11. Sensor Switch, Inc. 12. Square D. 13. WattStopper; a Legrand® Group brand. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 8 B. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. C. Control: Continuously adjustable; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. D. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies. C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 9 3.3 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory- installed vibration isolators. 3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2-inch. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 10 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Government's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Government's operations. 3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years. B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Government to schedule and access the system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. END OF SECTION 260923 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1 SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. General lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Lighting control panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2 c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S001. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on the Construction Documents. 1. NEMA rating as indicated on Construction Documents Panel Schedules and Risers. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Standard Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within door hinged trim cover. 4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. 6. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. C. Phase and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. 3. Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated minimum 100 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 4. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. E. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches. F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed. B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker with minimum of adjustable magnetic trip, or as indicated on the Construction Documents. C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. D. Breakers with 1200 amp frame or larger shall be equipment with an Arc Flash Energy- reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator. 2.5 GENERAL LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Coordinate paragraph below with Drawings. B. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed. 2.6 LOAD CENTERS A. Not allowed, unless specifically specified elsewhere in the Specifications or Construction Documents. 2.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Breaker type shall be thermal magnetic, unless indicated otherwise in Construction Documents Schedules or as required by manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 50 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Standard Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Special Features and Accessories: (Only where indicated in Construction Documents Schedules or notes.) a. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity, 5-mA trip for breakers serving GFCI receptacle circuits. b. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. B. Breakers with 1200 amp frame or larger shall be equipment with an Arc Flash Energy- reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator. 2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Furnish portable test set to test functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from panelboard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. When applicable, comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated- plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 262416 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard-grade receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. USB receptacles. 3. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 4. Twist-locking receptacles. 5. Pendant cord-connector devices. 6. Cord and plug sets. 7. Toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 8. Wall plates. 9. Floor service fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter. B. BAS: Building automation system. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. G. SPD: Surge protective device. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. RoHS compliant. D. Comply with NEMA WD 1. E. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with requirements in this Section. F. Devices for Government-Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. G. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Essential Electrical System: Red. H. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color. I. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 STANDARD-GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article. C. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 5. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 2.3 USB RECEPTACLES A. USB Charging Receptacles: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-plated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum). 4. Standards: Comply with UL 1310 and USB 3.0 devices. 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Non-feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 2. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. 3. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 4. Type: Non-feed through. 5. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 6. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article. 2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 120 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. B. Twist-Lock, Single Receptacles, 250 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration L6-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, heavy-duty grade. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6 b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R. C. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. D. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. E. Standards: Comply with FS W-C-596. 2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.8 TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. B. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7 b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. C. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Eaton (Arrow Hart). b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896. 2.9 WALL PLATES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring devices. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Flush-Type Floor Service Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Wiremold b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Steel City. 2. Description: Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used, with cover flush with finished floor. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 8 3. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 4. Service Plate and Cover: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish. 5. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted pair cable, complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." B. Above-Floor Service Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Wiremold b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Steel City. 2. Description: Type: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. 3. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. 4. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish. 5. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted pair cable, complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 2.11 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. D. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish. E. Multioutlet Harness: 1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 9 2. Receptacle Spacing: As noted on Construction Drawings. 3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, as noted on Construction Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 10 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of receptacles is not required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Tests for Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 11 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 5. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GD: General duty. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. HD: Heavy duty. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following: 1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Manufacturer's field service report. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 D. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers from one manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D. 2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. B. Nonfusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type GD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open. 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Breaker type shall be thermal magnetic, unless indicated otherwise in Construction Documents Schedules or as required by manufacturer. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 50 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Standard Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Special Features and Accessories: (Only where indicated in Construction Documents Schedules or notes.) a. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity, 5-mA trip for breakers serving GFCI receptacle circuits. b. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. c. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Flush or surface mounted and NEMA rating as indicated on Construction Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 3.2 CONCRETE BASES A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer. B. Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Construction Drawings, Sheet S0.00. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers. B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6 3.7 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 262816 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1 SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 2 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 6. Include compliance of LED Luminaries with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. D. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. E. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. C. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4. D. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1. E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61. F. Compliance with ANSI C78.377 "Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products". G. Compliance with UL 8750 "Safety Standard for Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products". H. Compliance with LM-79 "Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products" and LM-80 "Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources". I. CRI of minimum 80 or as specified on the construction documents. J. Minimum allowable efficacy of 60 lumens per watt for downlights, 90 lumens per watt minimum for other LED fixtures or as specified on the construction documents schedules. K. Rated lamp life of 50,000 minimum hours or as specified on the construction documents schedules, whichever is more stringent. L. Dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 4 M. RoHS or equivalent compliance. N. Fully serviceable and upgradeable LED light engine. O. LED Driver/Power Supply: 1. Integral high efficiency driver with power supply of 120V-277V input at 60HZ. 2. Power factor greater than 0.9 at full load. 3. THD at < 20 percent. 4. Drive current at 1000ma maximum. 5. Class 2 power supply. 6. Dimming utilizing 0-10V dimming control. 7. The Driver shall provide continuous flicker free dimming from 100 percent to 1 percent. 8. Capable of being serviced from above or through the aperture. 9. Protected from overload and short circuit conditions. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Glass: Annealed glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 5 B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. C. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. D. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate support recommended by fixture manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Contracting Officer, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secured to outlet box. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 6 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. G. Surface mounted lighting fixtures shall be attached to the ceiling system with positive clamping devices that completely surround the supporting members. Safety wires shall be attached between the clamping device and the adjacent ceiling hanger or to the structure above. In no case shall the fixture exceed the design carrying capacity of the supporting members. H. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. All lighting fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system by mechanical means as specified in the National Electrical Code, Section 410- 36(b) unless independently supported. The attachment device, a minimum of two per fixture, shall have a capacity of 100 percent of the lighting fixture weight acting in any direction. 2. Pendant-hung lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above using No. 9-gauge wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support. 3. For seismic design classifications of C, D, E and F and all Hospital work, lighting fixtures weighing between 10 and 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements outlined above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the fixture housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack. 4. Lighting fixtures weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers. J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 7 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 265119 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 1 SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation. D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support. 1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 2 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 3 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components. b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and color retention, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Led Modules or Driver failure. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924. C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires. E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires. F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 4 G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1. H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate LED module(s) continuously upon loss of normal power (see Construction Document schedules for lumen output). Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire driver. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp continuously. 4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 7. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. I. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire. 1. Emergency Connection: Emergency Connection: Operate LED module(s) continuously upon loss of normal power (see Construction Document Schedules for lumen output). Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire driver. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 3. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp in a remote luminaire continuously. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 6. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 5 distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less. 7. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 8. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 9. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 10. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self- contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory- installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 6 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: 1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. 2.5 METAL FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting luminaires will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 7 C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. F. Surface mounted lighting fixtures shall be attached to the ceiling system with positive clamping devices that completely surround the supporting members. Safety wires shall be attached between the clamping device and the adjacent ceiling hanger or to the structure above. In no case shall the fixture exceed the design carrying capacity of the supporting members. G. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. All lighting fixtures shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system by mechanical means as specified in the National Electrical Code, Section 410- 16(c) unless independently supported. The attachment device, a minimum of two per fixture, shall have a capacity of 100 percent of the lighting fixture weight acting in any direction. 2. Pendant-hung lighting fixtures shall be supported directly from the structure above using No. 9-gauge wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support. 3. For seismic design classifications of C, D, E and F and all Hospital work, lighting fixtures weighing between 10 and 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements outlined above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the fixture housing to the structure above. These wires may be slack. 4. Lighting fixtures weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers. H. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 8 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service: 1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to conduct short-duration test. 2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test. END OF SECTION 265219 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 1 SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backbone pathways. 2. Backbone cabling. 3. Backbone cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Backbone cabling identification products. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceways." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. E. LAN: Local area network. F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 2 cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection. B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Government. 2. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Experienced installers, certified by the manufacturer, with at least 5 years experience installing backbone copper and fiber cabling in accordance with EIA/TIA standards. B. Field Inspector: Currently registered by the manufacturer to perform the on-site inspection. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. E. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 3 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Government's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. B. See Construction Documents. 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Description: 100-ohm, 25-pair UTP, covered with a black thermoplastic jacket and overall metallic shield. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Category 3. a. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ICC. 2. Ortronics. 3. Siemon. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 66-style IDC with amphenol connectors. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 4 D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2.4 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the lighting protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways as noted on the Drawings. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways. D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 5 E. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 6 inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. F. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 66-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 6 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. E. Open-Cable Installation (Equipment Rooms Only): 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. F. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. G. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Light Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 7 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.6 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion about TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. D. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software. E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 8 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following: 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- 568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 9 a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA- 568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. The manufacturer of passive telecommunications equipment used in a manner not associated with the Systems Warranty must have a lifetime Component Warranty on all its product. The Products Warranty covers the components against defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use. END OF SECTION 271300 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1 SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal pathways, except Backbone. 2. Horizontal UTP cabling. 3. Horizontal cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Horizontal telecommunications outlet/connectors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 2. Division 27 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling between communications rooms and between buildings. 3. Division 27 Section “Cable Trays for Communication Systems” 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. F. LAN: Local area network. G. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 2 I. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component specified. B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of each individual component. Show equipment assemblies, method of field assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections. 1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as specified in Part 3, in software and format selected by Government. C. Product Certificates: For each type of cable, connector, and terminal equipment, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: 1. For Installer. 2. For Category 6 Tester: Provide documentation indicating the following: a. Tester Manufacturer and model number and documentation indicating the tester performs to comply with the specifications required in sections "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL." b. Calibration certificate indicating the certification of calibration was performed not less than 1 year of the start of the Project. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For voice and data communication cabling to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installers, certified by the manufacturer, with at least 5 years experience installing and testing Category 5 cabling systems and Category 6 cabling systems for 1 year in accordance with EIA/TIA 568 Standards. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all Category 6 products through one source from a single manufacturer. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 3 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. All telecommunications connecting hardware and cable must be made by an ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Government's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices. C. Cable Trays: See Division 27 Section "Cable Trays." ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 4 D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2.2 UTP CABLE A. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair 23-AWG UTP, Category 6A, outside diameter between 0.250 – 0.285 covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum: Type CMP. 2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Siemon. 2. ICC. 3. Ortronics. 4. Leviton. 5. Panduit 6. Commscope B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 6. D. Connecting Blocks for Telephone Patch Panels: 110-style Category 6 with amphenol connectors. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. E. Patch Panel: (Equal to Panduit DP6A Series.) 48 Port modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with 110 style connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 5 F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. B. Workstation Outlets: Angled RJ-45-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate; dual jacks are not allowed. See Construction Documents symbol subscripts for number of jacks. 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts. 4. Provide minimum of two blanks per workstation faceplate. 2.5 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables utilizing J-hooks and cable trays above lay-in ceilings; install utilizing minimum 1 inch wide J-hooks supported to structure every 48 inches or less. Cables can be run unenclosed within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway in walls and unfinished spaces shall utilize EMT conduit. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 6 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: See Division 27 Section "Cable Trays." B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways. E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 3. Extend conduits 2 inches above finished floor. 4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 7 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2-inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 8 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Light Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and TIA/EIA-606. B. System: Use a unique, three-syllable, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 9 designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement. 1. First syllable identifies and locates equipment room or wiring closet where cables originate. 2. Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect- or patch-panel field in which cables terminate B, C, etc…). 3. Third syllable designates the port position (01-48) of the patch panel position occupied by cable pairs. C. Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes. D. Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit. E. Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. F. Cables, General: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. 2. Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bi-directional, Category 6 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA-TSB67, "Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems." Link performance for UTP cables must meet minimum criteria of TIA/EIA-568-A. a. All balanced twisted-pair field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate shall be provided for review prior to the start of testing. b. Autotest settings provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall be set to the default parameters. c. Test settings selected from options provided in the field testers shall be compatible with the installed cable under test. 3. All Category 6 field-testing shall be performed with an approved level III balanced twisted-pair field test device. 4. All installed Category 6 channels shall perform equal to or better than the minimum requirements as specified by the table below: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 10 Parameter Performance @ 100MHz Performance @ 200MHz Performance @ 250MHz Insertion Loss 20.3 dB 29.7 dB 33.7 dB NEXT Loss 42.1 dB 37.5 dB 36.1 dB PS NEXT Loss 40.6 dB 36.1 dB 34.6 dB ACR 21.8 dB 7.8 dB 2.4 dB PS ACR 20.3 dB 6.4 dB 0.9 dB ELFEXT 23.9 dB 17.9 dB 15.9 dB PS ELFEXT 20.9 dB 14.9 dB 12.9 dB Return Loss 14.0 dB 11.0 dB 10.0 dB Propagation Delay 528 ns 527 ns 526 ns Delay Skew 40 ns 40 40 ns 5. Category 6 balanced twisted-pair horizontal and backbone cables shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Test parameters include wire map, length, NEXT loss (pair-to-pair), NEXT loss (power sum), ELFEXT loss (pair-to-pair), ELFEXT loss (power sum), return loss, insertion loss, propagation delay, and delay skew. 6. Backbone Phone cable: All balanced twisted-pair backbone cables exceeding 90 m (295 ft) or 100 m (328 ft) shall be 100 percent tested for continuity if applications assurance is not required. 7. Fiberoptic Testing: a. Fiber horizontal cables shall be 100 percent tested for insertion loss and length. b. Insertion loss shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm for 50/125mm multimode cabling in at least one direction using the Method B (1-jumper) test procedure as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.8 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. The manufacturer of passive telecommunications equipment used in a manner not associated with the Systems Warranty must have a lifetime Component Warranty on all its product. The Products Warranty covers the components against defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use. END OF SECTION 271500 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 1 SECTION 283100 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Referenced Codes and Standards: 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2018 Edition. 2. International Fire Code (IFC) 2018 Edition. 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2018 Edition. 4. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2016 Edition. 5. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, 2017 Edition 6. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, 2016 Edition. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. New Addressable fire-alarm system. 2. Fire-alarm control unit (FACU). 3. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) remote power supplies. 4. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 5. System smoke detectors. 6. Duct smoke detectors. 7. Heat detectors. 8. Addressable fire alarm modules. 9. Fire alarm cabling and conductors. 10. Fire-alarm notification appliances. 11. Fire-alarm remote annunciators. 12. Fire-alarm addressable interface devices. 13. Digital alarm communicator transmitters (DACTs). 14. Cellular, dual-path communicators. 15. System record documents storage cabinet/box. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for magnetic door holders that release in response to fire-alarm outputs. 2. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" or Section 260523 "Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 2 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CD: Candela B. DACT: Digital alarm communicator transmitter. C. ECS: Emergency Communications System. D. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. E. EVACS: Emergency Voice Alarm Communications System. F. FACU: Fire Alarm Control Unit. G. LED: Light-Emitting Diode. H. LOC: Local Operator’s Console. I. MNS: Mass Notification System. J. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. K. NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit. L. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory M. PC: Personal computer. 1.4 VOLTAGE CLASSES: A. For specified circuits and equipment, voltage classes are defined as follows: 1. Control Voltage: Listed and labeled for use in remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits supplied by a Class 2 or Class 3 power supply having rated output not greater than 150 V and 5 A, allowing use of alternate wiring methods complying with NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Low Voltage: Listed and labeled for use in circuits supplied by a Class 1 or other power supply having rated output not greater than 1000 V, requiring use of wiring methods complying with NFPA 70, Article 300, Part I. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Approved Permit Submittal: Submittals must be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. 1. Contractor shall submit to 3rd Party Reviewer if required by the AHJ. Contractor shall be responsible for all associated fees. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 3 B. Submittals shall be complete and include all information required in parts C, D and E below. Partial submittals will not be reviewed and automatically stamped “REVISE & RESUBMIT” and returned to the contractor. C. Submittals provided in digital (.pdf) format will be acceptable. 1. Digital file names shall include project name and revision number and in the following format: [PROJECTNAME]_283100 FIRE ALARM_R[0].pdf D. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. 3. Model-specific information shall be highlighted for clarity on documents encompassing multiple types of devices. E. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in "Documentation" section of NFPA 72 for Shop Drawings (Installation Documentation). 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details, including details of attachments to other Work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Annunciator panel details as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Detail assembly and support requirements. 6. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 7. Include wire routing of all notification-appliance circuits and the locations of all end-of-line devices. 8. Include stand-by battery-size calculations and battery sizes being provided for each power supply. 9. Include system input/output operational matrix specific to the submitted design. 10. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 11. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 12. Provide control wiring diagrams for fire-alarm interface to HVAC; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to- point wiring diagrams. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 4 14. Include system one-line riser diagram identifying cable/conductor types, connections to devices, general arrangement of system equipment, addressable device identifiers and rated light output of notification devices. 15. Include list of initiating devices indicating device type (i.e. Detector, pull station or input/output module) and program identification/description. 16. Plans shall be developed in AutoCAD® or compatible software. 17. Plan title block and all informational notes shall be specific to the project and the contractor performing the work. a. Duplication of signed and sealed engineering (Cushing Terrell) plans for the use of shop drawings is prohibited and will be immediately rejected. F. Re-submittals 1. Submittals returned and requiring revisions or corrections shall be re-submitted in their entirety with all revisions applied and highlighted. Partial submittal documents will be rejected. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Provide certificates (copies of): 1. Valid contractor’s license as required by the state project is located in. 2. Valid manufacturer’s certification for system designer and installing personnel for equipment supplied. 3. Valid NICET Certification (Fire Alarm Systems Level II minimum) for system designer and installing technicians. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Fire-Watch plans and documented activity (if required). C. Sample Warranty: Submittal must include line item pricing for replacement parts and labor which will be valid for a minimum of 12 months following system acceptance. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Comply with "Records" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Provide "Fire-Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" in accordance with "Completion Documents" Article in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 5 c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment. Each conductor must be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points. d. Riser diagram. e. List of device addresses, descriptions and device type as programmed in the system. f. Record copy of site-specific software. g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" in accordance with "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following: 1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals. h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. i. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at FACU and each annunciator unit. B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On USB media. 3. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Extra Stock Material: Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 2. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 3. Keys and Tools: Three extra sets for access to locked or tamper-proofed components. 4. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 5. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Two of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 6 1. Personnel must be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 2. Installation must be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II (minimum) technician. 3. Obtain certification by NRTL in accordance with NFPA 72. 4. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Designer Qualifications (one of the following): 1. System designer shall be certified by the manufacturer of the product being supplied. 2. System designer shall be NICET certified in Fire Alarm Systems Level III minimum. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail because of defects in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NEW ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM A. Acceptable system manufacturers: 1. Silent Knight by Honeywell 2. Fire-Lite by Honeywell 3. Gamewell/FCI by Honeywell 4. Potter Electric Signal Company 5. Notifier by Honeywell 6. Edwards (EST) a UTC Fire & Security Company B. Description: 1. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn-and-strobe notification for evacuation. C. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 7 a. Fire-Alarm Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled by a NRTL in accordance with NFPA 70 for use with selected fire-alarm system and marked for intended location and application. 2. General Characteristics: a. Automatic sensitivity control of smoke detectors. b. Fire-alarm signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices: 1) Manual stations. 2) Heat detectors. 3) Smoke detectors. 4) Automatic sprinkler system water flow. c. Fire-alarm signal must initiate the following actions: (Reference operational matrix on plans) 1) Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2) Identify alarm and specific initiating device at FACU and remote annunciators. 3) Transmit alarm signal to remote alarm receiving station. 4) Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5) Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6) Switch HVAC equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 7) Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 8) Record events in system memory. d. Supervisory signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1) Valve supervisory switch in abnormal condition. 2) Zones or individual devices have been disabled. 3) FACU has lost communication with network. 4) Duct smoke detection associated with HVAC system is activated. e. Supervisory signal must initiate the following actions: (Reference operational matrix on plans) 1) Identify specific device initiating event at FACU and remote annunciators. 2) After time delay of 200 seconds, transmit trouble or supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station. 3) Transmit system status to remote alarm receiving station. 4) Display system status on remote annunciator. f. System trouble signal initiation must be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1) Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in any fire alarm circuit. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 8 2) Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and signaling devices. 3) Loss of communication with addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4) Loss of primary power at FACU. 5) Ground or single break in internal circuits of FACU. 6) Abnormal ac voltage at FACU. 7) Break in standby battery circuitry. 8) Failure of battery charging unit. 9) Abnormal position of switch at FACU or annunciator. g. Device Guards for physical protection (as indicated on plans): 1) Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for manual station, smoke detector, notification appliance, or other device requiring protection. a) Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer. b) Finish: Paint of color to match protected device. h. Device Guards for deterring vandalism (as indicated on plans): 1) Description: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at top to permit lifting for access to initiate alarm. Lifting cover actuates integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false- alarm operation. i. Document Storage Box: 1) Description: Enclosure to accommodate standard 8-1/2-by-11 inch (216-by-279 mm) manuals and loose document records. Legend sheet will be permanently attached to door for system required documentation, key contacts, and system information. Provide two key ring holders with location to mount standard business cards for key contact personnel. 2) Material and Finish: 18-gauge cold-rolled steel; four mounting holes. 3) Color: Red powder-coat epoxy finish. 4) Labeling: Permanently screened with 1 inch (25 mm) high, white lettering "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM RECORD DOCUMENTS". 5) Security: Locked with 3/4 inch (19 mm) barrel lock. Provide solid 12 inch (304 mm) stainless steel piano hinge. 2.2 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT (FACU) A. Description: Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules. B. Performance Criteria: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 9 1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 72 and UL 864 (9th Edition). 2. General Characteristics: a. System software and programs must be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include real-time clock for time annotation of events on event recorder and printer. c. Provide communication between FACU and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays. d. FACU shall be capable of dual path communications utilizing standard POTS line outputs as well as IP communications and compatible with remote station receiving equipment. e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. System must require no manual input to initialize in the event of complete power down condition. FACU must provide minimum 500-event history log. f. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: FACU must indicate which initiating zones have been disabled. 1) Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and/or other Mechanical Equipment: FACU must be listed for releasing service. g. FACU must provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliances by building communication zone. h. Fire-Alarm Annunciator: Arranged for interface between human operator at FACU and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and programming and control menu. 1) Annunciator and Display: LCD, 80 characters, minimum. 2) Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. i. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits: 1) Pathway Class Designations: a) Initiating-device circuit - NFPA 72, Class B. b) Notification appliance circuit – NFPA 72, Class B. c) Signaling line circuit – NFPA 72, Class B. 2) Pathway Survivability: Level 0. 3) Install no more than 75 percent of the circuit’s capacity of addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit. 4) Install fault circuit isolators to comply with circuit performance requirements of NFPA 72 (Section 23.6) or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever is more conservative. j. Serial Interfaces: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 10 1) One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi- interface module (printer port). 2) One USB port for PC configuration. k. Notification-Appliance Circuit: 1) Audible horn-style appliances must sound in three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2) Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, alarm signal must be 520 Hz square wave with intensity 15 dB above average ambient sound level or 5 dB above maximum sound level, or at least 75 dB(A-weighted), whichever is greater, measured at pillow. 3) Visual alarm appliances must flash in where multiple appliances are in same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72. l. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier walls must be connected to fire-alarm system. m. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls must select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and provide a print out of final adjusted values. n. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to remote alarm station. 1) Communicate alarm device type. I.e., “smoke detector” or “manual station”. o. Primary Power: 24 V(dc) obtained from 120 V(ac) service and power- supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals and digital alarm radio transmitters must be powered by 24 V(dc) source. p. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system must not exceed 80 percent of power-supply module rating. q. Secondary Power: 24 V(dc) supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. r. Batteries: Sealed lead acid, AGM style. C. Accessories: 1. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind plastic or glass cover in stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe functional operation of system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 11 2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC) REMOTE POWER SUPPLY A. General requirements for remote power supplies: Compatible with and listed for use with FACU. Listed by NRTL. Comply with UL 864, 10th Edition and UL 1481. 1. Constructed of heavy gauge steel, powder-coated, corrosion resistant and chip resistant finish matching that of the FACU. 2. Lockable enclosure matched with other system keyed components and enclosures. 3. Enclosure to have pre-installed knockouts and removeable door for ease of installation. 4. Able to be installed flush or semi-flush in a standard 16-inch stud space. 5. Minimum total output capacity of 6 amps. 6. Minimum number of PLFA outputs: Four at 24VDC. 7. Outputs configurable as Class A or Class B. 8. Provides auxiliary 24VDC output signal configurable by panel programming. 9. Capable of all NAC outputs. 10. Ample space inside cabinet for backup batteries sized per calculations. 11. Integral battery charger and automatic transfer switch. 12. Accommodations for up to 12 AWG conductor termination. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes must be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; must show visible indication of operation; and must be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate alarm, push & pull- lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual- station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at top to permit lifting for access to initiate alarm. Lifting cover actuates integral battery- powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at top to permit lifting for access to initiate alarm. 5. Able to perform at up to 90 percent relative humidity at 90 deg F (32 deg 6. Material: Manual stations made of Lexan polycarbonate. 7. Suitable for the expected environment of the device location. 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Regulatory Requirements: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 12 1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 268. b. General Characteristics: 1) Detectors must be two-wire type. 2) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. 3) Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components must be mounted in twist-lock module that connects to fixed base. Provide terminals in fixed base for connection to building wiring. 4) Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 5) Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 6) Detector address must be accessible from FACU and must be able to identify detector's location within system and its sensitivity setting. 7) Operator at FACU, having designated access level, must be able to manually access the following for each detector: a) Primary status. b) Device type. c) Present average value. d) Present sensitivity selected. e) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 8) Detector must have functional humidity range within 10 to 90 percent relative humidity. 9) Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors must be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at FACU for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by FACU. 10) Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units must be selectable at FACU for 15 or 20 deg F (8 or 11 deg C) per minute. 11) Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units must be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and must be settable at FACU to operate at 135 or 155 deg F (57 or 68 deg 12) Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. 13) Sensitivity levels based on time of day. 2.6 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Description: Photoelectric-type, duct-mounted smoke detector. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 13 a. NFPA 72. b. UL 268A. 2. General Characteristics: a. Detectors must be two-wire type. b. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. c. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. d. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status. e. Detector address must be accessible from FACU and must be able to identify detector's location within system and its sensitivity setting. f. Operator at FACU, having designated access level, must be able to manually access the following for each detector: 1) Primary status. 2) Device type. 3) Present average value. 4) Present sensitivity selected. 5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). g. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts. 1) Provide for locations outside the building envelope and where exposed to elements. h. Each sensor must have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. i. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. j. Fan Shutdown Relay: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit upon detector activation. 2.7 HEAT DETECTORS A. Combination-Type Heat Detectors: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Regulatory Requirements: 1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 521. b. General Characteristics: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 14 1) Temperature sensors must test for and communicate sensitivity range of device. c. Actuated by fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated. d. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. e. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. f. Detector must have functional humidity range of 10 to 90 percent relative humidity. B. Fixed-Temperature-Type Heat Detectors: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Regulatory Requirements: 1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 521. b. General Characteristics: 1) Actuated by temperature that exceeds fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg 2) Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 3) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to FACU. 4) Detector must have functional humidity range of 10 to 90 percent. 2.8 FIRE-ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Acceptable manufacturers: Listed for use with and compatible with FACU. 1. System Sensor 2. Gentex 3. Wheelock by Eaton 4. Matching the manufacture of FACU being provided. B. Fire-Alarm Audible Notification Appliances: 1. Description: Horns, bells, or other notification devices that cannot output voice messages. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Regulatory Requirements: 1) NFPA 72. b. General Characteristics: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 15 1) Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 2) Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24 V(dc); with provision for housing operating mechanism behind grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns must produce sound-pressure level of 90 dB(A-weighted), measured 10 ft. (3 m) from horn, using coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. 3) Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. C. Fire-Alarm Visible Notification Appliances: 1. Performance Criteria: a. Regulatory Requirements: 1) NFPA 72. 2) UL 1971. b. General Characteristics: 1) Rated Light Output: a) 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in field. 2) Clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on aluminum faceplate. 3) Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 4) For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings must be determined with guards in place. 5) Flashing must be in temporal pattern, with other units. 6) Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 7) Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, [red] [white]. 2.9 FIRE-ALARM REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Listed for use with and compatible with FACU. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. NFPA 72. 2. General Characteristics: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 16 a. Annunciator functions must match those of FACU for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions must match those of FACU, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1) Mounting: [Flush] [Surface] cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights must match those of FACU. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 2.10 FIRE-ALARM ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES A. Acceptable manufacturers: Listed for use with and compatible with FACU. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. NFPA 72. 2. General Characteristics: a. Include address-setting means on module. b. Store internal identifying code for control panel use to identify module type. c. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers. d. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open, dry contacts. e. Control Module: 1) Integral Relay: Capable of providing direct signal to the associated equipment. 2) Allow control panel to switch relay contacts on command. 3) Have minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field wiring. 4) Operate notification devices. 5) Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service. 2.11 FIRE ALARM COMMUNICATOR - CELLULAR A. Acceptable manufacturers: Contractor shall coordinate with and receive approval from the AHJ. 1. StarLink Fire 2. Telguard 3. Approved equal B. Performance Criteria: ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 17 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. NFPA 72. 2. General Characteristics: a. Sole path Cellular (LTE) based communications compatible with available cellular services in the area of the project. b. DACT output format must be acceptable to remote central station and must be listed for fire-alarm use. c. Functional Performance: Unit must receive alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from FACU and automatically dial preset number for remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals must be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter must initiate local trouble signal and transmit signal indicating loss of telephone line to remote alarm receiving station over remaining line. Transmitter must automatically report telephone service restoration to central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter must initiate local trouble signal. d. Local functions and display at DACT must include the following: 1) LED signal strength indicators. 2) Communications failure with central station or FACU. e. Digital data transmission must include the following: 1) Type of alarm-initiating device. 2) Supervisory signal. 3) Trouble signal. 4) Loss of ac supply. 5) Loss of power. 6) Low battery. 7) Abnormal test signal. 8) Communication bus failure. f. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. g. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. h. Provide remote antenna as required by project site conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 18 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preinstallation Testing: Perform verification of functionality of installed components of existing system prior to starting work. Document equipment or components not functioning as designed. B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service in accordance with requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and/or Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. C. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect facility during construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Comply with NECA 305, NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before other trades have completed cleanup must be replaced. 2. Devices installed, but not yet placed, in service must be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage in accordance with manufacturer's written storage instructions. B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing control and monitoring functions to new points. New ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 19 components must be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading performance of either system. C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inch (1980 mm) above finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems." D. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in normal path of egress within 60 inch (1520 mm) of exit doorway. 2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on background of contrasting color. 3. Operable part of manual fire-alarm box must be between 42 and 48 inches (1060 and 1220 mm) above floor level. Devices must be mounted at same height unless otherwise indicated. E. Smoke- and Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing must not exceed 30 ft. (9 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas must be determined in accordance with Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inch (910 mm) from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inch (300 mm) from lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting. F. Install cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover must remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inch (9100 mm) long must be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover. H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in visible and accessible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 20 I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inch (150 mm) below ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with device-operating mechanism concealed behind grille. Install devices at same height unless otherwise indicated. J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install as shown on plans. Install devices in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements and at same height unless otherwise indicated. K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in accessible space, easily viewed from floor level near device they monitor. 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate must be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with red background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring in accordance with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation and I/O control designation feeding connection. 3.6 PATHWAYS A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in inaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inch (2440 mm) above floor must be installed in EMT. B. Pathways in inaccessible space (above gypsum ceilings and within walls) must be installed in EMT and stubbed to nearest accessible space. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 21 C. Exposed EMT must be painted using red enamel paint. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Provide fire alarm control devices to interface with hardware and devices. 1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections. B. Make addressable connections with supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install interface device less than 36 inch (910 mm) from device controlled. Make addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Magnetically held-open doors. 3. Electronically locked doors and access gates. 4. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems." B. Install framed instructions in location visible from FACU. 3.9 GROUNDING A. Ground FACU and associated circuits in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Ground shielded cables at control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Administrant for Tests and Inspections: 1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 22 C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection must be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in "Inspection" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" table in "Testing" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for public operating mode in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Perform test using portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ASA S1.4 Part 1/IEC 61672-1. 4. Test audible appliances for private operating mode in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for public operating mode in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative must prepare "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in "Documentation" section of "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and "Inspection and Testing Form" in "Records" section of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire- alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. Allow Owner to record training. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service must include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies must be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 283100 - 23 1. Include visual inspections in accordance with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in "Testing" paragraph of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Perform tests in "Test Methods" table in "Testing" paragraph of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Perform tests per "Testing Frequencies" table in "Testing" paragraph of "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72. 3.13 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement must include software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software must include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. END OF SECTION 283100 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), 2020 edition. 1. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 3 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings. E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and indicated according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection.". F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings. B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Digline for area where Project is located at least 48 hours in advance of site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place. E. Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: Protect according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or moist. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." 3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Burning tree, shrub, and other vegetation waste is not permitted. END OF SECTION 311000 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Geotechnical Evaluation prepared by Atlas Technical Consultants, LLC titled "Geotechnical Investigation Heritage Park Events Center" and dated June 30, 2025. C. Star Sewer & Water District (SSWD) Standard Specifications and Drawings, 2020 edition. D. Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), 2020 edition. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Controlled low-strength material. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. Initial backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, will be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: 1. Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D1586. I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other fabricated stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. J. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. K. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant-protection zones. d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. e. Field quality control. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type product. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below: 1. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. Conform to the material requirements of structural fill, per geotech report. 2. Conform to the Fill Placement and Compaction section per geotech report. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740 for testing indicated. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Digline for area where Project is located at least 48 hours before beginning earth-moving operations. D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing" are in place. E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place. F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones. H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: 3-inch Uncrushed Aggregate per ISPWC Section 801 and geotech report. E. Aggregate Base Course: Type 1 Crushed Aggregate Base per ISPWC Section 802 and geotech report. F. Granular Structural Fill:1-inch, 3-inch, or 6-inch Uncrushed Aggregate per ISPWC Section 801, ISPWC Section 802 Aggregate Base, and per geotech report. G. Bedding Course: Per geotechnical report and SSWD specifications. H. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M; fine aggregate. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations. B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Provide dewatering as required per ISPWC Section 205 - Dewatering. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approvals from the City of Star and all Authorities having Jurisdiction prior to excavation. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: 1. The use of explosives are prohibited. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavation for structures shall be per section 2.1 in the SSWD Standards. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavation shall conform to ISPWC Section 301 - Trench Excavation and SSWD Standards. B. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. 3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection." 3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.9 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.10 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Backfill shall conform to ISPWC Section 306 - Trench Backfill. B. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing. E. Initial Backfill: EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of bedding material free of particles larger than 1 inch 4 inches in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. b. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Final Backfill: 1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil in 8 inch compacted lifts to final subgrade elevation. 2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation. G. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.11 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 5 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use granular structural fill per geotech report. 4. Under building slabs, use granular structural fill per geotech report. 5. Under footings and foundations, use granular structural fill per geotech report. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.13 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches in thickness for fine-grained soils and 12 inches in thickness for granular structural fill, aggregate base material, and subbase material. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to geotech report and ASTM D1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material per geotech report. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material per geotech report. 3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material per geotech report. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material per geotech report. 3.14 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances: 1. The finished grade not to deviate more than 0.10 foot at any point from the staked elevation and the algebraic sum of the deviations from true grade of any 2 points not more than 30 feet apart. 2. Top surfaces of backfilling under access roads to be plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3. Top surfaces of general backfilling to be plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.15 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install subbase course and base course to required slopes and thickness per geotech report. 2. Shape subbase course and base course to required cross-slope grades. 3. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 4. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 5. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness in accordance with geotech report. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2937, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2500 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests. F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Geotechnical Evaluation prepared by Atlas Technical Consultants, LLC titled "Geotechnical Investigation Heritage Park Events Center" and dated June 30, 2025. C. Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), 2020 edition. D. 2023 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Idaho Department of Transportation. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, separation geotextiles, unbound-aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and for separate concrete curbs, gutters, and driveway aprons. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Joint sealant. B. Hot-Mix Asphalt Designs: 1. Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each hot-mix asphalt design proposed for the Work. 2. For each hot-mix asphalt design proposed for the Work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For paving-mix manufacturer. B. Material Certificates: Include statement that mixes containing recycled materials will perform equal to mixes produced from all new materials. 1. Aggregates. 2. Asphalt binder. 3. Asphalt cement. 4. Tack coat. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM D3666 for testing indicated. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D692/D692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D242/D242M, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: PG 64-28 binder. B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D3381/D3381M for viscosity-graded material. C. Tack Coat: Shall conform to Section 403 and 702 of the ITD Standard Specifications and/or Section 806 of the ISPWC for Grade MC 70. D. Water: Potable. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement; reclaimed, unbound-aggregate base material; and recycled tires asphalt shingles from sources and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-mix asphalt paving produced from all new materials. B. Sand: ASTM D1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade No. 2 or No. 3. C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Shall conform to Section 1104 of the ISPWC. 1. Color: As indicated on Drawings. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.4 MIXES A. Recycled Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than percent or more than percent by weight. B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide protective materials, procedures, and worker training to prevent asphalt materials from spilling, coating, or building up on curbs, driveway aprons, manholes, and other surfaces adjacent to the Work. B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. 3.3 PATCHING A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly. 1. Undersealing: Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly. 2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. C. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. D. Placing Single-Course Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch. 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Ensure that prepared subgrade has been proof-rolled and is ready to receive paving. Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.6 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACEMENT A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches from strip to strip to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints. C. correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.7 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method in accordance with AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.8 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density, Rice Test Method: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density in accordance with ASTM D2041/D2041M, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.9 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined in accordance with ASTM D3549/D3549M. C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. D. Obtain one sample of hot mix asphalt on-site prior to installation per ISPWC Section 805 - 2.5 Sampling and Testing. 3.12 WASTE HANDLING A. General: Handle asphalt-paving waste in accordance with approved waste management plan required in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." END OF SECTION 321216 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Geotechnical Evaluation prepared by Atlas Technical Consultants, LLC titled "Geotechnical Investigation Heritage Park Events Center" and dated June 30, 2025. C. Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), 2020 edition. D. 2023 Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Idaho Department of Transportation. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes concrete paving including the following: 1. Driveways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walks. 4. Patios. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following: a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Joint fillers. B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following: 1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests must be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following: 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures. C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60; deformed. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. Rigid PCCP should be 6 inches thick and reinforced with welded wire fabric per geotech report. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, gray portland cement Type I, Type IL, Type II or Type I/II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C Class F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag Type IP, portland-pozzolan Type IL, Portland-limestone cement. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 4S Class 4M Class 1N, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches 1 inch 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94/C94M. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry cotton mats. B. Water: Potable. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ChemMasters, Inc. b. Master Builders Solutions. c. Sika Corporation. d. Approved Equal. D. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ChemMasters, Inc. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. Approved Equal. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or in preformed strips. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. 2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 5 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Air Content, 1-1/2-inch Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 5-1/2 4-1/2 2-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 2. Air Content, 1-inch Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 6 4-1/2 3 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 3. Air Content, 3/4-inch Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 6 5 3-1/2 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 0.30percent by weight of cement. E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture, high-range, water-reducing admixture, high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture, plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. F. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4500 psi 4000 psi 3500 psi 3000 psi Insert strength. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 0.50 Insert ratio. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches 5 inches 8 inches Insert dimension, plus or minus 1.5 inch. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 6 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Install fabricated bar mats in as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 7 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent or epoxy-bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 8 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels. 3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation and items to be embedded or cast-in. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating joint devices. H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 9 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing. K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNINGS A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified by manufacturer: 1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of tiles specified by manufacturer's recommendations. Screed surface of concrete where tiles are to be installed to elevation, so that edges of installed tiles will be flush with surrounding concrete paving. Embed tiles in fresh concrete to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 10 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch. 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 11 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172/C172M will be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing to be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test to be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 12 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Test results to be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests to contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency will make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 13 ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- ---PAGE BREAK--- CITY OF STAR EVENTS CENTER COSTAR_EC STAR, IDAHO 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ---PAGE BREAK--- cushingterrell.com September 9th, 2025 Structural Calculations for Star Event Center 960 South Main Street, Star, Idaho 83669 Prepared by: Sierra Coalson P.E. Reviewed by: Rolf P.E., S.E. ---PAGE BREAK--- cushingterrell.com STRUCTURAL CALCULATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Design Criteria 03 Gravity Loading 06 Roof Framing Design 10 Truss Design 74 Floor Framing Design 88 Foundation Design 125 Studs and Posts Design 131 Lateral Design 139 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Project Information Project Name: Star Event Center Project Number: COSTAR_EC Project Address: 960 S Main Street, Star, Idaho 83669 Jurisdiction: City of Star Design Code: 2018 International Building Code Prepared For: City of Star Client Address: 10769 State Street Star, Idaho 83669 Building Criteria Occupancy Event Center (Community Hall) Risk Category III Assumed Gravity Loading (unless noted otherwise) Roof Loading Dead 20.00 psf Roof Snow 25 psf Floor Loading Dead 20.00 psf Floor Live 40 psf Climatic Design Criteria Snow Load Importance Factor 1.1 Ground Snow Load 20 psf Basic Wind Design Speed 115 mph Flat Roof Snow Load 25 psf Wind Exposure Category C Exposure Factor 1.0 psf Internal Pressure Coefficie + 0.18 Thermal Factor 1.2 psf Slope Factor 1.0 psf Mean Roof Height 27 ft Seismic Importance Factor 1.3 Site Class D (Default) Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters Ss 0.293 g S1 0.107 g Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters SDS 0.306 g SD1 0.170 g Seismic Design Category C Soil Properties Assumed Bearing Pressure 2000 psf Frost Depth 24 in Project Design Criteria Star Event Center COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 City of Star Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 3 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- P.O. Box 130 I 10769 W. State St. I Star, ID 83669 I (208) 286‑7247 Home Accessibility Adopted Codes & Design Criteria Adopted Codes - Effective January 1, 2021 2018 International Building Code, with amendments 2018 International Residential Code (parts I, II, III, and IX), with Idaho amendments, collectively named the Idaho Residential Code (2020 Edition) 2018 International Energy Conservation Code, with amendments, collectively named the Idaho Energy Conservation Code (2020 Edition) 2018 International Existing Building Code *Note - Idaho amendments to the IRC contain a typo under 07.03.01.004.02.q. Table R403 became Table R403.4 in the final printing of the 2018 IRC **Note - The reference to 2020 Edition is an identifier to the legislative session in which the amendments were adopted. Amendments can be made in any legislative cycle regardless of the code cycle. Electrical Codes 2017 National Electrical Code, with amendments (NEC) Mechanical Codes 2018 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 2018 International Fuel & Gas Code (IFGC) 2018 International Residential Code Parts V & VI Plumbing Codes 2017 Idaho State Plumbing Code (ISPC) based on the 2015 Uniform Plumbing Code. Link to View Plumbing Code Online Fire Code (administered by the Idaho Fire Marshall) 2018 International Fire Code (IFC) Link to State Fire Marshall's Office General Design Guidelines If the information is not found below, refer to the adopted codes stated above for proper design methods to meet minimum compliance. Snow Load - Ground snow loads = 20 psf and also determined by section 7, of ASCE 7, however the design roof load shall not be less than a uniform snow load of 25 psf Floor Loads - live load 40 psf, dead load 20 psf / total 60 psf or ASCE 7, Table 4-1 for conditions that would require a greater load. Lateral Loads - ASCE 7 and adopted IBC. Geotechnical report required Wind - 115 mph risk occupancy II or less; 120 mph for risk occupancy III, or greater Soil Properties - Geotechnical report required for structures in seismic design Frost line - 24 inches Weathering - Severe Exposure - C Termite - Slight to Moderate Decay - Slight to None Winter Design Temperature - 10 degrees Annual Mean Temperature - 51.1 Floodplain Ordinance - FIRM 2003 in effect (flood insurance rate maps) Air Freezing Index - 294 (National Climatic Data Center) Ice Barrier Underlayment Required? - No Supporting Documents 313 - Adopted Codes & Design Criteria 04-2024 (PDF Printable Version) (227 KB) Contact Information Building Dept: [EMAIL REDACTED] View Full Contact Details Building & Permits 2025 Hometown Celebration Guide Search Page 4 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 5 of 150 GRAVITY LOADING ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. SIP Roof Dead Load Slope 3.0/12 Typical Roof Dead Load Slope 4.0/12 Comp Roofing (2-Layers) 4.5 psf Comp Roofing (2-Layers) 4.5 psf 12" SIP Panel 5 psf 5/8" Plywood Sheathing 2 psf 1/2" Gyp 2.2 psf 16 Truss / I-Joist @ 16'' OC 3.375 psf Misc 5 psf 12" Batt Insulation 1.8 psf Sloped Total 17.00 psf 1/2" Gyp 2.2 psf Flat Total 18.00 psf Misc 3 psf Use 20.00 psf Sloped Total 17.00 psf Flat Total 18.00 psf Use 20.00 psf Porch Roof Dead Load Slope 3.0/12 Upper Floor Dead Load Comp Roofing (2-Layers) 4.5 psf Per Owner 5 psf 7/16" OSB 1.3 psf 1-1/8" Plywood Sheathing 3.7 psf 2x12 @ 24'' OC 2.0 psf 18 Truss / I-Joist @ 16'' OC 3.8 psf Misc 5 psf 12" Batt Insulation 1.8 psf Sloped Total 13.00 psf 1/2" Gyp 2.2 psf Flat Total 13.50 psf Misc 3 psf Use 15.00 psf Total 19.50 psf Use 20.00 psf Typical Wall Dead Load Typical Siding 2.5 psf 7/16" OSB 1.2578 psf 2x6 @ 16'' OC 1.415 psf 6" Batt Insulation 0.9 psf 1/2" Gyp 2.2 psf Misc 3 psf Total 11.50 psf Use 12.00 psf Building Live Loads Roof Live Load 20 psf Floor Live 40 psf Deck Live Load 60 psf Building Dead Loads Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 6 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Site Criteria Flat Roof Snow Loads Mapped Ground Snow Load 20 psf Juridiction Min Roof Snow Load 25 psf Surface Roughness B ASCE Min Roof Snow Load 22 psf Roof Exposure Partially Exposed Interior Flat Roof Snow Load 16.9 psf Roof Exposure Factor 1.0 Unheated Flat Roof Snow Load 18.5 psf Building Criteria Design Flat Roof Snow Loads Importance Factor 1.1 Conditioned Roof 25.0 psf Unheated/Exterior Roof 25.0 psf Conditioned Roof Thermal Factor 1.1 Unheated Roof Thermal Factor 1.2 Snow Density 16.6 pcf Balanced Snow Height 1.11 ft Sloped Roof Snow Loads Roofs are Slippery and Unobstructed? Yes 3:12 14.0 3:12 14.0 4:12 18.4 4:12 18.4 5:12 22.6 5:12 22.6 6:12 26.6 6:12 26.6 Snow Drift Reference Key Plans for Drift Locations Hc (ft) LU (ft) LL (ft) Hc/Hb WW hd (ft) LW hd (ft) 7.5 40.667 15.667 5.74 0.97 2.06 16.5 105.5 19.75 13.82 0.97 3.41 8 105.5 62 6.19 1.95 3.41 7.5 10 40 5.74 1.53 1.29 8 64.5 101.5 6.19 2.51 2.66 Snow Loads Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Heated Roof Roof Slope Slope Factor Design Roof SL Roof Slope Slope Factor Design Roof SL 0.86 25 0.79 25 0.72 25 5 Location 2 4 1 25 0.94 25 0.86 25 0.79 25 0.93 25 Unheated Roof Surcharge (psf) Length (ft) 1 37.5 8.23 62.3 13.66 3 62.3 13.66 27.9 6.11 48.6 10.64 Page 7 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 8 of 150 SNOW DRIFT CALC MAPS B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 13'-5" 61.3 PSF 5'-2" 23.6 PSF 5'-2" 23.6 PSF 13'-5" 61.3 PSF SNOW DRIFT 1 SNOW DRIFT 1 SNOW DRIFT 2 SNOW DRIFT 3 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 5 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 SNOW DRIFT 4 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 9 of 150 ROOF FRAMING DESIGN ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 10 of 150 ROOF FRAMING CALC MAPS WD-3 WD-3 B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 LOWER ROOF REF - 1/S102 LOWER ROOF REF - 1/S102 LOWER ROOF REF - 1/S102 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 S302 1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 1 3/4"x11 1/4" LVL TYP AT TIMBER TRUSSES TYP AT TIMBER TRUSSES 5 1/2"X18" GLB 5 1/2"X18" GLB 5 1/2"X18" GLB 5 1/2"X24" GLB 5 1/2"X24" GLB (TWO SPAN) H2 H6 W/ 2x KINGS EACH SIDE SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP 3 S214 HIGH 4 S213 HIGH 1 3/4"X11 1/4" LVL 1 3/4"X11 1/4" LVL S103 3 CUPOLA ROOF FRAMING S103 3 CUPOLA ROOF FRAMING @ 16" TJI 210 1'-4" @ 1 3/4"x16" LVL 1'-4" 2 S214 LOW 14 S213 SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP 11 S213 9 S213 4 S214 @ 16" TJI 210 1'-4" @ 1 3/4"x16" LVL 1'-4" 7 S213 SIMPSON MSTC40 STRAP 4 S213 HIGH ROOF BEAM 01 (TWO SPAN) ROOF BEAM 02 ROOF BEAM 03 ROOF BEAM 04 ROOF BEAM 05 ROOF BEAM 06 ROOF BEAM 10 ROOF BEAM 08 ROOF BEAM 15 ROOF BEAM 17 ROOF BEAM 16 HDR 01 HDR 07 HDR 03 HDR 04 HDR 05 ROOF JOIST 04 ROOF JOIST 05 ROOF BEAM 12 HDR 06 ROOF BEAM 14 ROOF BEAM 13 HDR 08 HDR 08 ROOF JOIST 01 ROOF JOIST 02 ROOF JOIST 03 HDR 02 SIP ROOF PANELS BY OTHERS SIP ROOF PANELS BY OTHERS HDR 07 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 03 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 HDR 04 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 09 TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS TIMBER TRUSS ROOF BEAM 16 ROOF BEAM 17 SIP ROOF PANELS BY OTHERS ROOF BEAM 17 ROOF BEAM 16 ROOF BEAM 16 ROOF BEAM 17 ROOF JOIST 06 DL = 3.110 K SL = 3.560 K DL = 13.217 K SL = 15.591 K DL = 6.294 K SL = 8.328 K DL = 6.633 K SL = 12.093 K DL = 4.847 K SL = 5.750 K DL = 9.009 K SL = 10.688 K DL = 8.060 K SL = 9.664 K DL = 3.898 K SL = 4.938 K DL = 1.953 K SL = 2.344 K DL = 1.953 K SL = 2.344 K ROOF BEAM 11 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 08 ROOF BEAM 08 ROOF BEAM 11 ROOF BEAM 08 ROOF BEAM 09 SIP ROOF PANELS BY OTHERS ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 07 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 ROOF BEAM 18 DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.276 K SL = 1.908 K DL = 1.632 K SL = 2.442 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 2.766 K SL = 4.043 K DL = 2.186 K SL = 3.654 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 4.025 K SL = 6.556 K DL = 1.553 K SL = 2.256 K DL = 2.059 K SL = 3.100 K DL = 0.512 K SL = 1.247 K DL = 2.001 K SL = 3.334 K DL = 1.527 K SL = 2.409 K DL = 2.008 K SL = 2.511 K DL = 1.652 K SL = 2.473 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 3.110 K SL = 3.560 K DL = 0.339 K SL = 0.605 K DL = 0.675 K SL = 0.891 K DL = 0.675 K SL = 0.891 K DL = 0.501 K SL = 0.594 K DL = 0.501 K SL = 0.594 K DL = 1.308 K SL = 1.575 K DL = 1.308 K SL = 1.575 K 26'-2 3/4" ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 787 @ 26' 6 1/2" 1156 (1.75") Passed (68%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (Alt Spans) Shear (lbs) 758 @ 26' 5 1/2" 2519 Passed (30%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (Alt Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) 4608 @ 14' 5 1/2" 5911 Passed (78%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (Alt Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.548 @ 14' 4 13/16" 1.359 Passed (L/595) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (Alt Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 1.034 @ 14' 4 15/16" 1.812 Passed (L/315) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (Alt Spans) Member Length : 30' 9 1/8" System : Roof Member Type : Joist Building Use : Residential Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD Member Pitch : 6/12 • Deflection criteria: LL (L/240) and TL (L/180). • Overhang deflection criteria: LL (2L/240) and TL (2L/180). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • Permanent bracing at third points in the back span or a direct applied ceiling over the entire back span length is required at the left span of the member. See literature detail (PB1) For clarification. • Blocking Panels are assumed to carry no loads applied directly above them and the full load is applied to the member being designed. Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Snow Factored Accessories Details 1 - Beveled Plate - DF 5.50" 5.50" 3.50" 432 483 915 Blocking R1 2 - Beveled Plate - DF 5.50" 5.50" 1.75" 371 416 787 Blocking R1 •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. •Dimensions for lateral bracing intervals are measured along the length of the member for sloped conditions. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 3' 11" o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 8' 8" o/c Dead Snow Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.15) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 26' 11" 16" 20.0 25.0 Roof Load Weyerhaeuser warrants that the sizing of its products will be in accordance with Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. Weyerhaeuser expressly disclaims any other warranties related to the software. Use of this software is not intended to circumvent the need for a design professional as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. The designer of record, builder or framer is responsible to assure that this calculation is compatible with the overall project. Accessories (Rim Board, Blocking Panels and Squash Blocks) are not designed by this software. Products manufactured at Weyerhaeuser facilities are third-party certified to sustainable forestry standards. Weyerhaeuser Engineered Lumber Products have been evaluated by ICC-ES under evaluation reports ESR-1153 and ESR-1387 and/or tested in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. For current code evaluation reports, Weyerhaeuser product literature and installation details refer to www.weyerhaeuser.com/woodproducts/ document-library. The product application, input design loads, dimensions and support information have been provided by ForteWEB Software Operator Weyerhaeuser Notes Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, ROOF JOIST 01 1 piece(s) 16" TJI® 210 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 9 / 12 Page 11 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 784 @ 24' 6 1/2" 1156 (1.75") Passed (68%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Shear (lbs) 760 @ 5 1/2" 2519 Passed (30%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) 4578 @ 12' 6" 5911 Passed (77%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.534 @ 12' 6" 1.346 Passed (L/606) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 1.011 @ 12' 6" 1.795 Passed (L/320) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Member Length : 28' 1/8" System : Roof Member Type : Joist Building Use : Residential Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD Member Pitch : 6/12 • Deflection criteria: LL (L/240) and TL (L/180). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • Blocking Panels are assumed to carry no loads applied directly above them and the full load is applied to the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. • ² Required Bearing Length / Required Bearing Length with Web Stiffeners Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Snow Factored Accessories Details 1 - Hanger on 16" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.75" / - ² 371 417 788 See note ¹ 2 - Beveled Plate - DF 5.50" 5.50" 1.75" 370 414 784 Blocking R1 •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. •Dimensions for lateral bracing intervals are measured along the length of the member for sloped conditions. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 4' o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 27' 4" o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 1 - Top Mount Hanger BA2.1/16X SLU26 3.00" 6-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 2-10dx1.5 • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Snow Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.15) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 24' 11" 16" 20.0 25.0 Roof Load Weyerhaeuser warrants that the sizing of its products will be in accordance with Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. Weyerhaeuser expressly disclaims any other warranties related to the software. Use of this software is not intended to circumvent the need for a design professional as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. The designer of record, builder or framer is responsible to assure that this calculation is compatible with the overall project. Accessories (Rim Board, Blocking Panels and Squash Blocks) are not designed by this software. Products manufactured at Weyerhaeuser facilities are third-party certified to sustainable forestry standards. Weyerhaeuser Engineered Lumber Products have been evaluated by ICC-ES under evaluation reports ESR-1153 and ESR-1387 and/or tested in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. For current code evaluation reports, Weyerhaeuser product literature and installation details refer to www.weyerhaeuser.com/woodproducts/ document-library. The product application, input design loads, dimensions and support information have been provided by ForteWEB Software Operator Weyerhaeuser Notes Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, ROOF JOIST 02 1 piece(s) 16" TJI® 210 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 10 / 12 Page 12 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 1655 @ 5 1/2" 1969 (1.50") Passed (84%) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Shear (lbs) 1491 @ 1' 7 13/16" 6118 Passed (24%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) 9964 @ 12' 6" 18606 Passed (54%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.946 @ 12' 6" 1.346 Passed (L/342) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 1.129 @ 12' 6" 1.795 Passed (L/286) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Member Length : 28' 1/8" System : Roof Member Type : Joist Building Use : Residential Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD Member Pitch : 6/12 • Deflection criteria: LL (L/240) and TL (L/180). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • A 4% increase in the moment capacity has been added to account for repetitive member usage. • Blocking Panels are assumed to carry no loads applied directly above them and the full load is applied to the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Snow Factored Accessories 1 - Hanger on 16" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.50" 278 1438 1717 See note ¹ 2 - Beveled Plate - DF 5.50" 5.50" 1.56" 278 1429 1706 Blocking •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. •Dimensions for lateral bracing intervals are measured along the length of the member for sloped conditions. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 5' 4" o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 27' 4" o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 1 - Top Mount Hanger BA1.81/16X SLU26 3.00" 6-16d 10-16d 2-10dx1.5 • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Snow Vertical Loads Location (Side) Spacing (0.90) (1.15) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 24' 11" 16" 15.0 25.0 Roof Load 2 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 24' 11" 16" 61.3 Snow Drift Weyerhaeuser warrants that the sizing of its products will be in accordance with Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. Weyerhaeuser expressly disclaims any other warranties related to the software. Use of this software is not intended to circumvent the need for a design professional as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. The designer of record, builder or framer is responsible to assure that this calculation is compatible with the overall project. Accessories (Rim Board, Blocking Panels and Squash Blocks) are not designed by this software. Products manufactured at Weyerhaeuser facilities are third-party certified to sustainable forestry standards. Weyerhaeuser Engineered Lumber Products have been evaluated by ICC-ES under evaluation reports ESR-1153 and ESR-1387 and/or tested in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. For current code evaluation reports, Weyerhaeuser product literature and installation details refer to www.weyerhaeuser.com/woodproducts/ document-library. The product application, input design loads, dimensions and support information have been provided by ForteWEB Software Operator Weyerhaeuser Notes Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, ROOF JOIST 02 + SNOW DRIFT 1 piece(s) 1 3/4" x 16" 2.0E Microllam® LVL @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 11 / 12 Page 13 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 489 @ 16' 5 1/2" 1156 (1.75") Passed (42%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Shear (lbs) 489 @ 16' 5 1/2" 2519 Passed (19%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) 1967 @ 8' 5" 5911 Passed (33%) 1.15 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.099 @ 8' 5" 0.829 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 0.181 @ 8' 5" 1.105 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 S (All Spans) Member Length : 17' 3 9/16" System : Roof Member Type : Joist Building Use : Residential Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD Member Pitch : 3/12 • Deflection criteria: LL (L/240) and TL (L/180). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • Blocking Panels are assumed to carry no loads applied directly above them and the full load is applied to the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. • ² Required Bearing Length / Required Bearing Length with Web Stiffeners Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Snow Factored Accessories Details 1 - Beveled Plate - DF 5.50" 5.50" 1.75" 231 281 512 Blocking R1 2 - Hanger on 16" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.75" / - ² 233 283 517 See note ¹ •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. •Dimensions for lateral bracing intervals are measured along the length of the member for sloped conditions. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 6' 3" o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 17' o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 2 - Top Mount Hanger BA2.1/16X SLD14 3.00" 6-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 2-10dx1.5 • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Snow Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.15) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 16' 11" 16" 20.0 25.0 Roof Load Weyerhaeuser warrants that the sizing of its products will be in accordance with Weyerhaeuser product design criteria and published design values. Weyerhaeuser expressly disclaims any other warranties related to the software. Use of this software is not intended to circumvent the need for a design professional as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. The designer of record, builder or framer is responsible to assure that this calculation is compatible with the overall project. Accessories (Rim Board, Blocking Panels and Squash Blocks) are not designed by this software. Products manufactured at Weyerhaeuser facilities are third-party certified to sustainable forestry standards. Weyerhaeuser Engineered Lumber Products have been evaluated by ICC-ES under evaluation reports ESR-1153 and ESR-1387 and/or tested in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. For current code evaluation reports, Weyerhaeuser product literature and installation details refer to www.weyerhaeuser.com/woodproducts/ document-library. The product application, input design loads, dimensions and support information have been provided by ForteWEB Software Operator Weyerhaeuser Notes Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, ROOF JOIST 03 1 piece(s) 16" TJI® 210 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 12 / 12 Page 14 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Repetitive Member Stress Increase Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.286: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 5.631ft 27.91 psi = = 1,190.25psi 2x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 2x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.135 : 1 11.128 ft = = 340.97psi Maximum Deflection 2358 >=240 1803 Ratio = 1366 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.047 in 3094 Ratio = >=240 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.025 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.080 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.044 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.153 0.071 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.37 142.1 931.5 0.13 162.0 1.00 11.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.043 0.071 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.11 39.9 931.5 0.05 162.0 1.00 11.6 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.286 0.135 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.90 341.0 1,190.3 0.31 207.0 1.00 27.9 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.083 0.135 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.26 99.1 1,190.3 0.13 207.0 1.00 27.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 15 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.245 0.115 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.77 291.3 1,190.3 0.27 207.0 1.00 23.8 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.071 0.115 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.22 84.3 1,190.3 0.11 207.0 1.00 23.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.051 0.024 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.22 85.3 1,656.0 0.08 288.0 1.00 6.9 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.014 0.024 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.06 23.9 1,656.0 0.03 288.0 1.00 6.9 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0799 5.899 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 5.899 -0.0439 2.500 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.320 0.573 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.320 0.573 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.187 0.338 D Only 0.133 0.235 +D+S 0.320 0.573 +D+0.750S 0.273 0.488 +0.60D 0.080 0.141 S Only 0.187 0.338 Page 16 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Repetitive Member Stress Increase Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight NOT internally calculated and added Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft Varying Uniform Load : S= 0.06130->0.0 ksf, Extent = 0.0 13.50 ft, Trib Width = 1.333 ft Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.998: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 7.821ft 66.69 psi = = 1,190.25psi 2x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 2x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.322 : 1 0.000 ft = = 1,187.72psi Maximum Deflection 310 >=240 348 Ratio = 234 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.460 in 456 Ratio = >=240 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.193 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.602 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.255 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 17.50 ft 1 0.299 0.088 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.73 278.6 931.5 0.16 162.0 1.00 14.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.025 0.088 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.06 23.7 931.5 0.03 162.0 1.00 14.3 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.50 ft 1 0.998 0.322 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 3.13 1,187.7 1,190.3 0.75 207.0 1.00 66.7 1.00 Page 17 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.053 0.322 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.17 63.2 1,190.3 0.08 207.0 1.00 66.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.50 ft 1 0.806 0.258 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 2.53 959.9 1,190.3 0.60 207.0 1.00 53.4 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.045 0.258 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.14 53.3 1,190.3 0.07 207.0 1.00 53.4 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.50 ft 1 0.101 0.030 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.44 167.1 1,656.0 0.10 288.0 1.00 8.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.50 ft 2 0.009 0.030 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.04 14.2 1,656.0 0.02 288.0 1.00 8.6 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.6023 8.506 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 8.506 -0.2545 2.500 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.867 0.751 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.867 0.751 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.695 0.523 D Only 0.171 0.229 +D+S 0.867 0.751 +D+0.750S 0.693 0.621 +0.60D 0.103 0.137 S Only 0.695 0.523 Page 18 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Repetitive Member Stress Increase Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.967: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 10.324ft 49.93 psi = = 1,190.25psi 2x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 2x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.241 : 1 20.179 ft = = 1,150.70psi Maximum Deflection 332 >=240 297 Ratio = 194 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.495 in 508 Ratio = >=240 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.198 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.847 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.339 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 21.0 ft 1 0.513 0.128 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 1.26 477.7 931.5 0.23 162.0 1.00 20.7 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.036 0.128 0.90 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.09 33.9 931.5 0.04 162.0 1.00 20.7 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 21.0 ft 1 0.967 0.241 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 3.03 1,150.7 1,190.3 0.56 207.0 1.00 49.9 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.069 0.241 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.22 81.7 1,190.3 0.10 207.0 1.00 49.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 19 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF JOIST 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 21.0 ft 1 0.825 0.206 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 2.59 982.4 1,190.3 0.48 207.0 1.00 42.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.059 0.206 1.15 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.18 69.8 1,190.3 0.09 207.0 1.00 42.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 21.0 ft 1 0.173 0.043 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.76 286.6 1,656.0 0.14 288.0 1.00 12.4 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.012 0.043 1.60 1.000 1.15 1.00 1.00 0.05 20.4 1,656.0 0.03 288.0 1.00 12.4 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.8471 10.441 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 10.441 -0.3393 2.750 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.588 0.765 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.588 0.765 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.344 0.448 D Only 0.244 0.318 +D+S 0.588 0.765 +D+0.750S 0.502 0.653 +0.60D 0.146 0.191 S Only 0.344 0.448 Page 20 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V8 2,400.0 2,400.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 24.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 24.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.604: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 25.250ft 164.21 psi = = 2,510.35psi 5.5x24 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x24 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.539 : 1 23.275 ft = = 1,517.05psi Maximum Deflection 4967 >=360 608 Ratio = 2688 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.269 in 1124 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.026 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.498 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.048 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 25.250 ft 1 0.354 0.316 0.90 0.910 1.00 1.00 1.00 30.62 696.0 1,964.6 6.63 238.5 1.00 75.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 10.750 ft 2 0.325 0.316 0.90 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 30.62 696.0 2,139.8 4.57 238.5 1.00 75.3 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 25.250 ft 1 0.604 0.539 1.15 0.910 1.00 1.00 1.00 66.75 1,517.1 2,510.4 14.45 304.8 1.00 164.2 1.00 1.00 Length = 10.750 ft 2 0.555 0.539 1.15 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 66.75 1,517.1 2,734.1 9.97 304.8 1.00 164.2 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 21 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 25.250 ft 1 0.523 0.466 1.15 0.910 1.00 1.00 1.00 57.72 1,311.8 2,510.4 12.50 304.8 1.00 142.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 10.750 ft 2 0.480 0.466 1.15 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 57.72 1,311.8 2,734.1 8.62 304.8 1.00 142.0 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 25.250 ft 1 0.120 0.107 1.60 0.910 1.00 1.00 1.00 18.37 417.6 3,492.7 3.98 424.0 1.00 45.2 1.00 1.00 Length = 10.750 ft 2 0.110 0.107 1.60 0.991 1.00 1.00 1.00 18.37 417.6 3,804.0 2.74 424.0 1.00 45.2 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.4977 11.426 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 11.426 -0.0480 4.024 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 11.353 28.808 Max Upward from Load Combinations 11.353 28.808 Max Upward from Load Cases 6.144 15.591 Max Downward from all Load Conditio -0.251 Max Downward from Load Combinations -0.251 Max Downward from Load Cases (Resis -0.136 D Only 5.208 13.217 -0.115 +D+S 11.353 28.808 -0.251 +D+0.750S 9.817 24.910 -0.217 +0.60D 3.125 7.930 -0.069 S Only 6.144 15.591 -0.136 Page 22 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 24.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) Varying Uniform Load : S= 0.0->0.06130 ksf, Extent = 11.250 24.750 ft, Trib Width = 12.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.871: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 13.098ft 161.64 psi = = 2,515.38psi 5.5x24 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x24 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.530 : 1 22.763 ft = = 2,190.09psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 315 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.562 in 528 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.940 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.450 0.252 0.90 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 38.94 885.1 1,968.6 5.28 238.5 1.00 60.0 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.871 0.530 1.15 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 96.36 2,190.1 2,515.4 14.22 304.8 1.00 161.6 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.741 0.447 1.15 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 81.98 1,863.2 2,515.4 11.99 304.8 1.00 136.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.152 0.085 1.60 0.911 1.00 1.00 1.00 23.37 531.1 3,499.7 3.17 424.0 1.00 36.0 1.00 Page 23 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.9404 12.556 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 14.622 17.782 Max Upward from Load Combinations 14.622 17.782 Max Upward from Load Cases 8.328 11.488 D Only 6.294 6.294 +D+S 14.622 17.782 +D+0.750S 12.540 14.910 +0.60D 3.776 3.776 S Only 8.328 11.488 Page 24 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 20.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.944: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 11.500ft 140.63 psi = = 2,607.85psi 5.5x18 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x18 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.461 : 1 0.000 ft = = 2,461.87psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 227 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.658 in 419 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 1.213 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.552 0.270 0.90 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 27.87 1,126.0 2,040.9 4.25 238.5 1.00 64.3 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.944 0.461 1.15 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 60.93 2,461.9 2,607.8 9.28 304.8 1.00 140.6 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.816 0.399 1.15 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 52.67 2,127.9 2,607.8 8.02 304.8 1.00 121.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.186 0.091 1.60 0.945 1.00 1.00 1.00 16.72 675.6 3,628.3 2.55 424.0 1.00 38.6 1.00 Page 25 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 1.2129 11.584 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 10.597 10.597 Max Upward from Load Combinations 10.597 10.597 Max Upward from Load Cases 5.750 5.750 D Only 4.847 4.847 +D+S 10.597 10.597 +D+0.750S 9.159 9.159 +0.60D 2.908 2.908 S Only 5.750 5.750 Page 26 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 20.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.686: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 9.875ft 117.74 psi = = 2,647.88psi 5.5x18 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x18 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.386 : 1 18.308 ft = = 1,815.28psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 359 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.358 in 662 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.659 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 19.750 ft 1 0.401 0.226 0.90 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 20.55 830.3 2,072.3 3.55 238.5 1.00 53.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 19.750 ft 1 0.686 0.386 1.15 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 44.93 1,815.3 2,647.9 7.77 304.8 1.00 117.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 19.750 ft 1 0.593 0.334 1.15 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 38.83 1,569.0 2,647.9 6.72 304.8 1.00 101.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 19.750 ft 1 0.135 0.076 1.60 0.959 1.00 1.00 1.00 12.33 498.2 3,684.0 2.13 424.0 1.00 32.3 1.00 Page 27 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.6595 9.947 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 9.099 9.099 Max Upward from Load Combinations 9.099 9.099 Max Upward from Load Cases 4.938 4.938 D Only 4.162 4.162 +D+S 9.099 9.099 +D+0.750S 7.865 7.865 +0.60D 2.497 2.497 S Only 4.938 4.938 Page 28 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 20.0 ft, (ROOF BEAM) Varying Uniform Load : S= 0.0->0.06130 k/ft, Extent = 5.0 18.50 ft, Trib Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.611: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 9.318ft 111.85 psi = = 2,665.25psi 5.5x18 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x18 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.367 : 1 17.015 ft = = 1,628.12psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 427 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.287 in 773 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.519 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.349 0.208 0.90 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 18.03 728.5 2,085.8 3.27 238.5 1.00 49.6 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.611 0.367 1.15 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 40.30 1,628.1 2,665.2 7.38 304.8 1.00 111.8 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.526 0.316 1.15 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 34.73 1,403.2 2,665.2 6.35 304.8 1.00 96.3 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.118 0.070 1.60 0.966 1.00 1.00 1.00 10.82 437.1 3,708.2 1.96 424.0 1.00 29.7 1.00 Page 29 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.5190 9.318 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 8.624 8.837 Max Upward from Load Combinations 8.624 8.837 Max Upward from Load Cases 4.726 4.938 D Only 3.898 3.898 +D+S 8.624 8.837 +D+0.750S 7.443 7.602 +0.60D 2.339 2.339 S Only 4.726 4.938 Page 30 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 15.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.578: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.250ft 96.13 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x10.5 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x10.5 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.315 : 1 11.633 ft = = 1,594.43psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 377 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.217 in 691 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.398 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.50 ft 1 0.336 0.183 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.10 724.8 2,160.0 1.68 238.5 1.00 43.7 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.50 ft 1 0.578 0.315 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 13.43 1,594.4 2,760.0 3.70 304.8 1.00 96.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.50 ft 1 0.499 0.272 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 11.60 1,377.0 2,760.0 3.20 304.8 1.00 83.0 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.50 ft 1 0.113 0.062 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.66 434.9 3,840.0 1.01 424.0 1.00 26.2 1.00 Page 31 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.3978 6.296 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 4.297 4.297 Max Upward from Load Combinations 4.297 4.297 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.344 2.344 D Only 1.953 1.953 +D+S 4.297 4.297 +D+0.750S 3.711 3.711 +0.60D 1.172 1.172 S Only 2.344 2.344 Page 32 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1,000.0 1,000.0 1,500.0 625.0 1,700.0 620.0 180.0 675.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.517: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.000ft 40.21 psi = = 1,150.00psi 6x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.194 : 1 0.000 ft = = 594.59psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1089 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.079 in 1818 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.132 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.265 0.099 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.41 238.2 900.0 0.68 162.0 1.00 16.1 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.517 0.194 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.01 594.6 1,150.0 1.70 207.0 1.00 40.2 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.440 0.165 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.11 505.5 1,150.0 1.44 207.0 1.00 34.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.089 0.034 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.44 142.9 1,600.0 0.41 288.0 1.00 9.7 1.00 Page 33 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1322 6.044 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 2.002 2.002 Max Upward from Load Combinations 2.002 2.002 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.200 1.200 D Only 0.802 0.802 +D+S 2.002 2.002 +D+0.750S 1.702 1.702 +0.60D 0.481 0.481 S Only 1.200 1.200 Page 34 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 08 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1,000.0 1,000.0 1,500.0 625.0 1,700.0 620.0 180.0 675.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.2123, S = 0.4020 , Tributary Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.973: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.000ft 75.66 psi = = 1,150.00psi 6x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.366 : 1 0.000 ft = = 1,118.95psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 579 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.159 in 904 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.249 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.447 0.168 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.07 402.7 900.0 1.15 162.0 1.00 27.2 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.973 0.366 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 11.30 1,119.0 1,150.0 3.19 207.0 1.00 75.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.817 0.307 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 9.50 939.9 1,150.0 2.68 207.0 1.00 63.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.151 0.057 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.44 241.6 1,600.0 0.69 288.0 1.00 16.3 1.00 Page 35 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 08 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.2487 6.044 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 3.768 3.768 Max Upward from Load Combinations 3.768 3.768 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.412 2.412 D Only 1.356 1.356 +D+S 3.768 3.768 +D+0.750S 3.165 3.165 +0.60D 0.814 0.814 S Only 2.412 2.412 Page 36 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 09 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1350 1350 [PHONE REDACTED] 580 170 675 31.21 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.410: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.173ft 46.27 psi = = 1,552.50psi 6x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 195.50 psi = = Section used for this span 6x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.237 : 1 12.056 ft = = 636.74psi Maximum Deflection 1066 >=360 900 Ratio = 638 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.104 in 1502 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.062 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.173 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.103 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.210 0.121 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.58 255.1 1,215.0 0.78 153.0 1.00 18.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.041 0.121 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.51 50.0 1,215.0 0.24 153.0 1.00 18.5 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.410 0.237 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.43 636.7 1,552.5 1.95 195.5 1.00 46.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.080 0.237 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.26 124.9 1,552.5 0.60 195.5 1.00 46.3 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 37 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 09 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.349 0.201 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.47 541.3 1,552.5 1.66 195.5 1.00 39.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.068 0.201 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.07 106.2 1,552.5 0.51 195.5 1.00 39.3 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.071 0.041 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.55 153.1 2,160.0 0.47 272.0 1.00 11.1 1.00 1.00 Length = 2.750 ft 2 0.014 0.041 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.30 30.0 2,160.0 0.14 272.0 1.00 11.1 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1732 6.464 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 6.464 -0.1032 2.750 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 2.072 3.184 Max Upward from Load Combinations 2.072 3.184 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.242 1.908 D Only 0.830 1.276 +D+S 2.072 3.184 +D+0.750S 1.762 2.707 +0.60D 0.498 0.765 S Only 1.242 1.908 Page 38 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 10 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1,000.0 1,000.0 1,500.0 625.0 1,700.0 620.0 180.0 675.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 k/ft, Extent = 0.0 6.0 ft, Tributary Width = 1.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.5570, S = 0.8120 k @ 6.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Extent = 6.0 12.0 ft, Tributary Width = 15.750->11.50 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.851: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.175ft 66.14 psi = = 1,150.00psi 6x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.320 : 1 11.080 ft = = 978.39psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 725 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.118 in 1216 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.199 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.439 0.163 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.99 394.8 900.0 1.11 162.0 1.00 26.4 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.851 0.320 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 9.88 978.4 1,150.0 2.79 207.0 1.00 66.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.724 0.271 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 8.41 832.5 1,150.0 2.37 207.0 1.00 56.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 39 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 10 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.148 0.055 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.39 236.9 1,600.0 0.67 288.0 1.00 15.8 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1986 6.263 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.807 3.237 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.807 3.237 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.056 1.950 D Only 0.751 1.287 +D+S 1.807 3.237 +D+0.750S 1.543 2.749 +0.60D 0.450 0.772 S Only 1.056 1.950 Page 40 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 11 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1,000.0 1,000.0 1,500.0 625.0 1,700.0 620.0 180.0 675.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Varying Uniform Load : D= 0.0150->0.0, S= 0.0250->0.0 ksf, Extent = 0.0 12.0 ft, Trib Width = 11.50 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.387: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 5.124ft 35.64 psi = = 1,150.00psi 6x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.172 : 1 0.000 ft = = 444.49psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1489 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.057 in 2523 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.097 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.202 0.089 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.84 181.6 900.0 0.61 162.0 1.00 14.4 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.387 0.172 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.49 444.5 1,150.0 1.50 207.0 1.00 35.6 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.329 0.147 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.83 378.8 1,150.0 1.28 207.0 1.00 30.3 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.068 0.030 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.10 109.0 1,600.0 0.36 288.0 1.00 8.6 1.00 Page 41 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 11 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0967 5.825 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.922 1.002 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.922 1.002 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.150 0.575 D Only 0.772 0.427 +D+S 1.922 1.002 +D+0.750S 1.635 0.859 +0.60D 0.463 0.256 S Only 1.150 0.575 Page 42 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 12 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight NOT internally calculated and added Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 13.0->6.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 9.0->4.0 ft Load for Span Number 2 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 6.0->0.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 4.0->0.0 ft Load for Span Number 3 Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.50->0.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.645: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 2 Location of maximum on span 0.000ft 121.51 psi = = 2,127.50psi 5.5x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.399 : 1 16.380 ft = = 1,372.29psi Maximum Deflection 2280 >=240 363 Ratio = 1425 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.356 in 581 Ratio = >=240 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.075 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.570 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.120 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.274 0.191 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.52 592.8 2,160.0 2.00 238.5 1.00 45.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.250 ft 2 0.309 0.191 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.66 514.6 1,665.0 0.96 238.5 1.00 45.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 3 0.006 0.191 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.11 9.7 1,665.0 0.05 238.5 1.00 45.6 1.00 Page 43 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 12 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:41PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.573 0.399 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 17.39 1,580.9 2,760.0 5.35 304.8 1.00 121.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.250 ft 2 0.645 0.399 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 15.10 1,372.3 2,127.5 2.57 304.8 1.00 121.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 3 0.012 0.399 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.29 26.0 2,127.5 0.13 304.8 1.00 121.5 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.483 0.336 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 14.67 1,333.9 2,760.0 4.51 304.8 1.00 102.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.250 ft 2 0.544 0.336 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 12.74 1,157.9 2,127.5 2.17 304.8 1.00 102.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 3 0.010 0.336 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.24 21.9 2,127.5 0.11 304.8 1.00 102.5 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.093 0.064 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.91 355.7 3,840.0 1.20 424.0 1.00 27.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.250 ft 2 0.104 0.064 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.40 308.8 2,960.0 0.58 424.0 1.00 27.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 3 0.002 0.064 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.06 5.8 2,960.0 0.03 424.0 1.00 27.3 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.5697 7.828 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 7.828 -0.1200 5.149 +D+S 3 0.0632 3.500 0.0000 5.149 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Support 4 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 5.335 8.644 0.156 Max Upward from Load Combinations 5.335 8.644 0.156 Max Upward from Load Cases 3.334 5.403 0.097 D Only 2.001 3.242 0.058 +D+S 5.335 8.644 0.156 +D+0.750S 4.501 7.294 0.131 +0.60D 1.200 1.945 0.035 S Only 3.334 5.403 0.097 Page 44 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 13 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight NOT internally calculated and added Point Load : D = 3.424, S = 5.403 k @ 10.250 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.864: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 10.263ft 88.92 psi = = 2,714.29psi 5.5x15 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x15 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.292 : 1 10.263 ft = = 2,343.87psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 310 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.438 in 507 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.715 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.428 0.145 0.90 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 15.63 909.2 2,124.2 1.90 238.5 1.00 34.5 1.00 1.00 +D+S 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.864 0.292 1.15 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 40.29 2,343.9 2,714.3 4.89 304.8 1.00 88.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.731 0.247 1.15 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 34.12 1,985.2 2,714.3 4.14 304.8 1.00 75.3 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.144 0.049 1.60 0.983 1.00 1.00 1.00 9.38 545.5 3,776.4 1.14 424.0 1.00 20.7 1.00 Page 45 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 13 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.7153 9.588 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 3.936 4.891 Max Upward from Load Combinations 3.936 4.891 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.409 2.994 D Only 1.527 1.897 +D+S 3.936 4.891 +D+0.750S 3.334 4.142 +0.60D 0.916 1.138 S Only 2.409 2.994 Page 46 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 14 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight NOT internally calculated and added Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 6.0->1.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 9.0->4.0 ft Load for Span Number 2 Varying Uniform Load : D= 0.020->0.0, S= 0.0250->0.0 ksf, Extent = 0.0 3.250 ft, Trib Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.553: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 7.902ft 88.19 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.289 : 1 0.000 ft = = 1,525.45psi Maximum Deflection 386 >=360 327 Ratio = 214 >=180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.351 in 590 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection -0.201 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.631 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection -0.363 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only Span: 2 : S Only Span: 1 : +D+S Span: 2 : +D+S Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.314 0.164 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 7.46 678.0 2,160.0 1.72 238.5 1.00 39.2 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.250 ft 2 0.004 0.164 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.07 6.4 1,665.0 0.03 238.5 1.00 39.2 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.553 0.289 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 16.78 1,525.4 2,760.0 3.88 304.8 1.00 88.2 1.00 Page 47 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 14 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 3.250 ft 2 0.007 0.289 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.16 14.4 2,127.5 0.07 304.8 1.00 88.2 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.476 0.249 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 14.45 1,313.6 2,760.0 3.34 304.8 1.00 75.9 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.250 ft 2 0.006 0.249 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.14 12.4 2,127.5 0.06 304.8 1.00 75.9 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 17.250 ft 1 0.106 0.055 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.47 406.8 3,840.0 1.03 424.0 1.00 23.5 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.250 ft 2 0.001 0.055 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.04 3.8 2,960.0 0.02 424.0 1.00 23.5 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.6314 8.480 0.0000 0.000 +D+S 2 0.0000 8.480 -0.3625 3.250 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Support 3 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 4.519 3.390 Max Upward from Load Combinations 4.519 3.390 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.511 1.883 D Only 2.008 1.507 +D+S 4.519 3.390 +D+0.750S 3.891 2.919 +0.60D 1.205 0.904 S Only 2.511 1.883 Page 48 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 15 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight NOT internally calculated and added Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 10.0->0.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Extent = 10.250 18.50 ft, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Point Load : D = 1.507, S = 1.883 k @ 10.250 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.828: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 10.263ft 85.39 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x12 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x12 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.280 : 1 0.000 ft = = 2,284.27psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 228 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.569 in 390 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.969 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.442 0.144 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 10.50 954.4 2,160.0 1.51 238.5 1.00 34.4 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.828 0.280 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 25.13 2,284.3 2,760.0 3.76 304.8 1.00 85.4 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.707 0.238 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 21.47 1,951.8 2,760.0 3.20 304.8 1.00 72.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.149 0.049 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.30 572.6 3,840.0 0.91 424.0 1.00 20.6 1.00 Page 49 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 15 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.9695 9.385 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 4.126 3.624 Max Upward from Load Combinations 4.126 3.624 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.473 2.135 D Only 1.652 1.490 +D+S 4.126 3.624 +D+0.750S 3.507 3.091 +0.60D 0.991 0.894 S Only 2.473 2.135 Page 50 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 16 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design iLevel Truss Joist MicroLam LVL 2.0 E 2,600.0 2,600.0 2,510.0 750.0 2,000.0 1,016.54 285.0 1,555.0 42.010 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 6.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.0270 k/ft, Extent = 0.0 8.250 ft, Tributary Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.128: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.125ft 35.27 psi = = 2,994.26psi 2-1.75x11.87 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 327.75 psi = = Section used for this span 2-1.75x11.87 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.108 : 1 0.000 ft = = 383.66psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 2983 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.019 in 5211 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.033 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 8.250 ft 1 0.070 0.059 0.90 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.12 164.0 2,343.3 0.42 256.5 1.00 15.1 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 8.250 ft 1 0.128 0.108 1.15 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.63 383.7 2,994.3 0.98 327.8 1.00 35.3 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 8.250 ft 1 0.110 0.092 1.15 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.25 328.7 2,994.3 0.84 327.8 1.00 30.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 8.250 ft 1 0.024 0.020 1.60 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 98.4 4,165.9 0.25 456.0 1.00 9.0 1.00 Page 51 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 16 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0332 4.155 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.275 1.275 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.275 1.275 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.730 0.730 D Only 0.545 0.545 +D+S 1.275 1.275 +D+0.750S 1.093 1.093 +0.60D 0.327 0.327 S Only 0.730 0.730 Page 52 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 17 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design iLevel Truss Joist MicroLam LVL 2.0 E 2,600.0 2,600.0 2,510.0 750.0 2,000.0 1,016.54 285.0 1,555.0 42.010 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.0270 , Tributary Width = 1.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.5190, S = 0.730 k @ 2.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.5190, S = 0.730 k @ 10.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.235: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.000ft 68.55 psi = = 2,994.26psi 2-1.75x11.87 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 327.75 psi = = Section used for this span 2-1.75x11.87 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.209 : 1 0.000 ft = = 703.47psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1035 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.082 in 1755 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.139 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.123 0.110 0.90 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.98 288.3 2,343.3 0.78 256.5 1.00 28.2 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.235 0.209 1.15 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.82 703.5 2,994.3 1.90 327.8 1.00 68.5 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.200 0.178 1.15 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.11 599.7 2,994.3 1.62 327.8 1.00 58.5 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 53 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 17 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.042 0.037 1.60 1.001 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.19 173.0 4,165.9 0.47 456.0 1.00 16.9 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1391 6.044 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 2.024 2.024 Max Upward from Load Combinations 2.024 2.024 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.192 1.192 D Only 0.832 0.832 +D+S 2.024 2.024 +D+0.750S 1.726 1.726 +0.60D 0.499 0.499 S Only 1.192 1.192 Page 54 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 18 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.1 1,000.0 1,000.0 1,500.0 625.0 1,700.0 620.0 180.0 675.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.02360 k/ft, Extent = 0.0 12.0 ft, Tributary Width = 1.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.1120, S = 0.1310 k @ 4.250 ft Point Load : D = 0.1120, S = 0.1310 k @ 7.750 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Extent = 0.0 4.250 ft, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Extent = 7.750 12.0 ft, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.568: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.000ft 39.08 psi = = 1,150.00psi 6x10 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6x10 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.189 : 1 0.000 ft = = 652.82psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 798 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.102 in 1405 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.180 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.313 0.104 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.94 281.6 900.0 0.59 162.0 1.00 16.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.568 0.189 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.50 652.8 1,150.0 1.36 207.0 1.00 39.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 55 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: ROOF BEAM 18 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.487 0.162 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.86 560.0 1,150.0 1.17 207.0 1.00 33.5 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 12.0 ft 1 0.106 0.035 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.17 169.0 1,600.0 0.35 288.0 1.00 10.1 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1804 6.044 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.566 1.566 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.566 1.566 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.891 0.891 D Only 0.675 0.675 +D+S 1.566 1.566 +D+0.750S 1.343 1.343 +0.60D 0.405 0.405 S Only 0.891 0.891 Page 56 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2400 1850 1650 650 1800 [PHONE REDACTED] 31.21 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1600ksi 850ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Point Load : D = 5.208, S = 6.144 k @ 6.50 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.846: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.500ft 117.84 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x15 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x15 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.387 : 1 11.766 ft = = 2,334.46psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 433 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.193 in 808 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.360 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.500 0.230 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 18.57 1,080.5 2,160.0 3.01 238.5 1.00 54.8 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.846 0.387 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 40.12 2,334.5 2,760.0 6.48 304.8 1.00 117.8 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.732 0.335 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 34.74 2,021.0 2,760.0 5.61 304.8 1.00 102.1 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.169 0.078 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 11.14 648.3 3,840.0 1.81 424.0 1.00 32.9 1.00 Page 57 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.3597 6.547 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 6.670 6.670 Max Upward from Load Combinations 6.670 6.670 Max Upward from Load Cases 3.560 3.560 D Only 3.110 3.110 +D+S 6.670 6.670 +D+0.750S 5.780 5.780 +0.60D 1.866 1.866 S Only 3.560 3.560 Page 58 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.06130 , Tributary Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.775: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 3.250ft 63.36 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.306 : 1 6.049 ft = = 1,043.23psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 516 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.097 in 804 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.151 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 6.50 ft 1 0.355 0.140 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.55 374.1 1,053.0 0.29 162.0 1.00 22.7 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.50 ft 1 0.775 0.306 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.53 1,043.2 1,345.5 0.81 207.0 1.00 63.4 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.50 ft 1 0.651 0.257 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.29 876.0 1,345.5 0.68 207.0 1.00 53.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.50 ft 1 0.120 0.047 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.33 224.5 1,872.0 0.17 288.0 1.00 13.6 1.00 Page 59 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1511 3.274 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.944 0.944 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.944 0.944 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.605 0.605 D Only 0.339 0.339 +D+S 0.944 0.944 +D+0.750S 0.793 0.793 +0.60D 0.203 0.203 S Only 0.605 0.605 Page 60 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.282: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 36.97 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.179 : 1 3.053 ft = = 379.22psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 2636 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.009 in 4800 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.016 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.162 0.103 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25 171.0 1,053.0 0.21 162.0 1.00 16.7 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.282 0.179 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.56 379.2 1,345.5 0.47 207.0 1.00 37.0 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.243 0.154 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.48 327.2 1,345.5 0.41 207.0 1.00 31.9 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.055 0.035 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.15 102.6 1,872.0 0.13 288.0 1.00 10.0 1.00 Page 61 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0159 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.637 0.637 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.637 0.637 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.350 0.350 D Only 0.287 0.287 +D+S 0.637 0.637 +D+0.750S 0.550 0.550 +0.60D 0.172 0.172 S Only 0.350 0.350 Page 62 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.108: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 14.13 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.068 : 1 3.053 ft = = 144.92psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 6899 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.003 in 12802 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.006 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.063 0.040 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.10 66.8 1,053.0 0.08 162.0 1.00 6.5 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.108 0.068 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.21 144.9 1,345.5 0.18 207.0 1.00 14.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.093 0.059 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.18 125.4 1,345.5 0.16 207.0 1.00 12.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.021 0.014 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.06 40.1 1,872.0 0.05 288.0 1.00 3.9 1.00 Page 63 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0061 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.244 0.244 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.244 0.244 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.131 0.131 D Only 0.112 0.112 +D+S 0.244 0.244 +D+0.750S 0.211 0.211 +0.60D 0.067 0.067 S Only 0.131 0.131 Page 64 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 5.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.756: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.750ft 56.69 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x8 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x8 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.274 : 1 8.911 ft = = 1,017.69psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 477 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.130 in 879 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.239 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.442 0.160 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.19 465.8 1,053.0 0.44 162.0 1.00 25.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.756 0.274 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.60 1,017.7 1,345.5 0.96 207.0 1.00 56.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.654 0.237 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.25 879.7 1,345.5 0.83 207.0 1.00 49.0 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.149 0.054 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.71 279.5 1,872.0 0.26 288.0 1.00 15.6 1.00 Page 65 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.2389 4.785 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.095 1.095 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.095 1.095 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.594 0.594 D Only 0.501 0.501 +D+S 1.095 1.095 +D+0.750S 0.946 0.946 +0.60D 0.301 0.301 S Only 0.594 0.594 Page 66 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.282: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 36.97 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.179 : 1 3.053 ft = = 379.22psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 2636 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.009 in 4800 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.016 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.162 0.103 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25 171.0 1,053.0 0.21 162.0 1.00 16.7 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.282 0.179 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.56 379.2 1,345.5 0.47 207.0 1.00 37.0 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.243 0.154 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.48 327.2 1,345.5 0.41 207.0 1.00 31.9 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.055 0.035 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.15 102.6 1,872.0 0.13 288.0 1.00 10.0 1.00 Page 67 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0159 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.637 0.637 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.637 0.637 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.350 0.350 D Only 0.287 0.287 +D+S 0.637 0.637 +D+0.750S 0.550 0.550 +0.60D 0.172 0.172 S Only 0.350 0.350 Page 68 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 15.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.526: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 68.95 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.333 : 1 3.053 ft = = 707.24psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1413 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.016 in 2560 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.030 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.301 0.191 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.47 316.7 1,053.0 0.40 162.0 1.00 30.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.526 0.333 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.04 707.2 1,345.5 0.88 207.0 1.00 69.0 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.453 0.287 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.90 609.6 1,345.5 0.76 207.0 1.00 59.4 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.102 0.064 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.28 190.0 1,872.0 0.24 288.0 1.00 18.5 1.00 Page 69 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0297 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.189 1.189 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.189 1.189 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.656 0.656 D Only 0.532 0.532 +D+S 1.189 1.189 +D+0.750S 1.024 1.024 +0.60D 0.319 0.319 S Only 0.656 0.656 Page 70 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 08 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2400 1850 1650 650 1800 [PHONE REDACTED] 31.21 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1600ksi 850ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 14.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.380: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.500ft 73.34 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x9 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x9 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.241 : 1 8.277 ft = = 1,048.46psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 682 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.086 in 1249 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.158 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 9.0 ft 1 0.220 0.140 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.94 475.7 2,160.0 1.10 238.5 1.00 33.3 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.0 ft 1 0.380 0.241 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.49 1,048.5 2,760.0 2.42 304.8 1.00 73.3 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.0 ft 1 0.328 0.208 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.60 905.3 2,760.0 2.09 304.8 1.00 63.3 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.0 ft 1 0.074 0.047 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.77 285.4 3,840.0 0.66 424.0 1.00 20.0 1.00 Page 71 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 08 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1582 4.533 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 2.883 2.883 Max Upward from Load Combinations 2.883 2.883 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.575 1.575 D Only 1.308 1.308 +D+S 2.883 2.883 +D+0.750S 2.490 2.490 +0.60D 0.785 0.785 S Only 1.575 1.575 Page 72 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 73 of 150 TRUSS DESIGN ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 1 Page 74 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 2 Page 75 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 3 Page 76 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 4 Page 77 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 5 Page 78 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 6 Page 79 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 7 Page 80 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 8 Page 81 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 9 Page 82 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 10 Node Boundary Conditions Node Label X [k/in] Y [k/in] Z [k/in] X Rot [k-ft/rad] Y Rot [k-ft/rad] 1 ALL Fixed Fixed 2 N25 Reaction Reaction 3 N26 Reaction 4 N30 Reaction 5 N27 Reaction 6 N29 Reaction 7 N28 Reaction 8 N31 Reaction Basic Load Cases BLC Description Category Y Gravity Distributed 1 DL DL -1 4 2 SL SL 6 3 WL WL 4 Load Combinations Description Solve P-Delta BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor 1 Deflection 1 Yes Y DL 1 2 Deflection 2 Yes Y LL 1 3 Deflection 3 Yes Y DL 1 LL 1 4 IBC 21/ASCE ASD 1 Yes Y DL 1 5 IBC 21/ASCE ASD 2 Yes Y DL 1 LL 1 LLS 1 6 IBC 21/ASCE ASD 3 Yes Y DL 1 SL 1 SLN 1 7 IBC 21/ASCE ASD 4 Yes Y DL 1 LL 0.75 LLS 0.75 SL 0.75 SLN 0.75 8 IBC 16-12 Yes Y DL 1 WL 0.6 9 IBC 16-13 Yes Y DL 1 WL 0.45 LL 0.75 LLS 0.75 10 IBC 16-13 Yes Y DL 1 WL 0.45 LL 0.75 LLS 0.75 SL 0.75 SLN 0.75 11 IBC 16-15 Yes Y DL 0.6 WL 0.6 Envelope Node Reactions Node Label X [lb] LC Y [lb] LC Z [lb] LC MX [lb-ft] LC MY [lb-ft] LC MZ [lb-ft] LC 1 N25 max 0 7 25176.833 6 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 2 min 0 2 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 3 N26 max 0 11 25176.833 6 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 Page 83 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 11 Envelope Node Reactions (Continued) Node Label X [lb] LC Y [lb] LC Z [lb] LC MX [lb-ft] LC MY [lb-ft] LC MZ [lb-ft] LC 4 min 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 5 N30 max 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 6 min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 N27 max 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 8 min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 9 N29 max 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 LOCKED 10 min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 LOCKED 11 N28 max 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 12 min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 13 N31 max 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 14 min 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 15 N32 max NC NC NC NC NC LOCKED 16 min NC NC NC NC NC LOCKED 17 Totals: max 0 7 50353.666 6 0 11 18 min 0 2 0 2 0 1 Envelope Maximum Member Section Forces Member Axial[lb] Loc[ft] LC y Shear[lb] Loc[ft] LC z Shear[lb] Loc[ft] LC Torque[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC y-y Moment[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC z-z Moment[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC 1 M29 max 29808.66 7.682 6 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 2 min 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 3 M30 max 29808.66 7.682 6 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 0 7.682 11 4 min 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 5 M31 max 37888.822 0 6 5221.768 0 6 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 6 min 0 0 2 -5221.768 20.433 6 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -26674.142 10.217 6 7 M32 max 37888.822 0 6 5221.768 0 6 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 0 20.433 11 8 min 0 0 2 -5221.768 20.433 6 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -26674.142 10.217 6 9 M33 max 0 13.511 2 0 13.511 11 0 13.511 11 0 13.511 11 0 13.511 11 0 13.511 11 10 min -21333.693 0 6 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 M34 max 0 18.405 2 361.768 0 7 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 12 min -31681.485 18.405 6 -361.768 18.405 9 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -1664.612 9.203 7 13 M35 max 0 18.405 2 361.768 0 6 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 14 min -31681.485 18.405 6 -361.768 18.405 10 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -1664.612 9.203 6 15 M53 max 5254.426 0 6 24658.577 0 6 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 2 16 min 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -283871.375 14.315 6 17 M54 max 5254.426 0 6 24658.577 0 6 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 11 0 14.315 2 18 min 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -283871.375 14.315 6 19 M59 max 0 18.405 2 0 18.405 2 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 20 min -3476.377 18.405 6 -16267.48118.405 6 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -283871.375 0 6 Page 84 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Company Designer Job Number Model Name : : : : Cushing Terrell sierracoalson Checked By : 9/9/2025 8:08:54 PM RISA-3D Version 22 [ Starr EC_Trusses.r3d ] Page 12 Envelope Maximum Member Section Forces (Continued) Member Axial[lb] Loc[ft] LC y Shear[lb] Loc[ft] LC z Shear[lb] Loc[ft] LC Torque[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC y-y Moment[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC z-z Moment[lb-ft] Loc[ft] LC 21 M60 max 0 18.405 2 0 18.405 2 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 0 18.405 11 22 min -3476.377 18.405 6 -16267.48118.405 6 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 -283871.375 0 6 Envelope AWC NDS-18 / ASD Member Wood Code Checks Member Shape Code Check Loc[ft] LC Shear Check Loc[ft] Dir LC Fc' [ksi] Ft' [ksi] Fb1' [ksi] Fb2' [ksi] Fv' [ksi] RB CL CP Eqn 1 M29 12.25X13.5FS 0.1 7.682 6 0 7.682 z 11 1.809 1.265 2.757 1.667 0.368 2.88 0.999 0.983 3.6.3 2 M30 12.25X13.5FS 0.1 7.682 6 0 7.682 z 11 1.809 1.265 2.757 1.667 0.368 2.88 0.999 0.983 3.6.3 3 M31 12.25X13.5FS 0.401 10.217 6 0.155 20.433 y 6 1.356 1.265 2.507 1.667 0.305 4.697 0.997 0.737 3.9-3 4 M32 12.25X13.5FS 0.401 10.217 6 0.155 20.433 y 6 1.356 1.265 2.507 1.667 0.305 4.697 0.997 0.737 3.9-3 5 M33 12.25X13.5FS 0.102 0 6 0 13.511 z 11 1.71 1.265 2.613 1.667 0.368 3.819 0.998 0.93 3.9-1 6 M34 12.25X13.5FS 0.171 9.203 6 0.014 18.405 y 4 1.494 1.265 2.533 1.667 0.239 4.458 0.997 0.812 3.9-1 7 M35 12.25X13.5FS 0.171 9.203 6 0.014 18.405 y 4 1.494 1.265 2.533 1.667 0.239 4.458 0.997 0.812 3.9-1 8 M53 12.25X31.5FS 0.705 14.315 6 0.315 0 y 6 1.686 1.265 2.387 1.667 0.305 6.005 0.995 0.916 3.9-3 9 M54 12.25X31.5FS 0.705 14.315 6 0.315 0 y 6 1.686 1.265 2.387 1.667 0.305 6.005 0.995 0.916 3.9-3 10 M59 12.25X31.5FS 0.722 0 6 0.208 18.405 y 6 1.494 1.265 2.327 1.667 0.305 6.809 0.993 0.812 3.9-3 11 M60 12.25X31.5FS 0.722 0 6 0.208 18.405 y 6 1.494 1.265 2.327 1.667 0.305 6.809 0.993 0.812 3.9-3 Page 85 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- KNIFE PLATE DESIGN Star Event Center Subject: GL TRUSS CONNECTIONS COSTAR_EC Originator: SJC Checker: Dowel Diameter 1 in Main Member Bearing Angle (θm): 0 deg Dowel Root Diameter (Dr): 1 in Main Member Specific Gravity (Gm): 0 Dowel Bending Yield Strength (Fyb): 45000 psi Side Member Bearing Angle (θs): 0 deg Main Member Dowel Brg Length (lm): 0.5 in Side Member Specific Gravity (Gs): 0.50 Side Member Dowel Brg Length (ls): 5.875 in Main Member Dowel Brg Str ∥ grain (Fem∥): 0 psi Main Member Dowel Brg Str (Fem): 87000 psi Main Member Dowel Brg Str ⊥ grain (Fem⊥): 0 psi Side Member Dowel Brg Str (Fes): 6440 psi Side Member Dowel Brg Str ∥ grain (Fes∥): 6440 psi Load Duration Factor (CD): 1.15 Side Member Dowel Brg Str ⊥ grain (Fes⊥): 2233 psi Reduction Term, Rd Max angle of load to grain ≤ θ ≤ 90°) for any member in a connection 0.0 deg Kθ: 1.00 Yield Modes Im, Is (Rd): 4 Yield Mode II (Rd): 3.6 Yield Modes IIIm, IIIs, IV (Rd): 3.2 Re: 13.509 k1: 0.4190 Rt: 0.085 k2: 7.2259 k3: 0.5176 Yield Modes Single Shear Double Shear Im: Z = 10875.0 lbs Im: Z = 10875.0 lbs Is: Z = 9458.8 lbs Is: Z = 18917.5 lbs II: Z = 4403.5 lbs N/A IIIm: Z = 3505.8 lbs N/A IIIs: Z = 5330.2 lbs IIIm: Z = 10660.5 lbs IV: Z = 4191.3 lbs IV: Z = 8382.6 lbs Job Name: Job Number: Page 86 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 87 of 150 FLOOR FRAMING DESIGN ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 88 of 150 FLOOR FRAMING CALC MAPS WD-3 WD-3 B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 WD-1 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 TRUSS REF 1/S302 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 5 1/2"X12" GLB 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 6X12 S302 1 @ 2x12 2'-0" 5 1/2"X12" GLB (2-SPAN) POST DOWN TO BEAM W/ OSB SPLINES TYP AT TIMBER TRUSSES W/ OSB SPLINES TYP AT TIMBER TRUSSES @ 2x12 2'-0" H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 5 1/2"X10 1/2" GLB H1 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 6X10 4x6 4x6 4x6 H4 H3 H5 H7 H5 H3 H4 H4 H4 6 3/4"X27" GLB H1 6 3/4"X30" GLB 1 3/4"X18" LVL H1 1 3/4x18 LVL @ 18" TJI 360 1'-4" @ 18" TJI 360 1'-4" 5 1/2"X18" GLB (2-SPAN) 5 S211 7 S211 W/ TOP PLATE SW-B 2 SIMPSON ST6224 STRAP TO TOP PLATE EA SIDE OF BEAM @ 16" TJI 210 1'-4" GL BEAM REF S103 GL BEAM REF S103 GL BEAM REF S103 W/ 2x TRIMMER EACH SIDE 5 1/2"X15" GLB 6X6 POST FROM HIP BEAM TO LOW BEAM 4 S211 5 S211 8 S213 HUC610 HANGER HEADER TO POST 10 S213 6 S211 11 S213 POST FROM GL BEAM TO HDR BELOW H1 1 S212 4 S213 12 S213 5 S213 13 S213 14 S213 5 S213 5 1/2"X18" GLB 12 S213 1 S214 16 S213 5 1/2"X12" GLB 15 S213 9 S213 SW-B SW-B W/ TOP PLATE SW-A W/ TOP PLATE SW-A 2 2 FLOOR JOIST 01 FLOOR JOIST 02 FLOOR BEAM 01 FLOOR BEAM 04 FLOOR BEAM 02 FLOOR BEAM 06 HDR 10 HDR 09 HDR 11 HDR 11 HDR 12 HDR 13 HDR 14 FLOOR JOIST 03 HDR 15 HDR 15 HDR 16 HDR 16 HDR 17 FLOOR BEAM 05 FLOOR BEAM 04 FLOOR BEAM 04 FLOOR BEAM 03 FLOOR BEAM 03 HDR 06 DL = 4.508 K L = 19.661 K DL = 4.743 K LL = 17.311 K SL = 0.788 K DL = 4.972 K LL = 21.950 K DL = 4.926 K LL = 21.158 K DL = 0.492 K SL = 1.733 K DL = 0.492 K LL = 1.733 K DL = 1.438 K LL = 5.750 K DL = 3.311 K LL = 13.850 K DL = 3.723 K LL = 7.400 K SL = 2.904 K DL = 3.585 K LL = 15.500 K FLOOR BEAM 07 DL = 0.330 K LL = 1.300 K DL = 0.330 K LL = 1.300 K DL = 0.526 K LL = 2.581 K DL = 0.526 K LL = 2.581 K DL = 0.371 K LL = 0.675 K SL = 0.317 K DL = 1.222 K LL = 0.975 K SL = 1.816 K DL = 0.339 K SL = 0.605 K DL = 3.898 K SL = 4.938 K DL = 3.310 K SL = 4.550 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.413 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.481 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.413 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.481 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.394 K SL = 4.478 K DL = 1.394 K SL = 4.478 K ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 1298 @ 5 1/2" 1298 (2.65") Passed (100%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (Alt Spans) Shear (lbs) 1814 @ 19' 8 1/2" 2425 Passed (75%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) -5703 @ 19' 11 1/4" 9465 Passed (60%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.285 @ 9' 5 3/16" 0.487 Passed (L/820) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (Alt Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 0.338 @ 9' 4 13/16" 0.974 Passed (L/691) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (Alt Spans) TJ-Pro™ Rating 58 30 Passed Member Length : 29' 11 1/2" System : Floor Member Type : Joist Building Use : Commercial Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD • Deflection criteria: LL (L/480) and TL (L/240). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • -270 lbs uplift at support located at 30' Strapping or other restraint may be required. • A structural analysis of the deck has not been performed. • Deflection analysis is based on composite action with a single layer of 23/32" Panel (24" Span Rating) that is glued and nailed down. • Additional considerations for the TJ-Pro™ Rating include: 5/8" Gypsum ceiling. • Blocking Panels are assumed to carry no loads applied directly above them and the full load is applied to the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. • ² Required Bearing Length / Required Bearing Length with Web Stiffeners Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Floor Live Factored Accessories Details 1 - Hanger on 18" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 2.65" / - ² 223 1149 1372 See note ¹ 2 - Stud wall - SPF 5.50" 5.50" 4.84" 539 2695 3234 Blocking, Web Stiffeners B1W 3 - Hanger on 18" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.75" / - ² 61 699/-331 760/-270 See note ¹ W •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 5' 1" o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 4' 11" o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 1 - Top Mount Hanger BA2.37/18 3.00" 6-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 2-10dx1.5 3 - Top Mount Hanger MIT3518 2.50" 4-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 Web Stiffeners • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Floor Live Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.00) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 30' 10 1/2" 16" 20.0 100.0 Default Commercial Load Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, FLOOR JOIST 01 1 piece(s) 18" TJI® 360 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 3 / 12 Page 89 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 1127 @ 14' 5 1/2" 1127 (1.94") Passed (100%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Shear (lbs) 1127 @ 14' 5 1/2" 2425 Passed (46%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) 3967 @ 7' 5" 9465 Passed (42%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.133 @ 7' 5" 0.352 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 0.159 @ 7' 5" 0.704 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) TJ-Pro™ Rating 65 30 Passed Member Length : 14' 4 1/4" System : Floor Member Type : Joist Building Use : Commercial Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD • Deflection criteria: LL (L/480) and TL (L/240). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • A structural analysis of the deck has not been performed. • Deflection analysis is based on composite action with a single layer of 23/32" Panel (24" Span Rating) that is glued and nailed down. • Additional considerations for the TJ-Pro™ Rating include: 5/8" Gypsum ceiling. • Rim Board is assumed to carry all loads applied directly above it, bypassing the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. • ² Required Bearing Length / Required Bearing Length with Web Stiffeners Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Floor Live Factored Accessories Details 1 - Stud wall - DF 5.50" 4.25" 2.12" [PHONE REDACTED] 1 1/4" Rim Board A3 2 - Hanger on 18" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.94" / - ² 200 1000 1200 See note ¹ •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 6' o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 14' 4" o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 2 - Top Mount Hanger MIT3518 2.50" 4-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 2-10dx1.5 • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Floor Live Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.00) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 14' 11" 16" 20.0 100.0 Default Commercial Load Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, FLOOR JOIST 02 1 piece(s) 18" TJI® 360 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 5 / 12 Page 90 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Design Results Actual @ Location Allowed Result LDF Load: Combination (Pattern) Member Reaction (lbs) 3066 @ 16' 8 1/4" 3000 (5.25") Passed (102%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Shear (lbs) 1558 @ 16' 5 1/2" 2425 Passed (64%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Moment (Ft-lbs) -4729 @ 16' 8 1/4" 9465 Passed (50%) 1.00 1.0 D + 1.0 L (All Spans) Live Load Defl. (in) 0.167 @ 8' 5/8" 0.408 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (Alt Spans) Total Load Defl. (in) 0.194 @ 7' 11 11/16" 0.816 Passed (L/999+) 1.0 D + 1.0 L (Alt Spans) TJ-Pro™ Rating 64 30 Passed Member Length : 30' 9 3/4" System : Floor Member Type : Joist Building Use : Commercial Building Code : IBC 2018 Design Methodology : ASD • Deflection criteria: LL (L/480) and TL (L/240). • Allowed moment does not reflect the adjustment for the beam stability factor. • A structural analysis of the deck has not been performed. • Deflection analysis is based on composite action with a single layer of 23/32" Panel (24" Span Rating) that is glued and nailed down. • Additional considerations for the TJ-Pro™ Rating include: 5/8" Gypsum ceiling. • Rim Board is assumed to carry all loads applied directly above it, bypassing the member being designed. • At hanger supports, the Total Bearing dimension is equal to the width of the material that is supporting the hanger • ¹ See Connector grid below for additional information and/or requirements. • ² Required Bearing Length / Required Bearing Length with Web Stiffeners Bearing Length Loads to Supports (lbs) Supports Total Available Required Dead Floor Live Factored Accessories Details 1 - Stud wall - DF 5.50" 4.25" 2.06" 179 992/-82 1171 1 1/4" Rim Board A3 2 - Stud wall - DF 5.50" 5.50" 5.25" 511 2555 3066 None 3 - Hanger on 18" DF beam 5.50" Hanger¹ 1.75" / - ² 147 899/-105 1046 See note ¹ •TJI joists are only analyzed using Maximum Allowable bracing solutions. •Maximum allowable bracing intervals based on applied load. Lateral Bracing Bracing Intervals Comments Top Edge (Lu) 6' 1" o/c Bottom Edge (Lu) 5' 5" o/c Connector: Simpson Strong-Tie Support Model Seat Length Top Fasteners Face Fasteners Member Fasteners Accessories 3 - Top Mount Hanger MIT3518 2.50" 4-10dx1.5 4-10dx1.5 2-10dx1.5 • Refer to manufacturer notes and instructions for proper installation and use of all connectors. Dead Floor Live Vertical Load Location Spacing (0.90) (1.00) Comments 1 - Uniform (PSF) 0 to 31' 4 1/2" 16" 20.0 100.0 Default Commercial Load Drawing is Conceptual. All locations are measured from the outside face of left support (or left cantilever end). All dimensions are horizontal (typ.). MEMBER REPORT PASSED Level, FLOOR JOIST 03 1 piece(s) 18" TJI® 360 @ 16" OC ForteWEB Software Operator Job Notes 9/10/2025 2:38:17 AM UTC Sierra Coalson Eclipse Engineering (253) 905-9989 [EMAIL REDACTED] ForteWEB v3.9, Engine: V8.4.3.94, Data: V8.1.7.3 File Name: Star Event Center_CD Framing Page 7 / 12 Page 91 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Extent = 0.0 16.250 ft, Tributary Width = 14.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.4930, L = 1.733 k @ 16.250 ft Point Load : D = 0.4930, L = 1.733 k @ 20.250 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Extent = 16.250 20.250 ft, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Extent = 20.250 24.750 ft, Tributary Width = 14.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.891: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 12.285ft 142.66 psi = = 2,117.86psi 6.75x27 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6.75x27 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.538 : 1 0.000 ft = = 1,887.29psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 415 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.577 in 514 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.715 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.190 0.115 0.90 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 24.81 363.0 1,906.1 3.34 238.5 1.00 27.5 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.891 0.538 1.00 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 128.98 1,887.3 2,117.9 17.33 265.0 1.00 142.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 92 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 01 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.569 0.343 1.25 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 102.94 1,506.2 2,647.3 13.82 331.3 1.00 113.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 24.750 ft 1 0.064 0.039 1.60 0.882 1.00 1.00 1.00 14.89 217.8 3,388.6 2.00 424.0 1.00 16.5 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.7149 12.375 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 21.061 20.668 Max Upward from Load Combinations 21.061 20.668 Max Upward from Load Cases 17.080 16.636 D Only 3.982 4.032 +D+L 21.061 20.668 +D+0.750L 16.791 16.509 +0.60D 2.389 2.419 L Only 17.080 16.636 Page 93 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 9.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Extent = 3.0 25.750 ft, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.4930, L = 1.733 k @ 3.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.987: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 12.875ft 172.88 psi = = 2,087.37psi 6.75x30 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 6.75x30 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.652 : 1 0.000 ft = = 2,061.01psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 404 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.623 in 496 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.764 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 25.750 ft 1 0.203 0.136 0.90 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 32.20 381.6 1,878.6 4.38 238.5 1.00 32.4 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 25.750 ft 1 0.987 0.652 1.00 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 173.90 2,061.0 2,087.4 23.34 265.0 1.00 172.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 25.750 ft 1 0.629 0.416 1.25 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 138.47 1,641.2 2,609.2 18.60 331.3 1.00 137.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 25.750 ft 1 0.069 0.046 1.60 0.870 1.00 1.00 1.00 19.32 229.0 3,339.8 2.63 424.0 1.00 19.5 1.00 Page 94 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 02 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.7645 12.875 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 26.084 26.922 Max Upward from Load Combinations 26.084 26.922 Max Upward from Load Cases 21.158 21.950 D Only 4.926 4.972 +D+L 26.084 26.922 +D+0.750L 20.795 21.434 +0.60D 2.956 2.983 L Only 21.158 21.950 Page 95 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design iLevel Truss Joist MicroLam LVL 2.0 E 2,600.0 2,600.0 2,510.0 750.0 2,000.0 1,016.54 285.0 1,555.0 42.010 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 4.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.050: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 2.000ft 11.90 psi = = 2,460.51psi 1.75x18 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 285.00 psi = = Section used for this span 1.75x18 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.042 : 1 2.511 ft = = 124.24psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 28808 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.001 in 35231 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.002 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 4.0 ft 1 0.010 0.008 0.90 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.18 22.7 2,214.5 0.05 256.5 1.00 2.2 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 4.0 ft 1 0.050 0.042 1.00 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 124.2 2,460.5 0.25 285.0 1.00 11.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 4.0 ft 1 0.032 0.027 1.25 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.78 98.8 3,075.6 0.20 356.3 1.00 9.5 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 4.0 ft 1 0.003 0.003 1.60 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.11 13.6 3,936.8 0.03 456.0 1.00 1.3 1.00 Page 96 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 03 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.0017 2.015 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.978 0.978 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.978 0.978 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.800 0.800 D Only 0.178 0.178 +D+L 0.978 0.978 +D+0.750L 0.778 0.778 +0.60D 0.107 0.107 L Only 0.800 0.800 Page 97 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design iLevel Truss Joist MicroLam LVL 2.0 E 2,600.0 2,600.0 2,510.0 750.0 2,000.0 1,016.54 285.0 1,555.0 42.010 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 1.333 ft Point Load : D = 0.1780, L = 0.80 k @ 5.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.1780, L = 0.80 k @ 9.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.239: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 7.000ft 46.72 psi = = 2,460.51psi 2-1.75x18 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 285.00 psi = = Section used for this span 2-1.75x18 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.164 : 1 12.518 ft = = 587.89psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1743 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.076 in 2221 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.096 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 14.0 ft 1 0.057 0.040 0.90 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.99 126.6 2,214.5 0.43 256.5 1.00 10.2 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.0 ft 1 0.239 0.164 1.00 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 9.26 587.9 2,460.5 1.96 285.0 1.00 46.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.0 ft 1 0.154 0.105 1.25 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 7.44 472.6 3,075.6 1.58 356.3 1.00 37.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 14.0 ft 1 0.019 0.013 1.60 0.946 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.20 75.9 3,936.8 0.26 456.0 1.00 6.1 1.00 Page 98 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 04 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.0964 7.051 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 2.226 2.226 Max Upward from Load Combinations 2.226 2.226 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.733 1.733 D Only 0.493 0.493 +D+L 2.226 2.226 +D+0.750L 1.793 1.793 +0.60D 0.296 0.296 L Only 1.733 1.733 Page 99 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 5.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.549: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 11.500ft 79.72 psi = = 2,233.01psi 5.5x21 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x21 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.301 : 1 0.000 ft = = 1,226.87psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 532 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.414 in 665 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.518 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.122 0.067 0.90 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 8.27 245.4 2,009.7 1.23 238.5 1.00 15.9 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.549 0.301 1.00 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 41.33 1,226.9 2,233.0 6.14 265.0 1.00 79.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.352 0.193 1.25 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 33.06 981.5 2,791.3 4.91 331.3 1.00 63.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 23.0 ft 1 0.041 0.023 1.60 0.930 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.96 147.3 3,572.8 0.74 424.0 1.00 9.6 1.00 Page 100 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 05 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.5181 11.584 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 7.188 7.188 Max Upward from Load Combinations 7.188 7.188 Max Upward from Load Cases 5.750 5.750 D Only 1.438 1.438 +D+L 7.188 7.188 +D+0.750L 5.750 5.750 +0.60D 0.863 0.863 L Only 5.750 5.750 Page 101 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2400 1850 1650 650 1800 [PHONE REDACTED] 31.21 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1600ksi 850ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.663: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 10.125ft 107.78 psi = = 2,261.62psi 5.5x21 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x21 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.407 : 1 18.550 ft = = 1,498.79psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 495 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.398 in 609 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.491 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 20.250 ft 1 0.138 0.085 0.90 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 9.48 281.5 2,035.5 1.56 238.5 1.00 20.2 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 20.250 ft 1 0.663 0.407 1.00 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 50.49 1,498.8 2,261.6 8.30 265.0 1.00 107.8 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 20.250 ft 1 0.423 0.259 1.25 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 40.24 1,194.5 2,827.0 6.61 331.3 1.00 85.9 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 20.250 ft 1 0.047 0.029 1.60 0.942 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.69 168.9 3,618.6 0.94 424.0 1.00 12.1 1.00 Page 102 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 06 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.4906 10.199 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 9.973 9.973 Max Upward from Load Combinations 9.973 9.973 Max Upward from Load Cases 8.100 8.100 D Only 1.873 1.873 +D+L 9.973 9.973 +D+0.750L 7.948 7.948 +0.60D 1.124 1.124 L Only 8.100 8.100 Page 103 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2400 1850 1650 650 1800 [PHONE REDACTED] 31.21 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1600ksi 850ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.548: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 9.250ft 96.74 psi = = 2,282.16psi 5.5x21 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x21 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.365 : 1 16.812 ft = = 1,250.94psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 649 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.278 in 799 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.342 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.114 0.076 0.90 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 7.92 235.0 2,053.9 1.40 238.5 1.00 18.2 1.00 1.00 +D+L 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.548 0.365 1.00 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 42.14 1,250.9 2,282.2 7.45 265.0 1.00 96.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.349 0.233 1.25 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 33.58 996.9 2,852.7 5.94 331.3 1.00 77.1 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 18.50 ft 1 0.039 0.026 1.60 0.951 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.75 141.0 3,651.4 0.84 424.0 1.00 10.9 1.00 Page 104 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: FLOOR BEAM 07 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.3418 9.318 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 9.112 9.112 Max Upward from Load Combinations 9.112 9.112 Max Upward from Load Cases 7.400 7.400 D Only 1.712 1.712 +D+L 9.112 9.112 +D+0.750L 7.262 7.262 +0.60D 1.027 1.027 L Only 7.400 7.400 Page 105 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 09 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.357: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 6.500ft 43.98 psi = = 2,400.00psi 5.5x9 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 265.00 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x9 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.166 : 1 12.288 ft = = 856.02psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 578 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.215 in 725 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.269 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.080 0.037 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.07 173.2 2,160.0 0.29 238.5 1.00 8.9 1.00 1.00 +D+L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.357 0.166 1.00 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.30 856.0 2,400.0 1.45 265.0 1.00 44.0 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.228 0.106 1.25 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.24 685.3 3,000.0 1.16 331.3 1.00 35.2 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 13.0 ft 1 0.027 0.013 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.64 103.9 3,840.0 0.18 424.0 1.00 5.3 1.00 Page 106 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 09 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.2695 6.547 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.630 1.630 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.630 1.630 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.300 1.300 D Only 0.330 0.330 +D+L 1.630 1.630 +D+0.750L 1.305 1.305 +0.60D 0.198 0.198 L Only 1.300 1.300 Page 107 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 10 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.271: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 30.88 psi = = 1,170.00psi 4x6 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 180.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x6 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.172 : 1 3.053 ft = = 316.74psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 3093 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.009 in 4800 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.014 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+0.750L+0.750S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.103 0.065 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.16 108.5 1,053.0 0.14 162.0 1.00 10.6 1.00 1.00 +D+L 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.271 0.172 1.00 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.47 316.7 1,170.0 0.40 180.0 1.00 30.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.139 0.088 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.27 186.6 1,345.5 0.23 207.0 1.00 18.2 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.181 0.115 1.25 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.39 264.7 1,462.5 0.33 225.0 1.00 25.8 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 108 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 10 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.240 0.152 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.48 323.2 1,345.5 0.40 207.0 1.00 31.5 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.035 0.022 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.10 65.1 1,872.0 0.08 288.0 1.00 6.3 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+0.750L+0.750S 1 0.0136 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.543 0.543 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.543 0.543 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.350 0.350 D Only 0.182 0.182 +D+L 0.532 0.532 +D+S 0.314 0.314 +D+0.750L 0.445 0.445 +D+0.750L+0.750S 0.543 0.543 +0.60D 0.109 0.109 L Only 0.350 0.350 S Only 0.131 0.131 Page 109 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 11 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 14.750 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.909: 1 Load Combination +D+L Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 1.750ft 120.66 psi = = 1,170.00psi 4x8 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+L = = = 180.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x8 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.670 : 1 2.900 ft = = 1,064.03psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1238 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.028 in 1491 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.034 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+L n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.171 0.126 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.46 180.1 1,053.0 0.35 162.0 1.00 20.4 1.00 1.00 +D+L 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.909 0.670 1.00 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.72 1,064.0 1,170.0 2.04 180.0 1.00 120.7 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.576 0.425 1.25 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.15 843.0 1,462.5 1.62 225.0 1.00 95.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 3.50 ft 1 0.058 0.043 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.28 108.1 1,872.0 0.21 288.0 1.00 12.3 1.00 Page 110 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 11 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+L 1 0.0339 1.763 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 3.107 3.107 Max Upward from Load Combinations 3.107 3.107 Max Upward from Load Cases 2.581 2.581 D Only 0.526 0.526 +D+L 3.107 3.107 +D+0.750L 2.462 2.462 +0.60D 0.316 0.316 L Only 2.581 2.581 Page 111 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 12 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Load for Span Number 1 Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Extent = 4.250 6.750 ft, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Point Load : D = 0.3390, S = 0.6050 k @ 4.250 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.171: 1 Load Combination +D+0.750L+0.750S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.237ft 43.35 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x9 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+0.750L+0.750S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x9 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.142 : 1 6.011 ft = = 472.05psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 2228 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.016 in 5184 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.036 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : L Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+0.750L+0.750S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.083 0.070 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.12 180.4 2,160.0 0.55 238.5 1.00 16.8 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.001 0.070 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.02 2.8 2,160.0 0.55 238.5 1.00 16.8 1.00 1.00 +D+L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.147 0.124 1.00 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.18 352.5 2,400.0 1.08 265.0 1.00 32.8 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.002 0.124 1.00 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.03 5.5 2,400.0 1.08 265.0 1.00 32.8 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 112 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 12 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:42PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.144 0.119 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.46 397.3 2,760.0 1.20 304.8 1.00 36.2 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.002 0.119 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.04 5.9 2,760.0 1.20 304.8 1.00 36.2 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.103 0.087 1.25 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.91 309.4 3,000.0 0.95 331.3 1.00 28.8 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.002 0.087 1.25 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.03 4.8 3,000.0 0.95 331.3 1.00 28.8 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.171 0.142 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.92 472.1 2,760.0 1.43 304.8 1.00 43.4 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.003 0.142 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.04 7.2 2,760.0 1.43 304.8 1.00 43.4 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.028 0.024 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.67 108.2 3,840.0 0.33 424.0 1.00 10.1 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.000 0.024 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.01 1.7 3,840.0 0.33 424.0 1.00 10.1 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+0.750L+0.750S 1 0.0363 3.547 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 1.115 1.808 Max Upward from Load Combinations 1.115 1.808 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.675 0.788 D Only 0.371 0.711 +D+L 1.046 1.386 +D+S 0.688 1.499 +D+0.750L 0.877 1.217 +D+0.750L+0.750S 1.115 1.808 +0.60D 0.223 0.426 L Only 0.675 0.675 S Only 0.317 0.788 Page 113 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 13 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, L = 0.10 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.06130 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.473: 1 Load Combination +D+0.750L+0.750S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.875ft 85.08 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x9 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+0.750L+0.750S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x9 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.279 : 1 9.003 ft = = 1,306.25psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 505 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.127 in 923 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.231 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+0.750L+0.750S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.223 0.131 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.98 481.5 2,160.0 1.03 238.5 1.00 31.4 1.00 1.00 +D+L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.361 0.213 1.00 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 5.36 865.6 2,400.0 1.86 265.0 1.00 56.4 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.434 0.256 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 7.41 1,197.1 2,760.0 2.57 304.8 1.00 78.0 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 114 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 13 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.257 0.151 1.25 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.76 769.6 3,000.0 1.65 331.3 1.00 50.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750L+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.473 0.279 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 8.08 1,306.3 2,760.0 2.81 304.8 1.00 85.1 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.750 ft 1 0.075 0.044 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.79 288.9 3,840.0 0.62 424.0 1.00 18.8 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+0.750L+0.750S 1 0.2313 4.911 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 3.316 3.316 Max Upward from Load Combinations 3.316 3.316 Max Upward from Load Cases 1.816 1.816 D Only 1.222 1.222 +D+L 2.197 2.197 +D+S 3.039 3.039 +D+0.750L 1.954 1.954 +D+0.750L+0.750S 3.316 3.316 +0.60D 0.733 0.733 L Only 0.975 0.975 S Only 1.816 1.816 Page 115 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 14 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 8.0 ft Point Load : D = 3.898, S = 4.938 k @ 2.250 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft Uniform Load : S = 0.06130 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.947: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 2.266ft 225.10 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x9 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x9 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.739 : 1 0.000 ft = = 2,613.24psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 435 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.108 in 752 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.186 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.516 0.401 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 6.90 1,114.6 2,160.0 3.15 238.5 1.00 95.6 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.004 0.401 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.05 8.0 2,160.0 1.85 238.5 1.00 95.6 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.947 0.739 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 16.17 2,613.2 2,760.0 7.43 304.8 1.00 225.1 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.007 0.739 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.12 19.5 2,760.0 4.48 304.8 1.00 225.1 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 116 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 14 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.811 0.632 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 13.85 2,238.6 2,760.0 6.36 304.8 1.00 192.7 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.006 0.632 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.10 16.7 2,760.0 3.83 304.8 1.00 192.7 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.725 ft 1 0.174 0.135 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.14 668.7 3,840.0 1.89 424.0 1.00 57.3 1.00 1.00 Length = 0.02464 ft 1 0.001 0.135 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.03 4.8 3,840.0 1.11 424.0 1.00 57.3 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1860 3.153 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 7.859 4.914 Max Upward from Load Combinations 7.859 4.914 Max Upward from Load Cases 4.550 2.904 D Only 3.310 2.011 +D+S 7.859 4.914 +D+0.750S 6.722 4.188 +0.60D 1.986 1.206 S Only 4.550 2.904 Page 117 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 15 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design Douglas Fir-Larch No.2 900.0 900.0 1,350.0 625.0 1,600.0 580.0 180.0 575.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 3.0 ft Varying Uniform Load : S= 0.020->0.0 ksf, Extent = 0.0 3.750 ft, Trib Width = 3.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.0150, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 2.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.334: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 3.034ft 36.39 psi = = 1,345.50psi 4x8 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 207.00 psi = = Section used for this span 4x8 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.176 : 1 0.000 ft = = 448.95psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1641 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.027 in 2762 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.046 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 6.250 ft 1 0.173 0.088 0.90 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.47 182.5 1,053.0 0.24 162.0 1.00 14.3 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.250 ft 1 0.334 0.176 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.15 449.0 1,345.5 0.62 207.0 1.00 36.4 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 6.250 ft 1 0.284 0.149 1.15 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 382.3 1,345.5 0.52 207.0 1.00 30.9 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 Page 118 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 15 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CF r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu 1.00 Length = 6.250 ft 1 0.058 0.030 1.60 1.300 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.28 109.5 1,872.0 0.15 288.0 1.00 8.6 1.00 Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.0457 3.125 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 0.779 0.712 Max Upward from Load Combinations 0.779 0.712 Max Upward from Load Cases 0.481 0.413 D Only 0.298 0.298 +D+S 0.779 0.712 +D+0.750S 0.659 0.608 +0.60D 0.179 0.179 S Only 0.481 0.413 Page 119 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 16 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.020, S = 0.0250 ksf, Tributary Width = 5.0 ft Uniform Load : D = 0.2773, S = 0.9427 , Tributary Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.429: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.750ft 107.46 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x13.5 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x13.5 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.353 : 1 8.391 ft = = 1,183.96psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 859 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.097 in 1175 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.133 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.148 0.121 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 4.44 318.8 2,160.0 1.43 238.5 1.00 28.9 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.429 0.353 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 16.48 1,184.0 2,760.0 5.32 304.8 1.00 107.5 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.351 0.288 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 13.47 967.7 2,760.0 4.35 304.8 1.00 87.8 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.050 0.041 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.66 191.3 3,840.0 0.86 424.0 1.00 17.4 1.00 Page 120 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 16 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1327 4.785 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 6.940 6.940 Max Upward from Load Combinations 6.940 6.940 Max Upward from Load Cases 5.072 5.072 D Only 1.869 1.869 +D+S 6.940 6.940 +D+0.750S 5.672 5.672 +0.60D 1.121 1.121 S Only 5.072 5.072 Page 121 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 17 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall CODE REFERENCES Calculations per NDS 2018, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combination Set : IBC 2021 Material Properties Beam Bracing : Beam is Fully Braced against lateral-torsional buckling Allowable Stress Design DF/DF 24F-V4 2,400.0 1,850.0 1,650.0 650.0 1,800.0 950.0 265.0 1,100.0 31.210 Analysis Method : Eminbend - xx ksi Wood Species : Wood Grade : Fb + psi psi Fv psi Fb - Ft psi Fc - Prll psi psi Fc - Perp E : Modulus of Elasticity 1,600.0ksi 850.0ksi Ebend- yy Eminbend - yy Ebend- xx ksi Density pcf Load Combination : IBC 2021 Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Beam self weight calculated and added to loading Uniform Load : D = 0.2773, S = 0.9427 , Tributary Width = 1.0 ft DESIGN SUMMARY Design OK Maximum Bending Stress Ratio 0.363: 1 Load Combination +D+S Span # where maximum occurs Span # 1 Location of maximum on span 4.750ft 90.91 psi = = 2,760.00psi 5.5x13.5 Section used for this span Span # where maximum occurs Location of maximum on span Span # 1 = Load Combination +D+S = = = 304.75 psi = = Section used for this span 5.5x13.5 Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.298 : 1 8.391 ft = = 1,001.64psi Maximum Deflection 0 <360 1015 Ratio = 0 <180 Max Downward Transient Deflection 0.086 in 1331 Ratio = >=360 Max Upward Transient Deflection 0 in Ratio = Max Downward Total Deflection 0.112 in Ratio = >=180 Max Upward Total Deflection 0 in fb: Actual F'b fv: Actual F'v Span: 1 : S Only n/a Span: 1 : +D+S n/a Maximum Forces & Stresses for Load Combinations Span # Moment Values Load Combination C i CLx C C CM CV r t Shear Values Max Stress Ratios M CD V fb M fv F'b V F'v Segment Length Cfu D Only 0.0 0.00 0.0 0.0 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.110 0.090 0.90 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 3.31 237.7 2,160.0 1.07 238.5 1.00 21.6 1.00 1.00 +D+S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.363 0.298 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 13.94 1,001.6 2,760.0 4.50 304.8 1.00 90.9 1.00 1.00 +D+0.750S 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.294 0.241 1.15 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 11.29 810.7 2,760.0 3.64 304.8 1.00 73.6 1.00 1.00 +0.60D 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.0 0.00 0.0 1.00 0.0 1.00 1.00 Length = 9.50 ft 1 0.037 0.031 1.60 1.000 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.99 142.6 3,840.0 0.64 424.0 1.00 12.9 1.00 Page 122 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Wood Beam LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: HEADER 17 Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Location in Span Load Combination Max. Defl Location in Span Load Combination Span Max. Defl Overall Maximum Deflections +D+S 1 0.1123 4.785 0.0000 0.000 Load Combination Support 1 Support 2 Vertical Reactions Support notation : Far left is #1 Values in KIPS Max Upward from all Load Conditions 5.871 5.871 Max Upward from Load Combinations 5.871 5.871 Max Upward from Load Cases 4.478 4.478 D Only 1.394 1.394 +D+S 5.871 5.871 +D+0.750S 4.752 4.752 +0.60D 0.836 0.836 S Only 4.478 4.478 Page 123 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 124 of 150 FOUNDATION DESIGN ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 125 of 150 FOUNDATION CALC MAPS DN T T T T T T B C D E G A F B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 S302 1 A A A A A 4" CONC SLAB ON GRADE W/ #4 BARS @ 18" OC EACH WAY SEE DETAIL TOCS ELEVATION = 5/S201 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 5'-11" 6'-1" 12'-0" 12'-0" 14'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 14'-0" B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E D D D D D D E E E 6x6 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 2x6 2x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 HSS4X4X1/4 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 10x10 6x6 6x6 A A A 100'-0" W/ TOP PLATE W/ TOP PLATE 2 2 SW-B SW-B SW-B W/ TOP PLATE W/ TOP PLATE 2 2 SW-A SW-A 6x6 2 2 6x6 6x6 2 2 2 HSS4X4X1/4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 S202 TYP AT EXT FTG 3 S202 TYP AT STEEL COL 7 S201 TYP AT INT FTG 7 S201 TYP AT INT FTG 5 S202 TYP AT OPENINGS 4 S202 TYP AT EXT FTG 2 S202 TYP AT PIER 3 S202 TYP AT STEEL COL 4 S202 2 2 S202 TYP AT PIER A FTAO - REF SW-C TYP AT EXT FTG 1/S301 D P1 P2 P3 CF-6 CF-A1 CF-A2 CF-C CF-C CF-C CF-4 CF-1 CF-15 CF-F2 CF-F1 P4 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P13 DL = 4.508 K L = 19.661 K DL = 4.743 K LL = 17.311 K SL = 0.788 K DL = 4.972 K LL = 21.950 K DL = 4.926 K LL = 21.158 K DL = 0.492 K SL = 1.733 K DL = 0.492 K LL = 1.733 K DL = 1.438 K LL = 5.750 K DL = 3.311 K LL = 13.850 K DL = 3.723 K LL = 7.400 K SL = 2.904 K DL = 3.585 K LL = 15.500 K DL = 0.330 K LL = 1.300 K DL = 0.330 K LL = 1.300 K DL = 0.526 K LL = 2.581 K DL = 0.526 K LL = 2.581 K DL = 0.371 K LL = 0.675 K SL = 0.317 K DL = 1.222 K LL = 0.975 K SL = 1.816 K DL = 3.310 K SL = 4.550 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.413 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.481 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.413 K DL = 0.298 K SL = 0.481 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.869 K SL = 5.072 K DL = 1.394 K SL = 4.478 K DL = 1.394 K SL = 4.478 K DL = 3.110 K SL = 3.560 K DL = 13.217 K SL = 15.591 K DL = 6.294 K SL = 8.328 K DL = 6.633 K SL = 12.093 K DL = 4.847 K SL = 5.750 K DL = 9.009 K SL = 10.688 K DL = 8.060 K SL = 9.664 K DL = 1.953 K SL = 2.344 K DL = 1.953 K SL = 2.344 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.276 K SL = 1.908 K DL = 1.632 K SL = 2.442 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 1.604 K SL = 2.400 K DL = 2.766 K SL = 4.043 K DL = 2.186 K SL = 3.654 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 2.712 K SL = 4.824 K DL = 4.025 K SL = 6.556 K DL = 1.553 K SL = 2.256 K DL = 2.059 K SL = 3.100 K DL = 0.512 K SL = 1.247 K DL = 2.001 K SL = 3.334 K DL = 1.527 K SL = 2.409 K DL = 2.008 K SL = 2.511 K DL = 1.652 K SL = 2.473 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 15.360 K SL = 19.200 K DL = 3.110 K SL = 3.560 K DL = 0.675 K SL = 0.891 K DL = 0.675 K SL = 0.891 K DL = 0.501 K SL = 0.594 K DL = 0.501 K SL = 0.594 K DL = 1.308 K SL = 1.575 K DL = 1.308 K SL = 1.575 K P5 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. 1) DL Upper Lower INT DECK 2) DL+(SL or RLL) Dead 20.0 15.0 Dead 20.0 3) DL+LL Snow 25.0 25.0 Live 100.0 4) DL+0.75((SL or RLL)+LL) Live 20.0 20.0 Wall Dead 12.0 Load Upper Lower INT DECK 1st 2nd W Size Size Pa, k CF-A1 14.0 0.0 8.0 0.0 14.0 3.5 1471 CF1 CF2 11.56 CF-A2 3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 14.0 0.0 303 CF1 CF2 17.93 CF-C 0.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 14.0 0.0 1968 CF2 CF2 8.84 CF-D 0.0 0.0 5.5 0.0 14.0 0.0 828 CF1 CF2 15.06 CF-F1 8.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 14.0 0.0 608 CF1 CF2 16.26 CF-F2 2.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 14.0 0.0 338 CF1 CF2 17.74 CF-1 3.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 14.0 15.0 474 CF1 CF2 16.99 CF-4 0.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 14.0 0.0 408 CF1 CF2 17.35 CF-6 10.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 14.0 15.0 746 CF1 CF2 15.51 CF-15 8.0 8.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 0.0 920 CF1 CF2 14.56 Strip Footing Design Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Load Combinations Roof Load (psf) Floor Load (psf) Label Tributary Widths to Bearing Line (ft) MIN. Footing Actual Footing Design Roof Floor Wall Page 126 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Bending Strength Factor 0.90 Steel Yield Stress, Fy 60000 psi Shear Strength Factor 0.75 Soil Bearing Capacity, qt 2000 psf Concrete Comp. Stress, Fc 2500 psi Standard Clear Dist 3 inches Concrete Load Factor 1.6 Weight of Concrete 150 pcf Concrete Strip Footing Design Label bc, in t, in d, in b, in bw, in hw, in Wf, plf L, ft w, plf CF1 5.5 12.0 8.75 12.0 6.0 18.0 262.5 5.46 1738 CF2 5.5 12.0 8.75 24.0 6.0 18.0 412.5 5.46 3588 CF2.5 5.5 12.0 8.75 30.0 6.0 18.0 487.5 5.46 4513 CF3 5.5 12.0 8.75 36.0 6.0 18.0 562.5 5.46 5438 CF3.5 5.5 12.0 8.75 42.0 6.0 18.0 637.5 5.46 6363 Concrete Footing Reinforcement Calculations Label Bar Size Bar Area # of Bars ρ, min As, in2As, Min in2 CF1 4 0.196 2 0.00180 0.393 0.189 CF2 4 0.196 2 0.00180 0.393 0.378 CF2.5 4 0.196 3 0.00180 0.589 0.473 CF3 4 0.196 3 0.00180 0.589 0.567 CF3.5 4 0.196 4 0.00180 0.785 0.662 Concrete Footing Shear and Moment Calculations Label a, in S, plain Vu, plf MuS, k-ft Mu, k-ft ϕVc, plfϕMnS, k-fϕMn, k-ft Shear Bending CF1 0.924 76.6 800 0.10 1.60 7875 7.46 14.65 OK OK CF2 0.462 76.6 2400 0.90 3.20 7875 7.46 15.05 OK OK CF2.5 0.554 76.6 3200 1.60 4.00 7875 7.46 22.46 OK OK CF3 0.462 76.6 4000 2.50 4.80 7875 7.46 22.58 OK OK CF3.5 0.528 76.6 4800 3.60 5.60 7875 7.46 29.99 OK OK Strip Footing Design As Check OK OK OK OK OK Page 127 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. 1) DL 5) DL+(E/W) 2) DL+(SL or RLL) 6) DL+0.75(E/W)+0.75(SL+LL) 3) DL+LL 4) DL+0.75((SL or RLL)+LL) DL LL SL RLL E/W Label W Pa, k P1 15.36 0.00 19.20 0.00 0.00 CF-A2 0.30 17.93 34.86 F4.5 P2 15.36 0.00 19.20 0.00 0.00 CF-F2 0.34 17.74 34.90 F4.5 P3 1.60 0.00 2.40 0.00 0.00 4.00 F1.5 P4 2.71 0.00 4.82 0.00 0.00 7.54 F2.5 P5 2.77 0.00 4.04 0.00 0.00 6.81 F2.0 P6 4.93 21.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 CF-1 0.47 16.99 26.56 F4.0 P7 4.97 21.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 CF-4 0.41 17.35 27.33 F4.0 P8 4.51 19.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 CF-4 0.41 17.35 24.58 F4.0 P9 5.42 17.31 1.68 0.00 0.00 CF-6 0.75 15.51 23.47 F4.0 P10 13.22 0.00 15.59 0.00 0.00 CF-4 0.41 17.35 29.22 F4.0 P11 6.29 0.00 8.33 0.00 0.00 CF-4 0.41 17.35 14.62 NA P12 6.63 0.00 12.09 0.00 0.00 CF-6 0.75 15.51 19.47 F3.5 P13 1.44 5.75 0.00 0.00 0.00 CF-1 0.47 16.99 7.19 NA P14 3.31 13.85 0.00 0.00 0.00 17.16 F3.5 P15 3.59 15.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.09 F3.5 P16 3.72 7.40 2.90 0.00 0.00 CF-6 0.75 15.51 11.45 NA P17 4.85 0.00 5.75 0.00 0.00 CF-1 0.47 16.99 10.60 NA P18 9.01 0.00 10.69 0.00 0.00 19.70 F3.5 P19 8.06 0.00 9.66 0.00 0.00 17.72 F3.5 P20 3.99 0.00 5.44 0.00 0.00 CF-6 0.75 15.51 9.43 NA P21 3.88 0.00 7.58 0.00 0.00 CF-15 0.92 14.56 11.46 NA *Any Concentrated load < 4k neglected in analysis. Worst case continuous footing is adequate Load Combinations Pad Footing Design Label Point Loads Strip Loads Load Ftg Size Page 128 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Bending Strength Factor 0.90 Steel Yield Stress, Fy 60000 psi Shear Strength Factor 0.75 Soil Bearing Capacity, qt 2000 psf Concrete Comp. Stress, Fc 2500 psi Ultimate Soil Bearing 3200 psf Concrete Load Factor 1.6 Standard Clear Dist 3 inches Steel Modulus of Elasticity3.0E+07 psi Weight of Concrete 150 pcf Conc Modulus of Elasticity2.9E+06 psi concrete constant, m 32 Concrete Pad Footing Design Label bc, in t, in d, in b, ft Wf, lbs Pa, lbs Pu Bearing, kUplift, k F1.0 5.50 10.00 6.75 1.00 125 1875 3000 1.88 0.13 F1.5 5.50 10.00 6.75 1.50 281 4219 6750 4.22 0.28 F2.0 5.50 12.00 8.75 2.00 600 7400 11840 7.40 0.60 F2.5 5.50 12.00 8.75 2.50 938 11563 18500 11.56 0.94 F3.0 5.50 12.00 8.75 3.00 1350 16650 26640 16.65 1.35 F3.5 5.50 12.00 8.75 3.50 1838 22663 36260 22.66 1.84 F4.0 5.50 12.00 8.69 4.00 2400 29600 47360 29.60 2.40 F4.5 5.50 12.00 8.69 4.50 3038 37463 59940 37.46 3.04 F5.0 5.50 12.00 8.69 5.00 3750 46250 74000 46.25 3.75 Concrete Footing Shear and Moment Calculations Label Qu, psf Mu, k*ft V-2, k V-1, k bo, in Vc-2, k Vc-1, k two-wayone-way F1.0 3000 0.11 -0.1 -0.9 49 50 6 OK OK F1.5 3000 0.61 3.6 -0.2 49 50 9 OK OK F2.0 2960 1.76 7.7 0.2 57 75 16 OK OK F2.5 2960 3.86 14.3 2.2 57 75 20 OK OK F3.0 2960 7.17 22.5 4.8 57 75 24 OK OK F3.5 2960 11.98 32.1 8.2 57 75 28 OK OK F4.0 2960 18.56 43.2 12.4 56.75 74 31 OK OK F4.5 2960 27.20 55.8 17.3 56.75 74 35 OK OK F5.0 2960 38.16 69.9 22.9 56.75 74 39 OK OK Concrete Footing Moment Calculations Label Bar Size Bar Area# of Bars As, in2 p-act p-min a, in As CheckMn, k*ftBending F1.0 4 0.196 2 0.39 0.0033 0.0018 0.624 OK 11.38 OK F1.5 4 0.196 2 0.39 0.0022 0.0018 0.416 OK 11.56 OK F2.0 4 0.196 3 0.59 0.0020 0.0018 0.505 OK 22.52 OK F2.5 4 0.196 4 0.79 0.0022 0.0018 0.539 OK 29.97 OK F3.0 4 0.196 4 0.79 0.0018 0.0018 0.449 OK 30.13 OK F3.5 4 0.196 5 0.98 0.0019 0.0018 0.481 OK 37.59 OK F4.0 5 0.307 4 1.23 0.0021 0.0018 0.523 OK 46.53 OK F4.5 5 0.307 4 1.23 0.0019 0.0018 0.465 OK 46.69 OK F5.0 5 0.307 5 1.53 0.0021 0.0018 0.523 OK 58.17 OK Pad Footing Design Page 129 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 130 of 150 STUDS AND POST DESING ---PAGE BREAK--- Steel Column LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: TRUSS SUPPORTS Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall Code References Calculations per AISC 360-16, IBC 2021, ASCE 7-16 Load Combinations Used : IBC 2021 General Information Steel Stress Grade Top & Bottom Pinned Analysis Method : 14.0 Overall Column Height Top & Bottom Fixity Allowable Strength Fy : Steel Yield ksi 29,000.0 ksi Steel Section Name : HSS6x4x1/4 36.0 ft E : Elastic Bending Modulus Unbraced Length for buckling ABOUT X-X Axis = 14.0 ft, K = 1.0 Unbraced Length for buckling ABOUT Y-Y Axis = 14.0 ft, K = 1.0 Brace condition : Applied Loads Service loads entered. Load Factors will be applied for calculations. Column self weight included : 218.170 lbs * Dead Load Factor AXIAL LOADS . . . Axial Load at 14.0 ft, D = 15.360, S = 19.20 k DESIGN SUMMARY PASS Max. Axial+Bending Stress Ratio = 0.6656 Location of max.above base 0.0 ft 34.778 k 52.253 k 0.0 k-ft Load Combination +D+S Load Combination 0.0 11.587 k-ft Bending & Shear Check Results PASS Maximum Shear Stress Ratio 0.0 k 0.0 : 1 Location of max.above base 0.0 ft At maximum location values are . . . : 1 At maximum location values are . . . k 15.323 k-ft 0.0 k-ft Pa : Axial Pn / Omega : Allowable Ma-x : Applied Mn-x / Omega : Allowable Ma-y : Applied Mn-y / Omega : Allowable Va : Applied Vn / Omega : Allowable Maximum Load Reactions . . Top along X-X 0.0 k Bottom along X-X 0.0 k Top along Y-Y 0.0 k Bottom along Y-Y 0.0 k Maximum Load Deflections . . . Along Y-Y 0.0 in at 0.0ft above base for load combination : Along X-X 0.0 in at 0.0ft above base for load combination : 0.0 Maximum Axial + Bending Stress Ratios Maximum Shear Ratios Load Combination Stress Ratio Location Stress Ratio Status Location Status Load Combination Results Cbx Cby KxLx/Rx KyLy/Ry k k-ft Note: Only non-zero reactions are listed. Load Combination X-X Axis Reaction Y-Y Axis Reaction Axial Reaction @ Base @ Top @ Base @ Base @ Top Maximum Reactions @ Base @ Base @ Top @ Top Mx - End Moments My - End Moments k k-ft Item X-X Axis Reaction Y-Y Axis Reaction Axial Reaction @ Base @ Top @ Base @ Base @ Top Extreme Reactions Extreme Value @ Base @ Base @ Top @ Top Mx - End Moments My - End Moments Maximum Deflections for Load Combinations Max. Deflection in X dir Max. Deflection in Y dir Distance Load Combination Distance Steel Section Properties : HSS6x4x1/4 Steel Section Properties : HSS6x4x1/4 Page 131 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Steel Column LIC# : KW-06015392, Build:20.24.04.09 CTA INC. ENERCALC INC 1983-2023 DESCRIPTION: TRUSS SUPPORTS Project File: Star Event Center_CD Framing.ec6 Project Title: Star Event Center Engineer: Sierra Coalson P.E. Project ID: COSTAR_EC Printed: 9 SEP 2025, 7:43PM Project Descr: Community Hall R xx = 1.610 in Depth = 6.000 in R yy = 2.200 in Zy = 6.450 in^3 J = 23.600 in^4 Width = 4.000 in Wall Thick = 0.250 in Zx = 8.530 in^3 Area = 4.300 in^2 Weight = 15.584 plf I xx = 20.90 in^4 S xx = 6.96 in^3 Cw = 10.10 in^6 Design Thick = 0.233 in I yy = 11.100 in^4 C = 10.100 in^3 S yy = 5.560 in^3 Ycg = 0.000 in Sketches Page 132 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Building Data Structure Type: Enclosure Classification: Exposure Category: C Minimum Building Length: 64.00 ft Mean Roof Height: 27.00 ft Design Roof Angle 26.57 ° Wind Edge Distance (a a = 6.40 ft 2a = 12.80 ft Velocity Pressure & Internal Pressure Coefficient Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient (K z ) K z = 0.956 Table 26.10-1 Topographic Factor (K zt ) K zt = 1.000 Figure 26.8-1 Wind Directionality Factor (K d ) K d = 0.850 Table 26.6-1 Basic Wind Speed (V ) V = 115 mph 26.5.1 Velocity Pressure (q z ) q z = 27.51 psf 26.10.2 Internal Pressure Coefficients (GC pi ) GC pi = 0.18 Table 26.13-1 External Pressure Coefficients & Wall Pressures + - + - + - + - 10.00 1.00 -1.10 1.00 -1.40 -22.56 35.21 -22.56 43.47 15.00 0.97 -1.07 0.97 -1.34 -21.70 34.36 -21.70 41.76 20.00 0.95 -1.05 0.95 -1.29 -21.10 33.75 -21.10 40.54 25.00 0.93 -1.03 0.93 -1.26 -20.63 33.28 -20.63 39.60 30.00 0.92 -1.02 0.92 -1.23 -20.24 32.90 -20.24 38.83 35.00 0.90 -1.00 0.90 -1.21 -19.92 32.57 -19.92 38.18 40.00 0.89 -0.99 0.89 -1.19 -19.63 32.29 -19.63 37.62 45.00 0.88 -0.98 0.88 -1.17 -19.39 32.04 -19.39 37.12 50.00 0.88 -0.98 0.88 -1.15 -19.16 31.82 -19.16 36.68 100.00 0.82 -0.92 0.82 -1.05 -17.70 30.36 -17.70 33.75 WIND LOADS C&C Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC Buildings: Main Wind Force Resisting System Enclosed Buildings Area (ft2) Wall (GCp) Wall Pressure (psf) Max Wall Pressure (psf) (ASD) 4 5 4 5 26.08 25.05 22.01 20.25 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. 23.76 23.30 22.91 22.57 22.27 24.33 Page 133 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Velocity Pressure, q z = 27.51 psf all Line Load, w = 0 plf Internal Pressure Coefficient, GC pi = 0.18 Cd = 1.60 Deflection Limit = L/240 Include Cr? Yes Fb' Fc' E Emin A Sx Ix Pa Ma psi psi ksi ksi in2 in3 in4 lbs ft-lbs 2153 2376 1600 580 8.25 7.56 114.38 19602 1357 2829 2936 1300 661 8.25 7.56 114.38 24222 1783 2153 2376 1600 580 16.50 15.13 228.77 39204 2713 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 12 26.08 26.08 26.08 25.62 25.23 24.89 24.59 24.33 24.08 23.86 16 26.08 25.92 25.35 24.89 24.50 24.16 23.86 23.60 23.36 23.14 24 25.62 24.89 24.33 23.86 23.47 23.14 22.84 22.57 22.33 22.11 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK OK 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Stud DF #2 2x6 LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5 DESIGN INFORMATION Stud Properties DF #2 2x6: Stud Check Spacing (in) Height (ft) LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5: Stud Check DF #2 2x6: Stud Check Spacing (in) Height (ft) Spacing (in) Height (ft) Sierra Coalson P.E. WALL STUD DESIGN - EAVE Spacing (in) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6 C&C Wind Pressure, Zone 5 (ASD) (psf) Page 134 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Velocity Pressure, q z = 27.51 psf Wall Line Load, w = 0 plf Internal Pressure Coefficient, GC pi = 0.18 Cd = 1.60 Deflection Limit = L/240 Include Cr? Yes Fb' Fc' E Emin A Sx Ix Pa Ma psi psi ksi ksi in2 in3 in4 lbs ft-lbs 2153 2376 1600 580 8.25 7.56 114.38 19602 1357 2829 2936 1300 661 8.25 7.56 114.38 24222 1783 2153 2376 1600 580 16.50 15.13 228.77 39204 2713 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 12 26.08 26.08 26.08 25.62 25.23 24.89 24.59 24.33 24.08 23.86 16 26.08 25.92 25.35 24.89 24.50 24.16 23.86 23.60 23.36 23.14 24 25.62 24.89 24.33 23.86 23.47 23.14 22.84 22.57 22.33 22.11 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK OK 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 12 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 16 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 24 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK DESIGN INFORMATION Stud Properties Stud Spacing (in) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6: Stud Check LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5: Stud Check DF #2 2x6: Stud Check Spacing (in) Height (ft) Spacing (in) Height (ft) WALL STUD DESIGN - GABLE Spacing (in) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6 LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5 DF #2 2x6 C&C Wind Pressure, Zone 5 (ASD) (psf) Page 135 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Velocity Pressure, q z = 27.51 psf Deflection Limit = L/240 Internal Pressure Coefficient, GC pi = 0.18 Max Stud Pack = 6 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 23.86 23.14 22.57 22.11 21.72 21.38 21.08 20.82 20.57 20.35 6 22.84 22.11 21.54 21.08 20.69 20.35 20.06 19.79 19.55 19.33 8 22.11 21.38 20.82 20.35 19.96 19.63 19.33 19.06 18.82 18.60 10 21.54 20.82 20.25 19.79 19.40 19.06 18.76 18.50 18.25 18.03 12 21.08 20.35 19.79 19.33 18.94 18.60 18.30 18.03 17.79 17.57 14 20.69 19.96 19.40 18.94 18.55 18.21 17.91 17.64 17.40 17.18 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 12 1 1 2 2 3 5 14 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 6 6 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 6 8 1 1 1 2 3 4 6 10 1 1 2 2 4 5 12 1 1 2 3 4 6 14 1 1 2 3 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 6 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 8 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 10 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 12 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 14 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 C&C Wind Pressure, Zone 5 (ASD) (psf) DESIGN INFORMATION DF #2 2x6: Number of King Studs Opening (ft) Height (ft) LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5: Number of King Studs Opening (ft) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6: Number of King Studs Opening (ft) Height (ft) KING STUD DESIGN Opening (ft) Height (ft) Page 136 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Include Typ Nailing in Framing Clip Capacity? Yes Typical Nailing: 10d Nail 378 lbs 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 143 185 226 265 304 342 379 416 453 488 8 206 265 323 379 435 488 542 594 645 696 10 265 342 416 488 559 628 696 762 828 893 12 323 416 506 594 679 762 [PHONE REDACTED] 1082 14 379 488 594 696 795 [PHONE REDACTED] 1174 1265 16 435 559 679 [PHONE REDACTED] 1128 1235 1340 1443 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 8 NA NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 NA A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 12 A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA *NA = Typical Nailing 10d into end grain of each king stud is sufficient. 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 8 NA NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 12 A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA *NA = Typical Nailing 10d into end grain of each king stud is sufficient. 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA 8 NA NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 NA A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 12 A34 A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 A34 A34 NA A34 NA NA NA NA NA NA *NA = Typical Nailing 10d into end grain of each king stud is sufficient. DESIGN INFORMATION Opening (ft) Height (ft) Reaction of King Stud (ASD) (lbs) Opening (ft) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6: Required Framing Clip or Nailing for King Studs* Opening (ft) Height (ft) KING STUD CONNECTION DESIGN LSL 1.3E 1.5x5.5: Required Framing Clip or Nailing for King Studs* Opening (ft) Height (ft) DF #2 2x6: Required Framing Clip or Nailing for King Studs* Page 137 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 138 of 150 LATERAL DESIGN ---PAGE BREAK--- SS : 0.294 S1 : 0.107 Fa : 1.565 Fv : 2.385 SMS : 0.46 SM1 : 0.256 SDS : 0.307 SD1 : 0.171 TL : 6 PGA : 0.13 PGA M : 0.201 FPGA : 1.539 Ie : 1.25 Cv : 0.889 Seismic Design Category: C Design Response Spectrum S vs T(s) a MCE Response Spectrum R S vs T(s) a Design Vertical Response Spectrum S vs T(s) a MCE Vertical Response Spectrum R S vs T(s) a Seismic D - Default (see Section 11.4.3) Site Soil Class: Results: Data Accessed: Thu Jun 19 2025 Date Source: USGS Seismic Design Maps based on ASCE/SEI 7-16 and ASCE/SEI 7-16 Table 1.5-2. Additional data for site-specific ground motion procedures in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-16 Ch. 21 are available from USGS. Page 2 of 3 Thu Jun 19 2025 Page 139 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Seismic Design Criteria ASCE 7-16 Ch. 11 Site Class D (defl't) 11.4.3 Risk Cateogry III 11.5 Importance Factor I e 1.25 11.5.1 Seismic Design Category SDC C 11.6 Structural Height 27 ft Redudancy Factor ρ 1 Short-Period Spectral Response Accel. Parameter S s 0.293 11.4.2 1s Period Spectral Response Accel. Parameter S 1 0.107 11.4.2 Short-Period Site Coefficient F a 1.5656 Long-Period Site Coefficient F v 2.386 MCER Short Period Spectral Response Accel. Parameter S MS 0.4587 g 11.4.4 MCER 1s Period Spectral Response Accel. Parameter S M1 0.2553 g 11.4.4 Design Short-Period Spectral Response Accel. ParameterS DS 0.31 g 11.4.5 Design 1s Period Spectral Response Accel. Parameters S D1 0.1702 g 11.4.5 Fundamental Building Period T o 0.111 s 11.4.6 Short Building Period T S 0.557 s 11.4.6 Long Building Period T L 6 s Seismic Force Resisting System ASCE 7-16 Ch. 12 Seismic Force Resisting System Approx. Fundamental Period T a 0.24 s Response Modification Factor R 6.5 Overstrength Factor Ω 3 Drift Amplification Factor C d 4 Seismic Response Coefficient C SX = 0.059 Eq. 12.8-2 Seismic Force Resisting System Approx. Fundamental Period T a 0.24 s Response Modification Factor R 6.5 Overstrength Factor Ω 3 Drift Amplification Factor C d 4 Seismic Response Coefficient C SY = 0.059 Eq. 12.8-2 All other Structural Systems Y Direction 15. Light-framed walls sheathed with wood structural panels rated for shear or steel sheets EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE Table 11.4-1 & 2 All other Structural Systems X Direction 15. Light-framed walls sheathed with wood structural panels rated for shear or steel sheets Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 140 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Building Data Structure Type: Enclosure Classification: Exposure Category: C Minimum Building Length: 64.00 ft Mean Roof Height: 27.00 ft Wind Edge Distance (a a = 6.40 ft 2a = 12.80 ft Velocity Pressure Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient (K z ) K z = 0.956 Table 26.10-1 Topographic Factor (K zt ) K zt = 1.000 Figure 26.8-1 Wind Directionality Factor (K d ) K d = 0.850 Table 26.6-1 Basic Wind Speed (V ) V = 115 mph 26.5.1 Velocity Pressure (q z ) q z = 27.51 psf 26.10.2 Pressure Coefficients Internal Pressure Coefficients (GC pi ) GC pi = 0.18 Table 26.13-1 Roof Pitch 6 /12 Design Roof Angle 26.57 ° Figure 28.3-1 Load Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 Center 0.55 -0.10 -0.45 -0.39 - - Edge 0.73 -0.19 -0.58 -0.53 - - Center -0.45 -0.69 -0.37 -0.45 0.40 -0.29 Edge -0.48 -1.07 -0.53 -0.48 0.61 -0.43 Design Wind Pressures 28.3.1 Load Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 Center 10.17 -7.68 -17.25 -15.70 - - Edge 15.07 -10.19 -21.05 -19.67 - - Center -17.33 -23.93 -15.13 -17.33 6.05 -12.93 Edge -18.16 -34.39 -19.53 -18.16 11.83 -16.78 Simplified Design Wind Pressures 28.5.3 A B C D E F G H Min 16.00 8.00 16.00 8.00 - - - - (LRFD) A 34.74 4.86 25.87 4.28 -4.56 -9.41 -3.43 -7.72 (LRFD) B 28.61 -6.64 18.98 -3.94 -15.38 -8.74 -10.70 -6.77 (LRFD) Design 20.84 4.80 15.52 4.80 9.23 5.65 6.42 4.63 (ASD) Buildings: Main Wind Force Resisting System Enclosed Buildings A Design Wind Pressures (p ) psf A B Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. WIND LOADS ENVELOPE PROCEDURE Load Case Horizontal Vertical B External Pressure Coefficients (GC pf ) Page 141 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 142 of 150 DIAPHRAM CALC MAPS 3 A20 1 A201 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C 13 14 16 3 A301 1 A301 15 17 G A 6:12 6:12 4 A301 6:12 6:12 6:12 6:12 6:12 6:12 6:12 6:12 3:12 4:12 6:12 6:12 3:12 3:12 3:12 2' 0" 2'-4" 2'-4" 1 A306 1 A306 5 A306 11 A306 10 A306 10 A306 8 A306 8 A306 3 A306 3 A306 8 A306 15 A306 6 A306 7 A306 9 A306 15 A306 6,169.999 sf T T T T T OVEN DW DW TABLE STORAGE 109 SERVING/ WARMING 110 LOBBY 102 WOMEN'S MEN'S RESTROOM 104 GROUNDSKEEPING 106 110 JANITOR 105 WASH 107 106B 104 103 104 106D 2A 102B 109 107 105 106A 06C 06C E A702 1 SF1 SF2 A800 1 2 3 C E E A E E C F C C G C 1 27'-5" 7'-0 1/2" 6'-10" 5'-6" T T T T T OVEN DW 201 1428 SF STORAGE 201 1112 SF MECHANICAL 202 A800 1 2 3 202 G D 5'-0 1/2" C C C E 1 6 A305 5,081.231 sf 4,254.553 sf 2,661.924 sf ROOF C ROOF A ROOF B UPPER FLOOR ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 143 of 150 WIND LOADING X DIRECTION FIR SECO PEAK - H B C D E G PEAK - L A F SF2 SF2 SF5 SF6 372 sf 455 sf 99 sf 238 sf 6'-5" 6'-5" 26 sf 76 sf 43 sf P B C D E G P A F SF6 8'-6" 6'-4 1/2" 329 sf 647 sf 6'-5" 6'-5" 56 sf 104 sf ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 144 of 150 WIND LOADING Y DIRECTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 SF6 959 sf 242 sf 234 sf 113 sf 141 sf 416 sf 81 sf 730 sf 51 sf 23 sf 51 sf 23 sf 12'-10" 12'-10" 216 sf 112 sf 22 sf 637 sf 454 sf 35 sf 36 sf 163 sf ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Design Wind Pressures (ASD) (psf) Design Loads (psf) Design Coefficients (ASD) (psf) Zone Pressure DL SL CsX = 0.041 A 20.84 Roof 20 0.00 ρX = 1.00 B 4.80 Floor 20 CsY = 0.041 C 15.52 Wall 12 ρY = 1.00 D 4.80 Wind Seismic A B C D (lbs) Roof Floor Wall (lbs) ROOF A 29.5 43 0 372 0 6670 4255 0 1932 6447 ROOF B 14.8 26 76 [PHONE REDACTED] 6170 0 2988 4741 ROOF C 24.0 104 0 647 0 12210 5081 0 3852 7162 UPPER FLOOR 12.7 56 0 329 0 6274 0 2662 1890 1941 Total Base Shear = 33.5 k Total Base Shear = 20.3 k Wind Seismic A B C D (lbs) Roof Floor Wall (lbs) ROOF A 29.5 36 163 [PHONE REDACTED] 4255 0 1932 6447 ROOF B 14.8 176 113 871 454 19909 6170 0 2988 4741 ROOF C 24.0 22 216 81 730 6257 5081 0 3852 7162 UPPER FLOOR 12.7 112 0 416 0 8791 0 2662 1890 1941 Total Base Shear = 44.8 k Total Base Shear = 20.3 k COSTAR_EC Diaphragm DIAPHRAGM LOADS Seismic Star Event Center City of Star 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Wind Main Wing Y-Direction X-Direction Diaphragm Elevation (ft) Elevation (ft) Wind Area (ft2) Wind Area (ft2) Seismic Area (ft2) Seismic Area (ft2) Page 145 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Nail Type # Nails Capacity (lbs) 16d 12 2707 Wind Seismic Wind Seismic 6670 6447 36.0 102.0 32.7 294 0.08 U6/12 U6/12 8321 4741 64.0 102.0 40.8 653 0.18 U6/12 U6/12 12210 7162 64.0 60.0 101.8 1628 0.47 U6/12 U6/12 6274 1941 44.0 60.0 52.3 575 0.15 U6/12 U6/12 Wind Seismic 9892 6447 102.0 36.0 137.4 3503 1.48 U6/12 U6/12 19909 4741 102.0 64.0 155.5 3966 1.38 U6/12 U6/12 6257 7162 60.0 64.0 55.9 839 0.24 U6/12 U6/12 8791 1941 60.0 44.0 99.9 1499 0.45 U6/12 U6/12 COSTAR_EC Main Wing (Y-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF C Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF B Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF A Top Place Splice Capacity X-Direction L (ft) W (ft) V (plf) Main Wing (X-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF C Y-Direction Fc (lbs) δ (in) Diaphragm Nailing Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF B Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF A L (ft) W (ft) V (plf) Fc (lbs) FH (lbs) δ (in) Diaphragm Nailing DIAPHRAGM DESIGN Star Event Center City of Star 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. FH (lbs) Diaphragm - Wing Diaphragm Wing - FH = Horizontal force on diaphragm L = Length of diaphragm (Perpendicular to force) W = Width of diaphragm (Parallel to force) V = Controling Unit shear in diaphragm Fc = Max chord force Φ = Percentage of L for chord force δ = Diaphragm deflection E = Chord modulus of elasticity A = Chord cross-section area ΦAR = Aspect ratio Ga = Diaphragm shear stiffness x = Distance from chord splice to nearest support Δc = Diaphragm chord splice slip 𝑉= ଶ∗ௐ Φ𝐹௖= ଶ∗ௐ 𝛿= ଶ∗ௐ Page 146 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 147 of 150 SHEARWALL CALC MAPS B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 S302 1 W/ TOP PLATE W/ TOP PLATE 2 2 SW-A SW-A SW-B 2 2 SW-A SW-A FTAO - REF SW-C 1/S301 SW-B SW-A W/ TOP PLATE W/ TOP PLATE SW-A A A A A A A A A A A A A B C D E G A F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 15 17 S302 1 W/ TOP PLATE 6 SW-A W/ TOP PLATE SW-B 6 SW-A SW-C W/ TOP PLATE 6 SW-A SW-B 3/32" = 1'-0" S104 1 1ST FLOOR LATERAL PLAN 3/32" = 1'-0" S104 2 SECOND FLOOR LATERAL PLAN SW A.01 SW B.01 SW E.01 SW 15.01 SW 1.01 SW 6.01 SW A.02 SW A.03 SW C/D.02 SW F.02 SW F.02 SW 15.02 SW 1.02 SW 6.02 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. X-Direction Wind Seismic Wind Seismic Wind Seismic B/E.01 6670 6447 102 51.0 0 0 3335 3224 A.01 12210 7162 60 30.0 0 0 6105 3581 A.02 6274 1941 60 15.0 6105 3581 7674 4066 A.03 8321 4741 102 51.0 3335 3224 7496 5594 C/D.02 6274 1941 60 45.0 0 0 4705 1456 6670 6447 102 51.0 0 0 3335 3224 8321 4741 102 51.0 3335 3224 7496 5594 F.02 12210 7162 60 30.0 7496 5594 13601 9175 Y-Direction Wind Seismic Wind Seismic Wind Seismic 1.01 6257 7162 64 32.0 0 0 3128 3581 6.01 9892 6447 36 18.0 3128 3581 8074 6804 15.01 9892 6447 36 18.0 0 0 4946 3224 1.02 8791 1941 44 22.0 3128 3581 7524 4551 19909 4741 64 32.0 8074 6804 18029 9175 6.02 8791 1941 44 22.0 18029 9175 22425 10145 15.02 19909 4741 64 32.0 4946 3224 14901 5594 Wall Line Wing - Diaphragm Base Shear (lbs) Shear Above (lbs) Grid Force FHX (lbs) Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF A Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF C Diaphragm Length (ft) Tributary Width (ft) Main Wing (X-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF B Main Wing (X-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF A Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF B Main Wing (X-Dir) - ROOF C Grid Force FHX (lbs) Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF C Wall Line Diaphragm - Wing Main Wing (Y-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Base Shear (lbs) Diaphragm Length (ft) Tributary Width (ft) Shear Above (lbs) Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF A Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF A Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF B Main Wing (Y-Dir) - UPPER FLOOR Main Wing (Y-Dir) - ROOF B LATERAL FORCE PER WALL LINE COSTAR_EC Sierra Coalson P.E. City of Star 9/9/2025 Star Event Center Page 148 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client City of Star Project Number Date Eng. Sierra Coalson P.E. Design Loads (psf) DL SL Roof 20 0.00 Floor 15 Wall 10 Roof Floor Wall X-DIRECTION A.01 60.00 60.00 5.00 1.00 Segmented 6105 30525 14.00 0.00 0.00 504000 0 0 0 0 102 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA B/E.01 102.00 102.00 7.00 1.00 Perforated 3224 23346 3.00 0.00 0.00 312120 200 0 0 0 3.88 26.67 89 0.90 48 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA A.02 60.00 60.00 11.25 1.00 Segmented 7674 86327 14.00 7.00 5.00 783000 0 0 0 0 128 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA A.03 102.00 102.00 14.00 1.00 Segmented 5594 104942 3.00 0.00 0.00 312120 0 0 0 0 55 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA F.02 102.00 144.63 14.00 0.62 Perforated 13601 134293 8.00 0.00 0.00 832320 533 0 0 0 4.33 26.67 227 0.66 174 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 17.88 144.63 14.00 0.88 Perforated 13601 23534 14.00 0.00 0.00 44732 1120 0 0 0 6.17 3.33 27 0.85 113 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 24.75 144.63 14.00 1.00 Segmented 13601 32586 14.00 0.00 0.00 85759 1120 0 0 0 94 U6/12 3.33 27 Holdown NA NA NA Y-DIRECTION 1.01 44.00 44.00 12.50 1.00 Perforated 3581 44760 3.00 0.00 0.00 58080 740 0 0 0 13.75 12.33 126 0.71 159 6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 6.01 19.75 31.75 18.00 1.00 Segmented 6804 90408 8.00 0.00 0.00 31205 0 6790 0 3630 214 6/12 Strap MST48 NA NA 12.00 31.75 7.50 1.00 Segmented 6804 22888 3.00 0.00 0.00 4320 0 2411 0 1691 214 6/12 Strap MST48 NA NA 15.01 36.00 36.00 12.00 1.00 Perforated 4946 59353 2.00 0.00 10.00 90720 1260 0 0 0 13.50 9.00 86 0.74 246 6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 1.02 18.00 51.75 11.25 0.71 Perforated 7524 29442 3.00 2.00 12.00 34020 630 4835 0 425 4.00 3.00 24 0.75 206 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 13.75 51.75 11.25 1.00 Segmented 7524 22490 3.00 2.00 12.00 19852 0 3657 0 769 145 U6/12 Holdown NA NA NA 20.00 51.75 17.00 1.00 Segmented 7524 49433 3.00 0.00 0.00 12000 0 3312 0 2112 145 U6/12 Holdown HDU2 SSTB16 12 5/8 6.02 29.00 48.35 11.25 1.00 Perforated 22425 151315 2.00 0.00 10.00 58870 887 10799 0 5852 8.50 6.33 51 0.80 666 3/12 Holdown HDU8 PAB7 9 5.60 48.35 11.25 1.00 Segmented 22425 29219 2.00 0.00 10.00 2195 0 5767 0 4983 466 4/12 Holdown HDU5 SB5/8X24 18 13.75 48.35 15.75 1.00 Segmented 22425 100442 2.00 0.00 10.00 13234 0 8652 0 6727 464 4/12 Holdown HDU8 PAB7 9 15.02 64.00 64.00 16.00 1.00 FTAO 14901 238412 2.00 0.00 10.00 [PHONE REDACTED] 13786 0 3566 3.00 39.00 351 0.66 892 2/12 Holdown HDU5 SB5/8X24 18 SHEARWALL DESIGN WALL OVERTURNING SEGMENTED PERFORATED HOLDOWNS PH (lbs) Wall Line L (ft) Lt (ft) h (ft) ΦAR Design Type Sheathing Type, Nail Size & Stud FHX (lbs) MOT (lb-ft) Tributary (ft) MR (lb-ft) V (ASD) (plf) Shearwa ll Nailing Holdown or Strap Needed Cd (lbs) TAbove (lbs) Tu (lbs) V (ASD) (plf) Shearwa ll Nailing b (ft) 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC Anchor Bolt Anchor Embed. (in) Lo (ft) Ao (ft2) Co 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 9/9/2025 Star Event Center COSTAR_EC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC 7/16", 8d, 16" OC L = Length of Individual Wall Section b = Minimum Length of Wall Section Included Lt = Total length of wall along grid line Lo = Total Lengh of Opening in Perforated Wall h = Height of wall FHX = Horizontal force along grid line ΦAR = Aspect ratio factor V = Unit shear in wall MOT = Overturning moment in wall section MR = Resisting moment due to dead load PH = Point load due to header Cd = Compression force (No Compresion when Tu = 0 lbs) Tu = Tension uplift Co = Perforated Shearwall Adjustment Factor r = Sheathing Area Ratio Ao = Total Area of Openings SFx = Safety Factor for Wind or Seismic 𝑖𝑓 ௛ 3.5,0, 𝑖𝑓 ௛ 2, ௛ , 1 𝑉= ௅మ ଶ 𝑟 3 −2𝑟 𝐿௧ ∑𝐿 𝑟= 1 1 + 𝐴௢ ℎ∑Φ஺ோ∗𝐿 𝑇௨= 𝑀𝐴𝑋 −0.6 0 + Page 149 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- Project Name Client Project Number Date Eng. SHEAR WALL 15.02 Vasd = 6.50' 6.00' 3.00' 9.00' 3.00' 9.00' 3.00' 9.00' 3.00' 6.00' 6.50' 7.00' 42 509 -388 509 -637 509 -637 509 -388 509 42 364 698 892 892 698 364 42 -388 -637 -637 -388 42 vn = 892 PLF T = 3566# HOLDOWN FORCE = 3566 LBS C = 3566# STRAP FORCE = 2293 LBS O1 3056.8 O2 4585.2 O3 4585.2 O4 4585.2 O5 3056.8 F1 2091.5 F3 2292.6 F5 2292.6 F7 2292.6 F9 965.3 F2 965.3 F4 2292.6 F6 2292.6 F8 2292.6 F10 2091.5 T1 4.105 T3 4.500 T5 4.500 T7 4.500 T9 1.895 T2 1.895 T4 4.500 T6 4.500 T8 4.500 T10 4.105 V1 363.66 V2 698 V3 891.56 V4 891.56 V5 698 V6 363.66 R1 2363.8 R2 2094 R3 2674.7 R4 2674.7 R5 2094 R6 2363.8 R1-F1 272.33R2-F2-F3 -1164R3-F4-F5 -1910R4-F6-F7 -1910R5-F8-F9 -1164-F10-F11 272.33 VC1 41.897 VC2 -388 VC3 -636.8 VC4 -636.8 VC5 -388 VC6 41.897 FORCE TRANSFER AROUND OPENING (FTAO) DESIGN PANEL 6 OPENING 5 OPENING 4 OPENING 3 OPENING 2 OPENING 1 PANEL 1 PANEL 2 PANEL 3 PANEL 4 PANEL 5 14.3 kips 16.00' 9.00' 64.00' Star Event Center City of Star COSTAR_EC 9/9/2025 Sierra Coalson P.E. Page 150 of 150 ---PAGE BREAK--- COMcheck Software Version COMcheckWeb Envelope Compliance Certificate Project Title: 2018 IECC Project Type: New Construction Vertical Glazing / Wall Area: 11% Location: Eagle (Ada), Idaho Climate Zone: 5b Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Project Information Energy Code: COSTAR_EC Credits: 1.0 Required 1.0 Proposed Enhanced Envelope Performance, 1.0 credit Additional Efficiency Package(s) Building Area Floor Area 1-Convention Center : Nonresidential 9800 Envelope Assemblies Assembly Cavity R-Value Cont. R-Value Proposed U-Factor Budget U- Factor(a) Gross Area or Perimeter Roof: Other Insulation Above Deck Roof, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 2204 0.026 0.032 Roof: Other Attic Roof, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 5994 0.021 0.027 NORTH Ext. Wall: Other Wood Framed Wall, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 3470 0.036 0.064 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 1 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Assembly Cavity R-Value Cont. R-Value Proposed U-Factor Budget U- Factor(a) Gross Area or Perimeter Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 EAST Ext. Wall: Other Wood Framed Wall, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 1640 0.036 0.064 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 74 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 16 0.370 0.380 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SingleDoor, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.370 0.770 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID AlumTerraceDoors, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 90 0.350 0.770 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID AlumTerraceDoors, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 90 0.350 0.770 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID AlumTerraceDoors, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 90 0.350 0.770 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SingleDoor, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.370 0.770 SOUTH Ext. Wall: Other Wood Framed Wall, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 3275 0.036 0.064 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Non-Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID AlumDoor, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.350 0.450 Door: Insulated Metal, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.400 0.370 Door: Glass (over 50% glazing): Metal Frame, Non-Entrance Door, Perf. Specs.: Product ID AlumDoor, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 48 0.350 0.450 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 2 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Assembly Cavity R-Value Cont. R-Value Proposed U-Factor Budget U- Factor(a) Gross Area or Perimeter Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 30 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 30 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 26 0.370 0.380 WEST Ext. Wall: Other Wood Framed Wall, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 1614 0.036 0.064 Door: Other (U-Factor option), Garage door 14% glazing, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 120 0.260 0.310 Door: Insulated Metal, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 24 0.400 0.370 Door: Wood, Swinging, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 120 0.500 0.370 Window: Metal Frame with Thermal Break: Fixed, Perf. Specs.: Product ID SB70/451T, SHGC 0.27, [Bldg. Use 1 - Convention Center] 12 0.370 0.380 Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements. 'Other' components require supporting documentation for proposed U-factors. Fenestration product performance must be certified in accordance with NFRC and requires supporting documentation. Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 3 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Envelope Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed envelope systems have been designed to meet the 2018 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version COMcheckWeb and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Name - Title Signature Date Envelope PASSES: Design 19% better than code Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 4 of Page Jeff Rupp - Architect 9.9.2025 Jeff Rupp ---PAGE BREAK--- COMcheck Software Version COMcheckWeb Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate Project Title: 2018 IECC Project Type: New Construction Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Project Information Energy Code: COSTAR_EC Credits: 1.0 Required 0.0 Proposed Additional Efficiency Package(s) Allowed Interior Lighting Power A Area Category B Floor Area (ft2) C Allowed Watts / ft2 D Allowed Watts 1-Women's Restroom 103 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) 280 0.85 238 2-Fire Riser/ Electrical Server 101 (Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical) 160 0.43 69 3-Coat Closet 100A (Common Space Types:Storage) 75 0.63 47 4-Vestibule 100 (Common Space Types:Corridor/Transition ft wide) 125 0.66 82 5-Lobby 102 (Common Space Types:Lobby - General) 490 1.00 490 6-Men's Restroom 104 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) 280 0.85 238 7-Janitor 106 (Common Space Types:Storage) 60 0.63 38 8-Wash 107 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) 60 0.85 51 9-Groundskeeping 106 (Common Space Types:Storage) 975 0.63 614 10-Storage 109 (Common Space Types:Storage) 655 0.63 413 11-Event 108 (Common Space Types:Atrium) (Ceiling Height 25 ft.) 6050 0.75 4538 12-Storage 108 A (Common Space Types:Storage) 230 0.63 145 13-Audio Booth (Common Space Types:Computer Room) 50 1.33 66 14-Storage 201 (Common Space Types:Storage) 1450 0.63 914 15-Mechanical 202 (Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical) 1130 0.43 486 8429 Total Allowed Watts = Allowed watts per sq. ft. adjusted for ceiling height. Proposed Interior Lighting Power E (C X D) D Fixture Watt. A Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast B Lamps/ Fixture C # of Fixture 1-Women's Restroom 103 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) LED: D1: Can Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: D1E: Emergency Can Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: B3: 3' Strip Light: Other: 1 3 25 75 LED: B4: 3' Vanity: Other: 1 1 25 25 2-Fire Riser/ Electrical Server 101 (Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical) LED: B2: 4' Strip Light: Other: 1 1 34 34 3-Coat Closet 100A (Common Space Types:Storage) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/02/25 Report date: 7 1 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- E (C X D) D Fixture Watt. A Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast B Lamps/ Fixture C # of Fixture LED: A1: 2x4 Volumetric: Other: 1 1 38 38 4-Vestibule 100 (Common Space Types:Corridor/Transition ft wide) LED: A1E: Emergency 2x4 Volumetric: Other: 1 1 38 38 5-Lobby 102 (Common Space Types:Lobby - General) LED: A1: 2x4 Volumetric: Other: 1 5 38 190 LED: A1E: Emergency 2x4 Volumetric: Other: 1 1 38 38 LED: X1: Exit Sign: Other: 2 1 5 5 6-Men's Restroom 104 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) LED: D1: Can Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: D1E: Emergency Can Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: B3: 3' Strip Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: B4: 3' Vanity: Other: 1 1 25 25 7-Janitor 106 (Common Space Types:Storage) LED: B2: 4' Strip Light: Other: 1 1 34 34 8-Wash 107 (Common Space Types:Restrooms) LED: B3: 3' Strip Light: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: B5: 2' Vanity: Other: 1 1 25 25 LED: D3: 6" Downlight: Other: 1 1 25 25 9-Groundskeeping 106 (Common Space Types:Storage) LED: B1: 8' Linear Lowbay: Other: 1 5 34 170 LED: X1: Exit Sign: Other: 2 1 5 5 LED: X2: Exit Light: Other: 2 1 5 5 10-Storage 109 (Common Space Types:Storage) LED: B2: 4' Strip Light: Other: 1 6 34 204 11-Event 108 (Common Space Types:Atrium) (Ceiling Height 25 ft.) LED: X1: Exit Sign: Other: 2 3 5 15 LED: C1: Other: 1 3 177 531 LED: L1: Other: 1 16 56 896 LED: L1E: Other: 1 16 56 896 12-Storage 108 A (Common Space Types:Storage) LED: T2: Track Light: Other: 1 6 34 204 13-Audio Booth (Common Space Types:Computer Room) 14-Storage 201 (Common Space Types:Storage) LED: B2: 4' Strip Light: Other: 1 8 34 272 15-Mechanical 202 (Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical) LED: B2: 4' Strip Light: Other: 1 4 34 136 4036 Total Proposed Watts = Interior Lighting Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed interior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed interior lighting systems have been designed to meet the 2018 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version COMcheckWeb and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Name - Title Signature Date Interior Lighting PASSES: Design 52% better than code Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/02/25 Report date: 7 2 of Page Gary Glassing,PE 09/03/2025 ---PAGE BREAK--- COMcheck Software Version COMcheckWeb Exterior Lighting Compliance Certificate Project Title: 2018 IECC Project Type: New Construction Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Project Information Energy Code: COSTAR_EC 2 (Residential mixed use area (LZ2)) Exterior Lighting Zone Allowed Exterior Lighting Power A Area/Surface Category B Quantity C Allowed Watts / D Tradable Wattage E Allowed Watts (B X C) Building Overhang (Entry canopy) 3400 ft2 0.25 Yes 850 Total Tradable Watts = Total Allowed Watts = Total Allowed Supplemental Watts = 850 850 400 Wattage tradeoffs are only allowed between tradable areas/surfaces. A supplemental allowance equal to 400 watts may be applied toward compliance of both non-tradable and tradable areas/surfaces. Proposed Exterior Lighting Power E (C X D) D Fixture Watt. A Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast B Lamps/ Fixture C # of Fixture Building Overhang (Entry canopy, 3400 ft2): Tradable Wattage LED: D1: Can Light: Other: 1 6 25 150 LED: D1E: Emergency Can Light: Other: 1 4 25 100 250 Total Tradable Proposed Watts = Exterior Lighting Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed exterior lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed exterior lighting systems have been designed to meet the 2018 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version COMcheckWeb and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Name - Title Signature Date Exterior Lighting PASSES: Design 80% better than code Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/02/25 Report date: 7 3 of Page 09/03/2025 Gary Glassing,PE ---PAGE BREAK--- COMcheck Software Version COMcheckWeb Mechanical Compliance Certificate Project Title: 2018 IECC Project Type: New Construction Location: Eagle (Ada), Idaho Climate Zone: 5b Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: Project Information Energy Code: COSTAR_EC Credits: 1.0 Required 1.0 Proposed Enhanced Envelope Performance, 1.0 credit Additional Efficiency Package(s) Mechanical Systems List Quantity System Type & Description Split System Heat Pump Heating Mode: Capacity = 104 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 3.50 COP, Required Efficiency = 3.30 COP Cooling Mode: Capacity = 116 kBtu/h, , Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 11.30 EER, Required Efficiency = 11.00 EER Proposed Part Load Efficiency = 14.50 IEER, Required Part Load Efficiency = 12.00 IEER Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 1 Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 1 Supply, Single-Zone VAV, 4000 CFM, 5.0 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 2 AHU-1,2 (Single Zone): Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 225 kBtu/h Proposed Efficiency = 88.60% Et, Required Efficiency: 80.00 % Et Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 1 Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 1 Supply, Single-Zone VAV, 4000 CFM, 5.0 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 2 AHU-1,2 Furnace (Single Zone): Heating: 1 each - Unit Heater, Electric, Capacity = 10 kBtu/h No minimum efficiency requirement applies Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 3 Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 9 Supply, Constant Volume, 505 CFM, 0.1 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 4 EUH-1 THRU 4 (Unknown w/ Heating: 1 each - Unit Heater, Gas, Capacity = 30 kBtu/h Proposed Efficiency = 83.00% Ec, Required Efficiency: 80.00 % Ec Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 2 Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 8 Supply, Constant Volume, 100 CFM, 0.1 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 2 UH-1,2 (Unknown w/ Heating: 1 each - Duct Furnace, Electric, Capacity = 23 kBtu/h 1 ERV-1 (Single Zone): Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 8 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Quantity System Type & Description No minimum efficiency requirement applies Fan System: ERV-1 Fan System Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 2 Supply, Constant Volume, 2140 CFM, 2.0 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP FAN 3 Exhaust, Constant Volume, 2140 CFM, 2.0 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP Split System Heat Pump Heating Mode: Capacity = 18 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 9.50 HSPF, Required Efficiency = 8.20 HSPF Cooling Mode: Capacity = 12 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 17.00 SEER, Required Efficiency = 14.00 SEER Proposed Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 , Required Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 Fan System: FC-1 Fan Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 4 Supply, Constant Volume, 494 CFM, 0.2 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 1 FC-1 (Single Zone): Split System Heat Pump Heating Mode: Capacity = 30 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 11.10 HSPF, Required Efficiency = 8.20 HSPF Cooling Mode: Capacity = 21 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 25.05 SEER, Required Efficiency = 14.00 SEER Proposed Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 , Required Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 Fan System: FC-2 Fan Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 5 Supply, Constant Volume, 593 CFM, 0.1 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 1 FC-2 (Single Zone): Split System Heat Pump Heating Mode: Capacity = 54 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 9.20 HSPF, Required Efficiency = 8.20 HSPF Cooling Mode: Capacity = 45 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 20.10 SEER, Required Efficiency = 14.00 SEER Proposed Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 , Required Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 Fan System: FC-3 Fan Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 6 Supply, Constant Volume, 450 CFM, 0.1 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 1 FC-3 (Single Zone): Split System Heat Pump Heating Mode: Capacity = 22 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 8.90 HSPF, Required Efficiency = 8.20 HSPF Cooling Mode: Capacity = 18 kBtu/h, Proposed Efficiency = 19.50 SEER, Required Efficiency = 14.00 SEER Proposed Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 , Required Part Load Efficiency = 0.00 Fan System: FC-4 Fan Compliance (Motor nameplate HP and fan efficiency method) : Passes Fans: FAN 7 Supply, Constant Volume, 1200 CFM, 0.2 motor nameplate hp, 0.0 fan efficiency grade, 0.0 total fan efficiency, 0.0 design fan efficiency , fan exception: Single fan 5HP 1 FC-4 (Single Zone): Gas Storage Water Heater, Capacity: 60 gallons, Input Rating: 120 kBtu/h w/ Circulation Pump Proposed Efficiency: 95.00 % Et, Required Efficiency: 80.00 % Et 1 Water Heater: Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 9 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Mechanical Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 2018 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version COMcheckWeb and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Name - Title Signature Date Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 10 of Page Philip Harsh - Mechanical EIT 9/9/2025 ---PAGE BREAK--- Inspection Checklist Requirements: 96.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software COMcheck Software Version COMcheckWeb Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For each requirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exception is being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided. Energy Code: 2018 IECC Section # & Req.ID Plan Review Complies? Comments/Assumptions C103.2 [PR1]1 Plans and/or specifications provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the building envelope and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C103.2 [PR2]1 Plans, specifications, and/or calculations provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the mechanical systems and equipment and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Load calculations per acceptable engineering standards and handbooks. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: Construction docs C103.2 [PR3]1 Plans, specifications, and/or calculations provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the service water heating systems and equipment and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Hot water system sized per manufacturer's sizing guide. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: Construction docs C103.2 [PR4]1 Plans, specifications, and/or calculations provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the interior lighting and electrical systems and equipment and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Information provided should include interior lighting power calculations, wattage of bulbs and ballasts, transformers and control devices. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E001, E200, E201 C103.2 [PR8]1 Plans, specifications, and/or calculations provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the exterior lighting and electrical systems and equipment and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Information provided should include exterior lighting power calculations, wattage of bulbs and ballasts, transformers and control devices. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200 C402.4.1 [PR10]1 The vertical fenestration area 30 percent of the gross above-grade wall area. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 11 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Plan Review Complies? Comments/Assumptions C402.4.1 [PR11]1 The skylight area 3 percent of the gross roof area. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.4.2 [PR14]1 In enclosed spaces > 2,500 ft2 directly under a roof with ceiling heights >15 ft. and used as an office, lobby, atrium, concourse, corridor, storage, gymnasium/exercise center, convention center, automotive service, manufacturing, non- refrigerated warehouse, retail store, distribution/sorting area, transportation, or workshop, the following requirements apply: the daylight zone under skylights is half the floor area; the skylight area to daylight zone is 3 percent with a skylight VT 0.40; or a minimum skylight effective aperture 1 percent. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C406 [PR9]1 Plans, specifications, and/or calculations provide all information with which compliance can be determined for the additional energy efficiency package options. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 12 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Footing / Foundation Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C303.2.1 [FO6]1 Exterior insulation protected against damage, sunlight, moisture, wind, landscaping and equipment maintenance activities. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.12.2 , C403.12.3 [FO9]3 Snow/ice melting system and freeze protection systems have sensors and controls configured to limit service for pavement temperature and outdoor temperature. future connection to controls. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 13 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Framing / Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C303.1.3 [FR12]2 Fenestration products rated in accordance with NFRC. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C303.1.3 [FR13]1 Fenestration products are certified as to performance labels or certificates provided. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.4.3 [FR10]1 Vertical fenestration SHGC value. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Envelope Assemblies table for values. C402.4.3, C402.4.3. 4 [FR8]1 Installed vertical fenestration U-factor and SHGC consistent with label specifications and as reported in plans and COMcheck reports. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Envelope Assemblies table for values. C402.5.1. 2.2 [FR20]1 The building envelope contains a continuous air barrier that is sealed in an approved manner and average assembly air leakage 0.04 cfm/ft2. Air barrier penetrations are sealed in an approved manner. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.5.2, C402.5.4 [FR18]3 Factory-built fenestration and doors are labeled as meeting air leakage requirements. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.5.7 [FR17]3 Vestibules are installed on all building entrances. Doors have self-closing devices. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Doors that open directly from a space =3000 ft2. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 14 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Plumbing Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C404.5, C404.5.1, C404.5.2 [PL6]3 Heated water supply piping conforms to pipe length and volume requirements. Refer to section details. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C404.6.1, C404.6.2 [PL3]1 Automatic time switches installed to automatically switch off the recirculating hot-water system or heat trace. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C404.6.3 [PL7]3 Pumps that circulate water between a heater and storage tank have controls that limit operation from startup to 5 minutes after end of heating cycle. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C404.7 [PL8]3 Demand recirculation water systems have controls that start the pump upon receiving a signal from the action of a user of a fixture or appliance and limits the temperature of the water entering the cold-water piping to 104°F. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 15 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Mechanical Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C402.2.6 [ME41]3 Thermally ineffective panel surfaces of sensible heating panels have insulation R-3.5. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C402.5.5, C403.2.4. 3 [ME3]3 Stair and elevator shaft vents have motorized dampers that automatically close. Refernece section C403.7.7 for operational details. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C403.7.7 [ME58]3 Outdoor air and exhaust systems have motorized dampers that automatically shut when not in use and meet maximum leakage rates. Check gravity dampers where allowed. Reference section language for operational details. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.11.3 [ME61]2 HVAC piping insulation insulated in accordance with Table C403.11.3. Insulation exposed to weather is protected from damage and is provided with shielding from solar radiation. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: Specs C403.8.4 [ME142]2 Motors for fans that are not less than 1/12 hp and less than 1 hp are electronically commutated motors or have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent. These motors have the means to adjust motor speed. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.8.5 [ME143]2 Each DX cooling system > 65 kBtu and chiller water/evaporative cooling system with fans > 1/4 hp are designed to vary the indoor fan airflow as a function of load and comply with detailed requirements of this section. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.12.1 [ME71]2 Systems that heat outside the building envelope are radiant heat systems controlled by an occupancy sensing device or timer switch. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C403.5.5 [ME113]2 Fault detection and diagnostics installed with air-cooled unitary DX units having economizers. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.2 [ME59]1 Natural or mechanical ventilation is provided in accordance with International Mechanical Code Chapter 4. Mechanical ventilation has capability to reduce outdoor air supply to minimum per IMC Chapter 4. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.7.1 [ME59]1 Demand control ventilation provided for spaces >500 ft2 and >25 people/1000 ft2 occupant density and served by systems with air side economizer, auto modulating outside air damper control, or design airflow >3,000 cfm. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Systems with energy recovery. C403.7.2 [ME115]3 Enclosed parking garage ventilation has automatic contaminant detection and capacity to stage or modulate fans to 50% or less of design capacity. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 16 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Mechanical Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C403.7.6 [ME141]3 HVAC systems serving guestrooms in Group R-1 buildings with > 50 guestrooms: Each guestroom is provided with controls that automatically manage temperature setpoint and ventilation (see sections C403.7.6.1 and C403.7.6.2). Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C403.7.4 [ME57]1 Exhaust air energy recovery on systems meeting Table C403.7.4(1) and C403.7.4(2). Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.7.5 [ME116]3 Kitchen exhaust systems comply with replacement air and conditioned supply air limitations, and satisfy hood rating requirements and maximum exhaust rate criteria. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C403.11.1 , C403.11.2 [ME60]2 HVAC ducts and plenums insulated in accordance with C403.11.1 and constructed in accordance with C403.11.2, verification may need to occur during Foundation Inspection. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: Specifications C403.5, C403.5.1, C403.5.2 [ME62]1 Air economizers provided where required, meet the requirements for design capacity, control signal, ventilation controls, high-limit shut-off, integrated economizer control, and provide a means to relieve excess outside air during operation. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.5.3. 3 [ME124]1 Air economizers automatically reduce outdoor air intake to the design minimum outdoor air quantity when outdoor air intake will not reduce cooling energy usage. See Table C403.5.3.3 for applicable device types and climate zones. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.5.3. 4 [ME125]1 System capable of relieving excess outdoor air during air economizer operation to prevent overpressurizing the building. The relief air outlet located to avoid recirculation into the building. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.5.3. 5 [ME126]1 Return, exhaust/relief and outdoor air dampers used in economizers have motorized dampers that automatically shut when not in use and meet maximum leakage rates. Reference section C403.7.7 for details. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 17 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Mechanical Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C403.4.3. 3.2 [ME121]3 Closed-circuit cooling tower within heat pump loop have either automatic bypass valve or lower leakage positive closure dampers. Open-circuit tower within heat pump loop have automatic valve to bypass all heat pump water flow around the tower. Open- or closed-circuit cooling towers used in conjunction with a separate heat exchanger have heat loss by shutting down the circulation pump on the cooling tower loop. Open- or closed circuit cooling towers have a separate heat exchanger to isolate the cooling tower from the heat pump loop, and heat loss is controlled by shutting down the circulation pump on the cooling tower loop. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C403.4.1. 4 [ME63]2 Heating for vestibules and air curtains with integral heating include automatic controls that shut off the heating system when outdoor air temperatures > 45F. Vestibule heating and cooling systems controlled by a thermostat in the vestibule with heating setpoint 60F and cooling setpoint 80F. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C404.2.1 [ME111]2 Gas-fired water-heating equipment installed in new buildings: where a singular piece of water-heating equipment 1,000 kBtu/h serves the entire building, thermal efficiency 90 Et. Where multiple pieces of water-heating equipment serve the building with combined rating 1,000 kBtu/h, the combined input- capacity-weighted-average thermal efficiency 90 Et. Exclude input rating of equipment in individual dwelling units and equipment 100 kBtu/h. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C408.2.2. 1 [ME53]3 Air outlets and zone terminal devices have means for air balancing. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.5, C403.5.1, C403.5.2 [ME123]3 Refrigerated display cases, walk-in coolers or walk-in freezers served by remote compressors and remote condensers not located in a condensing unit, have fan-powered condensers that comply with Sections C403.5.1 and refrigeration compressor systems that comply with C403.5.2.. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 18 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Rough-In Electrical Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C405.2.2. 2 [EL22]1 Spaces required to have light- reduction controls have a manual control that allows the occupant to reduce the connected lighting load in a reasonably uniform illumination pattern 50 percent. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.1, C405.2.1. 1 [EL18]1 Occupancy sensors installed in classrooms/lecture/training rooms, conference/meeting/multipurpose rooms, copy/print rooms, lounges/breakrooms, enclosed offices, open plan office areas, restrooms, storage rooms, locker rooms, warehouse storage areas, and other spaces 300 sqft that are enclosed by floor-to-ceiling height partitions. Reference section language C405.2.1.2 for control function in warehouses and section C405.2.1.3 for open plan office spaces. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.1. 2 [EL19]1 Occupancy sensors control function in warehouses: In warehouses, the lighting in aisleways and open areas is controlled with occupant sensors that automatically reduce lighting power by 50% or more when the areas are unoccupied. The occupant sensors control lighting in each aisleway independently and do not control lighting beyond the aisleway being controlled by the sensor. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C405.2.1. 3 [EL20]1 Occupant sensor control function in open plan office areas: Occupant sensor controls in open office spaces 300 sq.ft. have controls 1) configured so that general lighting can be controlled separately in control zones with floor areas 600 sq.ft. within the space, 2) automatically turn off general lighting in all control zones within 20 minutes after all occupants have left the space, 3) are configured so that general lighting power in each control zone is reduced by 80% of the full zone general lighting power within 20 minutes of all occupants leaving that control zone, and 4) are configured such that any daylight responsive control will activate space general lighting or control zone general lighting only when occupancy for the same area is detected. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.2, C405.2.2. 1, C405.2.2. 2 [EL21]2 Each area not served by occupancy sensors (per C405.2.1) have time- switch controls and functions detailed in sections C405.2.2.1 and C405.2.2.2. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 19 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Rough-In Electrical Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C405.2.3, C405.2.3. 1, C405.2.3. 2 [EL23]2 Daylight zones provided with individual controls that control the lights independent of general area lighting. See code section C405.2.3 Daylight-responsive controls for applicable spaces, C405.2.3.1 Daylight responsive control function and section C405.2.3.2 Sidelit zone. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.4 [EL26]1 Separate lighting control devices for specific uses installed per approved lighting plans. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.4 [EL27]1 Additional interior lighting power allowed for special functions per the approved lighting plans and is automatically controlled and separated from general lighting. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200, E201 C405.2.5 [EL28]null Manual controls required by the energy code are in a location with ready access to occupants and located where the controlled lights are visible, or identify the area served and their status. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200 C405.2.6 [EL30]null Automatic lighting controls for exterior lighting installed. Controls will be daylight controlled, set based on business operation time-of-day, or reduce connected lighting > 30%. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E200 C405.3 [EL6]1 Exit signs do not exceed 5 watts per face. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: E001, E200, E201 C405.6 [EL26]2 Low-voltage dry-type distribution electric transformers meet the minimum efficiency requirements of Table C405.6. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable C405.7 [EL27]2 Electric motors meet the minimum efficiency requirements of Tables C405.7(1) through C405.7(4). Efficiency verified through certification under an approved certification program or the equipment efficiency ratings shall be provided by motor manufacturer (where certification programs do not exist). Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable C405.8.2, C405.8.2. 1 [EL28]2 Escalators and moving walks comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and have automatic controls configured to reduce speed to the minimum permitted speed in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 or applicable local code when not conveying passengers. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C405.9 [EL29]2 Total voltage drop across the combination of feeders and branch circuits Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 20 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Insulation Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C303.1 [IN3]1 Roof insulation installed per manufacturer’s instructions. Blown or poured loose-fill insulation is installed only where the roof slope is in 12. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.2.1 [IN20]1 Insulation installed on a suspended ceiling having ceiling tiles is not being specified for roor/ceiling assemblies. Continuous insulation board installed in 2 or more layers with edge joints offset between layers. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C303.1 [IN10]2 Building envelope insulation is labeled with R-value or insulation certificate providing R-value and other relevant data. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C303.2 [IN7]1 Above-grade wall insulation installed per manufacturer’s instructions. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C105 [IN6]1 Installed above-grade wall insulation type and R-value consistent with insulation specifications reported in plans and COMcheck reports. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Envelope Assemblies table for values. C402.2.6 [IN18]3 Radiant panels and associated components, designed for heat transfer from the panel surfaces to the occupants or indoor space are insulated with a minimum of R-3.5. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C105 [IN2]1 Installed roof insulation type and R- value consistent with insulation specifications reported in plans and COMcheck reports. For some ceiling systems, verification may need to occur during Framing Inspection. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Envelope Assemblies table for values. C402.5.1. 1 [IN1]1 All sources of air leakage in the building thermal envelope are sealed, caulked, gasketed, weather stripped or wrapped with moisture vapor- permeable wrapping material to minimize air leakage. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 21 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Final Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C303.3, C408.2.5. 2 [FI17]3 Furnished O&M instructions for systems and equipment to the building owner or designated representative. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable C303.3, C408.2.5. 3 [FI8]3 Furnished O&M manuals for HVAC systems within 90 days of system acceptance. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C402.5.6 [FI37]1 Weatherseals installed on all loading dock cargo door openings and provide direct contact along the top and sides of vehicles parked in the doorway. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C402.5.8 [FI26]3 Recessed luminaires in thermal envelope to limit infiltration and be IC rated and labeled. Seal between interior finish and luminaire housing. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.2 [FI27]3 HVAC systems and equipment capacity does not exceed calculated loads. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 1 [FI47]3 Heating and cooling to each zone is controlled by a thermostat control. Minimum one humidity control device per installed humidification/dehumidification system. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 1.1 [FI42]3 Heat pump controls prevent supplemental electric resistance heat from coming on when not needed. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.4.1. 2 [FI38]3 Thermostatic controls have a 5 °F deadband. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 1.3 [FI20]3 Temperature controls have setpoint overlap restrictions. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 2 [FI39]3 Each zone equipped with setback controls using automatic time clock or programmable control system. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 2.1, C403.2.4. 2.2 [FI40]3 Automatic Controls: Setback to 55°F (heat) and 85°F (cool); 7-day clock, 2- hour occupant override, 10-hour backup Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C403.2.4. 2.3 [FI41]3 Systems include optimum start controls. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 22 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Final Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C404.3 [FI11]3 Heat traps installed on supply and discharge piping of non-circulating systems. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Exception: Requirement does not apply. C404.4 [FI25]2 All piping insulated in accordance with section details and Table C403.11.3. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. Location on plans/spec: Specifications C404.6.1 [FI12]3 Controls are installed that limit the operation of a recirculation pump installed to maintain temperature of a storage tank. System return pipe is a dedicated return pipe or a cold water supply pipe. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C405.4.1 [FI18]1 Interior installed lamp and fixture lighting power is consistent with what is shown on the approved lighting plans, demonstrating proposed watts are less than or equal to allowed watts. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Interior Lighting fixture schedule for values. C405.5.1 [FI19]1 Exterior lighting power is consistent with what is shown on the approved lighting plans, demonstrating proposed watts are less than or equal to allowed watts. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable See the Exterior Lighting fixture schedule for values. C408.1.1 [FI57]1 Building operations and maintenance documents will be provided to the owner. Documents will cover manufacturers' information, specifications, programming procedures and means of illustrating to owner how building, equipment and systems are intended to be installed, maintained, and operated. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.1 [FI28]1 Commissioning plan developed by registered design professional or approved agency. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.3. 1 [FI31]1 HVAC equipment has been tested to ensure proper operation. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.3. 2 [FI10]1 HVAC control systems have been tested to ensure proper operation, calibration and adjustment of controls. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.3. 3 [FI32]1 Economizers have been tested to ensure proper operation. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.4 [FI29]1 Preliminary commissioning report completed and certified by registered design professional or approved agency. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 23 of Page ---PAGE BREAK--- Section # & Req.ID Final Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions C408.2.5. 1 [FI7]3 Furnished HVAC as-built drawings submitted within 90 days of system acceptance. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.5. 1 [FI16]3 Furnished as-built drawings for electric power systems within 90 days of system acceptance. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable C408.2.5. 3 [FI43]1 An air and/or hydronic system balancing report is provided for HVAC systems. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.2.5. 4 [FI30]1 Final commissioning report due to building owner within 90 days of receipt of certificate of occupancy. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Requirement will be met. C408.3 [FI33]1 Lighting systems have been tested to ensure proper calibration, adjustment, programming, and operation. Complies Does Not Not Observable Not Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact (Tier 2) 3 Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Data filename: COSTAR_EC 09/09/25 Report date: 24 24 of Page

Document Star_doc_03cf944fc3

Full Text